Determination of Heat of Neutralization

DETERMINATION OF HEAT OF NEUTRALIZATION

Neutralization as heat is released during the reaction. From the experiment, we can see that the enthalpy of neutralization of each reaction is nearly the same. This is because in each neutralization, the same reaction occur: OH- + H+ > H2O The reaction can also be presented as: H3O+ + OH- > 2H2O The theoretical value for the enthalpy of neutralization is about -57 kJmol-1. However, in this experiment, all values of neutralization enthalpy obtained are smaller than the theoretical ones. This is due to some weakness and limitation. Drawbacks of the experiment: 1. The styrofoam cup used was not closed. As a result, heat can be transfer to the surrounding easily and the temperature of the solution obtained will be lower than the real one. 

When the experiment was done, the temperature was quite cold as the weather was cloudy. This can also affect the temperature of the solution as heat will be released to the surrounding even faster due to the chill environment. There was also a possibility for parallax error to happen as we human cannot avoid ourselves from making mistakes. Each neutralization was done only once. . For each neutralization, the same styrofoam cup was used. This can cause contamination whereby some solution might be neutralized right after it is poured into the empty cup.

Ways to Come Shortcomings

The styrofoam cup should be closed so that heat will not be easily released to the surrounding. If the temperature of the room where the experiment is to be done is cold, shut off all fans to minimized the loss of heat of the solution to the surrounding.  Calculate the uncertainties for each measurement and bring it along till the end of the calculation. To obtained more accurate results, each neutralization should be done more than once so that the average value can be obtained. Using different styrofoam cup for each neutralization can minimize contamination.

Conclusion: From the experiment, we can determine the heat of neutralization by calculating the amount of heat released when the reaction occur. The heat of neutralization for one mole of reaction can be done by dividing the heat released to the number of mole of the solution used in the reaction. 

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Determination Of Heat Of Neutralization. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Medical Transcription

Exam #02800501 – Penn Foster med trans As an office manager for DMD Medical Supplies, it is imperative that I ensure the company’s dollars are economically spent through the efficiency of my employees. Currently, the company is forced to pay $200 in overtime per month due to what appears to be ineffective time management as a whole throughout my group. Unfortunately I can only adjust the way two of these employees manage their time, as they are the individuals of whom I am in charge. In order to reduce and even eliminate overtime, the workload handed down by the executive team needs to be re-dispersed more evenly between Ruth Disselkoen and Jack Snyder. Jack will now have less free time for longer breaks and late arrivals to work, and Ruth will have enough time for the allotted breaks allowed every day and to get her daily work effectively completed. In order to make Ruth and Jack accountable for overall improved output, I will ask the executives to fill out evaluations based on work quality, efficiency, and effectiveness. These evaluations will be used to reward efficiency on a quarterly basis with the purpose of getting my employees back on track through goal-setting that will not cost the company extra money. It will give them something to strive toward and break the monotony of every day tasks. As their manager, I will be making sure responsibilities are completed through implementing the steps taken for a more efficient office while reducing and eliminating overtime.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Medical Transcription. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Subject of Sunderland

Table of Contents Introduction2 Task 1a:3 Task 1b:8 Task 1c:12 Task 2a:13 Task 2b:15 Task 2c:17 Conclusion20 References21 Introduction Vinamilk is the symbol of success of public company in Vietnam. Many reasons are given to explain the success. In this assignment, by combining theory and reality of Vianmilk, I will try to explain for success of Vinamilk. I will mention to stakeholders of Vinamilk, I will evaluate the mutual influence between Vinamilk and stakeholders; what stakeholders hope from Vinamilk; what Vinamilk hope from stakeholders; how to both them make them satisfy mutually. After that, I will evaluate the effect of government on operation of company; how to company respond the requirement well. Although it is not an easy task, I hope I can complete well in assignment below. Task 1a: You are required to identify the mission, values and objectives of selected organization and assess the influence of stakeholders. Vinamilk is one of the local big companies in Vietnam. Their brand has become the habitual milk brand for customers in Vietnam market. The values of Vianmilk have affirmed for during a long time. Vinamilk builds missions, objects for company to continue developing in the future. Both of below information is taken from Vinamilk’s website. ? Mission: Vinamilk continues to expand its existing geographical coverage and product portfolios to maintain its[1]. ? Objectives: The objectives of the Company are to continually develop production, trading and service operations in its fields of business in order to maximize profits for Shareholders and to enhance the value of the Company; to never stop improving the lives, working conditions, and income of its employees; and to fulfill its tax obligations to the State. Additionally, Vinamilk connects the processing industry with the development of raw material zones with the aim of building a more independent source of raw materials now and in the future[2]. | | |Values : | | | |Vinamilk wish to be the most favorite product in all areas, territories. Therefore, we meditate that quality and creation is the | |companion of Vinamilk. Vinamilk considers customers our focus and commit to meet all demands of customers[3] | | | | | | | | | |There are three types of stakeholder who have influence on company. | | | | | Figure1. The influence of stakeholders on Vinamilk Internal stakeholders : Connected stakeholders : External stakeholders As we see from illustration, we can see the close relationship between Vinamilk and three kinds of stakeholder. They influence not only in company but also mutually. Internal stakeholders play an important role Inside the Company. They are the life of Vinamilk. They include managers and employees. They have to close connection so if they can cooperate together well the system of company can run efficiently. Therefore, vinamilk has to concentrate on developing this relationship. Besides, they want to have good work environment. They only work well if they work in good environment. Both of them join in all activities in company so they are the people who make decision the success or unsuccessful of Vinamilk. Especially, for managers, they manage all operation of company so all their decision influence on present and future of company. Besides, the role of employees is also important because they join work directly so the result of their work will influence on company. Therefore, Vinamilk never stop improving the lives, working conditions, and income of its employees. Connected stakeholders are very important for their company. Suppliers Suppliers will play an important role in quality and prices of products of Vinamilk. If they can supply good raw materials such as milk, tins, carton packaging and packaging machines etc with reasonable price for company, company can produce good products with competitive price. It will create advantages for the company in competition with competitors. Therefore, Vinamilk need build relationship with suppliers. However, suppliers can sell raw materials for companies who can buy with high prices so Vinamilk has to find good ways to keep long term relationship with them. It will help Vinamilk have raw materials stability. ? Distributors Distributors play an important for Vinamilk. They cannot sell products for customers effectively if they do not have good distributors. Although Vinamilk can build agency, it does not enough distribution channels. They need have many different distribution channels. By cooperate with distributors, they open distribution channels quickly. Products can come with customers with less time. Therefore, if distributors refuse to sell their products, it will be very dangerous for development of Vinamilk. ? Bankers All companies need capital to invest and open producing. When they need borrow money, bankers are usually the good choice because bankers always have a lot of money for them. However, if interest rate is too high, it will be really difficult for company. They cannot accept to borrow money with high interest rates if they do not they cannot sure that they earn enough profit to pay for bankers in short time. Therefore, they do not have enough braveness to invest so they can develop quickly. It is really have a big effect on future of company. ? Shareholders Shareholders always play a very important role in the company. There are two main kinds of shareholder; they are major stakeholders and minor stakeholders. For major stakeholders, they have a big effect on company; they can give important decisions for companies. All operation is managed by them. For minor shareholders, their effect on company is not big. Although they do not play an important role in important decisions of company, their opinions also influence on operations of companies. ? Customers Customers are the life and death of Vinamilk, Vinamilk cannot exist without them. Therefore, the main objects Vinamilk is making customers satisfied. By using Vinamilk’s products, customers will bring much benefit for Vinamilk. If their customers believe and continues to use their products for a long time, even customers also can advertise to customers ‘acquaintances about company’s products, it will help the company has more profit and it also will create a strong basic for development of Vinamilk in the future. However, if customers turn one back on Vinamilk’s products, Vinamilk can lose, even they can bankruptcy. ? Advertising Company Advertising Company is the connection between Vinamilk and new customers. They will help new customer know about the company. If the company is good, they can bring new customers to the company. External stakeholders are really important. They can effect on not only the company but also connected stakeholders. ? Government Government will create business environment for Vinamilk. All policies can be the advantages or disadvantages for company. If the government create good environment by good policies, company can develop quickly. Conversely, if the government makes difficult for the company, company cannot exist and develop easily. The company’s plans have to change following policies. ? Competitors Market is a battlefield so it is not easy for Vinamilk to exist and develop. They have many competitors. Especially, there are more dangerous competitors since Vietnam join WTO. Vinamilk has to competitive fiercely with their competitors if Vinamilk wants to develop. Vinamilk need find their competitor’s advantages and disadvantages and they need know their advantages and disadvantages. After that, they can improve their strengths and attack their competitor’s disadvantages. It helps Vinamilk have opportunities to win their competitors. The companies cannot exist and develop without community. They have live harmoniously with everybody. The companies must to have responsibility for communities; they have to make sure that they balance between their profit and community’s profit. Task 1b: Evaluate the extent to which selected organization achieves the objectives of three stakeholders Vinamilk cannot operate without their stakeholders. Stakeholders play an important role in company’s operation, they influence on all operations of company. Each stakeholder cannot cooperate with company without objects. Both of them want to get benefit from cooperating with the company so Vinamilk has to help customers achieve their objects if they want to continue and develop the relationship with their stakeholders. • Internal stakeholders: When the employees join Vinamilk, they hope much benefit from Vinamilk. Firstly, employees always get high salary and Vinamilk always believe that human is the most property value of company so they invest much for employees. Vinamilk never stop improving the employees’ lives. Vinamilk understands that when working at Vinamilk, employees will get a satisfactory salary according to their working capacity and competitive salary. Bonus stock Program is considered as the motivation for teams of devoted Vinamilk’s employees[4]. Secondly, employees want have good work environment. Vinamilk is always exerting them to create a professional, friendly, and open-hearted environment in order for individuals to show employees’ creativeness, promote their potentials to make differences. Thirdly, employees also want to have more opportunities to improve their skills and knowledge. It helps them to have more opportunities to get promoted in their job. Besides, Vinamilk understand that training and human resources development is the strategy of investment for our company’s success in the future so professional and skills training courses as well as practical training days are held frequently[5]. • Connected stakeholders: Vinamilk cooperates with many partners. They include many different components. They have much effect on Vinamilk. Everyone has objects so Vinamilk always try to make them satisfied. ? Suppliers: Suppliers are the important partner of Vinamilk. They want to get as much profit as possible by providing raw material for Vinamilk. They hope that their products will be bought with suitable price by Vinamilk. In addition, suppliers always want to have a long term relationship with Vinamilk. It helps them have regular orders. It is very important for future of suppliers. They want they influence the quality and price of products of Vinamilk. Good suppliers can help Vinamilks have the raw materials with high quality and they can produce good products with competitive prices. Therefore, building long-term ship is one of important goals of Vinamilk because of benefit of both of them. Vinamilk has many actions to express company’s objectives. For example: the amount of milk powder bought from the latter varies every year based on the best negotiated prices of each supplier. It makes sure that profit of suppliers is always guaranteed. When the world price of milk increases, they will adjust their price with their suppliers accordingly. By that way, Vinamilk creates many advantageous conditions to local suppliers to exist and develop in the future. It can bring profit to both parties. ? Distributors: Distributors also are important partners of Vinamilk. Their products cannot reach customers without distributors. Up to December 31 2007, they had sold their products through 201 distributors and over 141,000 outlets in 64 provinces in Vietnam[6]. All distributors want to be provided with good quality products from Vinamilk. It helps them increase sales turnover and they can increase reputation with customers because they always sell good quality products. Therefore, Vinamilk always try to provide high quality goods for distributors. Their experienced sales team of 1,787 salespeople nationwide has supported the distributors to attend to the outlets and customers better as well as advertising our products[7]. They also have highly qualified and experienced marketing and sales staff to analyze and identify the consumers’ trends and tastes so they can provide goods which are suitable with requirement’s customers. It helps them always provides good products which is suitable for customers’ requirement so distributors can be easy to sell product for customers. ? Shareholders: Shareholders are owners of Vinamilk, they own 49% charter capital of company[8]. The Shareholders Meeting has the highest jurisdiction of the Company, and all Shareholders with voting rights are allowed to participate[9]. They can vote and make important decisions at the meetings so they play an important role in Vinamilk Company. They always hope that their money will be invested efficiently. In other words, they want to have high dividend. Therefore, Vinamilk try to develop as much as possible. They build many plan and strategies which can help company develop quickly in the future. Both of things have one purpose; they want to increase their turnover. It can bring more profit not only to the company but also to the shareholders. ? Customers: Customers are the main object of Vinamilk and they always look for many things from Vinamilk. They want to buy many high quality products with low price and they also want to get good services from Vinamilk. Therefore, Vinamilk have had innovation in production to adapt those requirements of customers. They develop a comprehensive portfolio of dairy products[10]. They want to not only improve quality of products but also decrease price of products and customers can have opportunities to buy products with suitable price. They also develop new product lines to satisfy different consumer preferences[11]. It also helps them open product-line so customers have more choices. It is very important in nowadays when customers’ need has been changing. Vinamilk considers customers our focus and commit to meet all demands of customers. It helps them have motivation to make customers satisfy. • External stakeholders: Government affects all operations of companies. All operation have to operate within the environment which government creates because Government wants to make sure that they create a fair business environment for all companies and operation of company can bring much benefit for community. Firstly, Vinamilk have to observe the laws and regulations of government. Secondly, they want Vinamilk to contribute to Vietnam’s economy in many ways. Vinamilk pay tax in time. Vinamilk also is one of 100 companies pay more much tax in 2007 in Ho Chi Minh City[12]. Ho Chi Minh is the largest city in Vietnam so if Vinamilk pay much tax there, it also pays more in all Vietnam. Besides, the development of Vinamilk also can contribute to the development of food industry in Vietnam. It not only helps in improving the position of Vietnam food companies but also helps in improving the competition of economy in Vietnam. Finally, Government hopes that Vinamilk can create more job opportunities for citizen. Vinamilk has been carrying it out well. They develop quickly and they recruit employees. Besides, they also connect with more farmers. It helps farmers improve the living standard through breeding milking cows. Vinamilk cannot exist and develop without community. Communities hope that Vinamilk can create more jobs for citizen and Vinamilk has been carrying out well. They has been developing quickly, they need a lot of new employees so Vinamilk creates more job opportunities for them. Communities also hope Vinamilk contribute social activities. Vinamilk has created a scholarship fund for pupils[13]. Besides, Vinamilk also give a charity fun for poor children, orphaned with disabilities across the country. It helps them have more opportunities to rise in their life. Task 1c: Explain the responsibilities of the selected organization and strategies employed to meet objectives of stakeholders Vinamilk has many responsibilities and they have clear strategy to adapt their responsibilities and their objects. For social responsibilities, Vinamilk have responsibilities for many areas. ? Shareholders Vinamilk has the responsible for shareholders to increases profit for them as much as possible because they invest lot money in the company. Therefore, they want to get much profit from company. Accordingly, Vinamilk have proposed two main strategies to business more profitably. Developing a comprehensive portfolio of dairy products to target a broader consumer base and expand into higher margin value-added dairy products[14]. Besides, they also expense their market share in existing and new markets[15]. By that ways, they can earn more profit for shareholders. It is really a good strategy because it can open to business. Distributors For distributors, Vinamilk have to be responsible for them that Vinamilk have to provide their products stably with good quality. They develop raw material source to ensure a reliable and consistent frsesh milk supply base[16]. Besides, they develop new product lines to satisfy different consumer preferences[17]. It can help distributors can have many choices when they buy products of vinamilk. They can choose products which are suitable with their plans and their customers’ requirements. For management responsibilities, Vinamilk have responsibilities with employees and managers. ? Employees For employees, Vinamilk has to recruit new staffs carefully because it will have much effect on the company in the future. If they do not recruit carefully, new staff may not work effectively so they will have to sack new staff. It can create demoralizing incidents in company. Besides, Vinamilk should care about redundancies. It is not fair for employee if company try to recruit employees as much as possible when they need a lot contracts. After that, when they do not have enough contracts, they sack employees. Vinamilk has to recruit employees with suitable numbers and they have to make sure that they can work for a long time. Vinamilk also have to concentrate on retirement scheme. It is very important for employees if company want to keep working for company for a long time. They cannot feel secure if they are not sure of what they can enjoy when they cannot work. To do tasks, they try to develop the quality of products and to invent new products to adapt different requirements of customers. By that ways, Vinamilk can increase the profit. If they can earn more profits, they can have money to improve retirement system for employees. Besides, by developing a comprehensive portfolio of dairy products, they can open production. At that time, they can create more job opportunities for employees. Moreover, Vinamilk can avoid redundancies. ? Customers For customers, Vinamilk’s responsibilities are providing products and services which customers expect and they have to be honest and fair dealing with customers so one of Vinamilk’s strategies is developing new product lines to satisfy different consumer preferences. It helps customers have more choices. It is really important if Vinamilk want to keep more customers for a long time. Moreover, they can have loyal customers. They have a lot profit from strategies. Besides, by developing of raw material sources, they can ensure a reliable and consistent fresh milk supply base. It is the promise of Vinamilk that they always provide products with the best quality. Task 2a: Explain how economic systems attempt to allocate and make effective use of resources available within the country Vinamilk is founded in 1976. Vinamilk was managed by the Ministry of Food Industry from 1978 to 1991. In 1976-1986 periods, Vietnam economy was the command economy. Goods were allocated by coupon system; goods were not bought on free market. Therefore, the kind of system what was applied in ompany was the command economy system, the kinds of milk products which would be produced were decided by Ministries. Basing on the policies which were made decision by Vietnam parliament, Ministry would identify what need for life of citizen so they would decided. After that, they would give the quantity and quality of products for Vinamilk. Vinamilk only could produce products which would provide for citizen in Vietnam. In other words, both of products were produced because of benefit of society. May be, they could have enough ability to produce products for export. It would be useful for development of Vinamilk. However, they could have power to do it. From 2003 until now, Vinamlik has been privatized. Part of Vinamilk’s fortune has been sold to outside so Vinamilk has transformed to mix economy system. However, Government still has owned over 50% fortune of Vinamilk so they also have kept right control in company[18]. However, share holders also have played an important role in Vinamilk because they also have owned a part of fortune of Vinamilk. The kind of products has been decided by not only ministry but also by shareholders. Shareholders want to get profit so they require Vinamilk has to business efficiently. Therefore, Vinamilk have produced products to meet the requirement of market to collect profit. Vinamilk should find ways to reduce the cost of products but their products have to make sure that it brings much benefit for community. Therefore, they can get maximum profit, their profit is limited. Besides, in the past, they only could concentrate on the inland customers but they can open market to foreign market. For example: they can produce products to sell for customers in Cambodia. However, they still must concentrate on inland market than foreign market. In the future, Vinamilk will be privatized completely. Ministry only will keep a part of share in company so they do not affect much on company. Company can be independent in operation. They can decide what will produce. They will base on much the requirement of market and they will produce products to meet their requirement. Besides, they also depend on the suppliers, they helps Vinamilk identify the quality and quantity of products. At that time, they cannot control by ministry so they can concentrate on seeking the maximum benefit. They can find the good ways to reduce the cost of products as much as possible without caring about benefit of society much. Besides, they do need pay attention to the interest of customers who do not have more opportunities use their products. They only concentrate on the customers who can bring much profit for company and they will divide customers into many level. They will milk products which are suitable with every kind of customers Task 2b: Discuss the impact of social welfare and industrial policy initiatives on selected organizations and the wider community Social welfare policies affected much on operation of Vinamilk. It includes many policies. However, I want to mention pension plan and gender equality at work. In my opinion, two policies play an important role for operation of company. ? Pension policy : Pension policy mentions retirement plans. When everybody decides to work for other company, they care about the pension of company. Pension plays an important role for them when they do not have work force. Although their children have responsibilities to serve them when they are old, they still want to have pension. They want to reduce their children’s burden. Vinamilk understands the requirement of candidates so they also care about their pension plans. It helps employee feel secure about their future. It also brings many benefits for not only employees but also company. It helps company attract more good employees for company so they can build good staffs for company. It is really important for development of the company in the future. Besides, company can keep good employees work for them for a long time. Employees can not feel secure to work for a company until they are old if they do not make sure that they will still have a good life after they do not have work force. However, beside advantages, it also has two disadvantages. Firstly, company will have to spend a lot of money for this plan. They have to maintain a fund which is used to pay for retired employees every month. Furthermore, retired money also likes salary, it needs to rise continuously. They cannot maintain a permanent number of retired money when living costs has been raised continuously. Secondly, if the company does not open to business and the number of retired employees is higher than the employees is working for company. It is really a big problem for company. Pension plan also affect much on community. The percent of old people in modern life has risen so the government has to create more policies to support their life. If the old people have suitable pension to have good life so the government does not need pay money for them. They can invest it to other areas such as building public building. So it brings much benefit for community. ? Gender equity : Gender equity is the important problem in modern life. All companies are encouraged to create more work opportunities for women. It helps women improve their position in society. Vinamilk also need to do it so it affects much in many activities of company. Firstly, it affects on recruitment policy. They have to correct their recruitment policy; they need recruit more woman employees. Besides, company needs to review all work in company. After that, they indentify what work is suitable with women and they can raise the number of woman employees at that work. For example, in milk factory, women can work soft task as sticking the labels on milk bottles. However, if the company has too many woman employees, a problem can happen. That is labor turnover. Most of Vietnamese woman employees usually get married. After that, they can be pregnant so they have to be absent in period time. Companies have to ensure woman employees ‘interest so they usually pay salary for them during their blackout time. Besides, to make sure that the speed of common works happen normally. May be, the company has to find other people who will replays their employees in their employees’ blackout time; it makes company cost much money. Furthermore, they have to take time to train new people and new people cannot work well as employees. For community, by increasing the woman employees in work, it can help increase the role of women in society. It is really good for women but it is ot easy for women recognize their time. For men, they do not do house work, they can only use time at home to relax but women have to do housework at home. They do not have time to relax . However, an opposite problem can happen. The role of women has risen continuously, they have more opportunities to get promote in their work so they can catch many important positions in companies, they live a life like men, they only concentrate on working. They do not use much time for family. Many women do not use much time to educate their children so it can bring some bad effects for growth of children. Besides social welfare policy, industrial policy also affect on the operation of Vinamilk. It comprises many problems. However, I want to mention improvement in infrastructure. Vietnam government has been investing a lot of money to build new road network and road system in recent years. Besides, they also have been spent lots of money to improve and open old road system. Especially, the Government has decided to mobilize VND36 trillion (US$2. 1 billion) through the issuance of Government bonds for the transport sector[19]. It brings many benefits for Vinamilk. First of all, their production can conduct quickly. Factories can get raw materials from farms in the countryside easily. Besides, Vinamilk can build distribution system better because the transport can be conduct easier with good road system, even they can open sell areas to countryside. It also reduces stress for commuting employees. When a problem happens, they can gather employees quickly. However, they need pay tax completely, it will help government has budget to invest building road. Besides, they also can cooperate with government to build new road with many different form. For example: they can build new roads and the government can allow them to collect fee. Community also collect many benefit from this policy. It can reduce the number of traffic jams so it can bring much more benefits for community. For example: if one person has to lose two hours every day because of traffic jam, they have to go to work 10 hours. However, if he does not meet traffic jam so he can go home earlier and he can have more time with his family. He also has more time to teach his children so it is really good for society. They can reduce the number of accidents which originate from bad roads. Especially, in bad weather, bad roads can cause the accidents. Task 2c: Evaluate the impact of macro-economic policy (fiscal and monetary policy) measures and influence of the global economy on selected organization and stakeholders in your country. Vietnam has joined WTO in November 7th, 2007. From that time, the economy of Vietnam has step to a new page. Fiscal policy and monetary policy has changed to suitable with the new condition so it affects on operation of the Vinamilk Company. For fiscal policy, it includes: • Taxation and other sources of income. • Government spending • Borrowing whenever spending exceeds income • Repaying debt when income exceed expenditure In the past, local companies were protected by tax policy of government; they did not pay much tax like foreign companies so they did not compete with foreign companies. However, everything has been changing now. Foreign companies will be treated equally like inland companies. They will not pay much tax as in the past and foreign companies with strong finance, many experiences about competition. It will create heavy pressure on local company like Vinamilk. It will put local companies like Vinamilk in front of a new difficult challenge so Vinamilk has to do many tasks if they do not want to be defeated on the Vietnam market. Besides, an increase or decrease of tax will also have an influence on Vinamilk. If government increases the tax, Vinamilk will meet many difficulties. They will not earn much profit, but they cannot increase the price of products to earn much profit because there are lots of milk companies in Vietnam market and a few of it are famous companies in area or over the world so they are dangerous competitors of Vinamilk. Vinamilk has to find how to decrease the price of the products and increase the quality of their products to competitive with them but they still can earn profit for stakeholders. The task is not easy. If government decreases the tax, it will create many opportunities for company to develop. They can have much money to continue investing; they can open producing and research new products. They can spend a lot of money for marketing activities…Company can earn much profit so their stakeholders also earn much profit. Besides, Vietnam government also spends a lot of money to invest in many areas which have good influences on operation of Vinamilk. Spending on transport is one of it. Government spends much money to build new road systems; open and upgrade old road systems; so transport of company conducts easily and quickly. The distance between raw material areas, factories, and distributors can be shorter. It helps company save a lot time so it will help company can earn much profit. The Vietnam government spends a lot of money for education; it occupies 5. 6 % of GDP[20] . For example: they spend much money to build and upgrade the educational infrastructure for schools, junior college, and universities. During the period 2001 - 2005 the Government annually allocated a certain sum and mobilized other resources in order to send 400 - 500 learners to study in foreign countries with advanced science and technology[21] etc. Government hopes that they can educate good quality human resources for the country by improving the quality of education. Therefore, it will help company have many opportunities to build a good workforce from local human resources. They can attack the world market by local human resources. Both of policies are typical policies which express the good influences from fiscal policies on Vinamilk and Vinamilk need to take full advantage of those policies. For monetary policy, it includes: • Interest rates • Exchange rates • Control of money supply • Controls over bank lending and credit Vietnam government tries to control monetary policy of Vietnam. The depreciation of the dong with respect to the US dollar would stay at low level so it is the advantage for Vinamilk. When they sign contracts to buy raw materials or machines with foreign partners, they do not worry that the value of contracts will increase immediately. Besides controlling exchange rates, government also try to control interest rate of bank. It affects much on opening business of Vinamilk. If the government asks banks raise the percent of interest rates, it is not good for opening plans of Vinamilk. They cannot borrow money to buy more machines and build more factories if they want the output of company to rise quickly. It will affect the development of Vinamilk. For WTO, when Vietnam joined it so Vietnam has to follow the rules of WTO. They have to open the economy. It will create more opportunities for foreign company to join Vietnam market easily. They are treated like local companies so it will create a pressure for Vinamilk. The local companies were protected by tax policies for a long time; it reduced local companies’ competitive ability because they did not need to be competitive with other companies. Foreign companies are usually multinational company and they have much experience in competition in many different countries so they have more advantages in competing with local companies. Besides, most of local companies are medium companies or small companies. Therefore, foreign companies can easy defeat the local companies. They are usually big companies with strong finance, good management system. However, it also creates more opportunities for Vinamilk. They have more opportunities to join international economy. They can join foreign markets easier than in the past. Vinamilk will be treated as local companies in those countries. Government of countries cannot create barriers to block Vinamilk. Besides, Vietnam government has to reduce import tax. It brings much benefit for Vinamilk. They can have good condition to import machines and raw materials with good quality and suitable price. Therefore, they can produce products with suitable price and good quality. Conclusion There are a close connection between Vinamils and their stakeholders, they influence mutually about many sides. Both of them want to get benefit so they need helps mutually if they want to achieve their own objects. Besides, all operation of Vinamilk is influenced by policies of Vietnam government. It can advantages or disadvantages so Vinmilk need reduce disadvantages and take full advantages of those policies. If they can do it, they can develop in the future. References 1. https://www. vinamilk. com. vn. 2. https://www. saharavn. com. 3. https://vietnamnews. vnagency. com. vn. 4. https://www. ap-foodtechnology. com. 5. https://www. thanhniennews. com. 6. https://en. moet. gov. vn. ---------------------- [1] https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=about&id=2. Last accessed 10-11-2008 [2] https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=about&id=2. Last accessed 25-11-2008 [3] https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=about&id=6. Last accessed 10-11-2008 [4] Available: https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=news_career&m=9. Last accessed 15-11-2008. 5 Available: https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=news_career&m=9. Last accessed 15-11-2008. [5] Available: https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=market&id=14. Last accessed 16-12-2008. [6] Available: https://www. inamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=market&id=14. Last accessed 16-12-2008. [7] Available: https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=Share_detail&id=39. Last accessed 16-12-2008 [8] Available: https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=DownloadFile&m=11. Last accessed 16-12-2008. [9] Available: https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=about&id=7. Last accessed 19-12-2008. [10] Available: https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=about&id=7. Last accessed 19-12-2008. [11]Avaww. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=about&id=7. Last accessed 19-12-2008. [12]Available:https://www. saharavn. com/index. php? page=5? 101&script=tintuc&view=5780&type=news. Last accessed 16-12-2008. [13] Available: https://vietnamnews. vnagency. com. vn/showarticle. php? num=01SOC091206. Last accessed 16-12-2008. [14] Available: https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=about&id=7. Last accessed 19-12-2008. [15] Available: https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=about&id=7. Last accessed 19-12-2008. [16] Available: https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=about&id=7. Last accessed 19-12-2008. [17] Available: https://www. vinamilk. com. vn/ENG/? vnm=about&id=7. Last accessed 19-12-2008. [18] Available: https://www. p-foodtechnology. com/Industry-drivers/Vinamilk-set-to-seek-new-investors. Last accessed 16-12-2008. [19] Available: https://vietnamnews. vnagency. com. vn/showarticle. php? num=02COM291108. Last accessed 18-12-2008. [20] Available: https://www. thanhniennews. com/education/? catid=4&newsid=33635. Last accessed 16-12-2008. [21] Available: https://en. moet. gov. vn/? page=6. 4&view=3461. Last accessed 16-12-2008. ----------------------- VINAMILK Customers Managers Advertisement Companies Bankers Shareholders Competitors Community Local authorities Suppliers Employees
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Subject Of Sunderland. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Managerial Economics

MBA 640 (Summer IS 2010) MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS EXAM #1 STUDENT NAME: Exam is open book and open material. 1. Explain the interaction of Managerial Economics with other business disciplines, giving specific examples. Managerial economics has been defined by conventional theorists as a science that "is all about how people make choices" After you’ve defined managerial economics and it’s relationship to its economic theory. Managerial economics will interact with each of these business’s disciplines at some point or another; demand, marketing, finance, accounting, management science and strategy. An example of one of the disciplines (demand or price elasticity): Ford and Honda cater to the subcompact segment (marketing segmentation) of the automobile market with their Focus and Civic models, respectively. Are Ford Focus buyers more or less price sensitive than buyers of Honda Civics? One way to answer this question is to estimate the change in quantity demanded with a $100 increase in the price of each make. But this does not compare like with like. A more consistent way of comparing the price sensitivity of Focus and Civic buyers is to use the own-price elasticity’s of the demands. The own-price elasticity’s of the demands for Focus and Civics have been estimated to be both 3. 4. This indicates that Focus and Civic buyers are equally sensitive to price. For a 1% increase in price, both groups would reduce sales purchases by 3. 4%. 2. Briefly describe the how the forces of supply and demand impact the allocation of resources in organizations. Once the supply and demand has been experienced, a resource allocation strategy should be developed to which a manager can choose (capacity or demand based model) and where to expend these resources. Regardless of the specific strategy, the allocation of resources to meet specific demands results in fewer resources available to meet others supply and demands. Choose cautiously…. 3. Compare and contrast Business Risk and Financial Risk, using specific examples. Business risk refers to the stability of a company's assets if it uses no debt or preferred stock financing. Business risk stems from the unpredictable nature of doing business, i. e. , the unpredictability of consumer demand for products and services produced (classic case the Ford Edsiel). When a company uses debt or preferred stock financing, additional risk—financial risk—is placed on the company's common shareholders. Thus creates a financial risk. They the (shareholders) demand a higher expected return for assuming this additional risk, which in turn, raises a company's costs. 4. Compare and contrast the stockholder wealth measurement methods of Market Value Added and Economic Value Added. For many years, managers and shareholders have believed that growth in annual earnings per share and increases in return on equity were the best measures for maximizing shareholders wealth. However, in more recent years there has been a growing awareness that these conventional accounting measures are not reliably linked to increasing the value of the company’s shares. This occurs because earnings do not reflect changes in risk and inflation, nor do they take account of the cost of additional capital invested to finance growth. One way of viewing the "shareholder value" approach is to value the business using Economic Value Added as a valuation methodology. This can be achieved by taking the number of shares and multiplying by the share price and adding the book value of long and short-term loans net of any cash deposits. The market value at this point in time is equal to its total capital employed plus or minus the net present value of all future Economic Value Added. This present value of all future Economic Value Added is theoretically equal to Market value added. We are now able to validate economic profitability and use it as a performance measurement, which directly links strategy to value and is therefore the key to wealth creation. . Discuss the non-price determinates of supply and demand. Non-price determinants (sometimes called demand shifters) result in a change in demand. A change in demand means that the amount consumers are willing and able to buy changes at each and every price. This affects your supply demands. When demand is high the price becomes low and vice/versa. 6. Define market equilibrium and briefly explain how knowledge of this factor can facilitate the organizational decision making process. Market equilibrium occurs where quantity supplied equals quantity demanded. An increase of supply or overproduction will facilitate a price decrease and the number of quantity produced to rise. A decrease of supply affects the equilibrium price to rise and the quantity to fall. When supply increases and demand remains constant, price falls and quantity sold rises. A decrease in supply and the demand remains constant, causes price to rise and quantity sold to fall. This knowledge of equilibrium/disequilibrium can help an organization determine marketing decisions. Continue production, price change, or get rid of this market. . How does the impact of supply and demand influence the Pricing of goods and services? Because supply and demand plays a critical role in today’s economy, it's important to understand how they both operate - and how you can use them to analyze decisions about the pricing of goods and services provided. My Father once told me a story and said;” I lost $40,000 dollars today”! I said,” You did? How”? He replied, “Someone wanted to buy 4,000 sheep for $10 dollars a piece and I didn’t have a single one” Funny I thought. Look at it this way suppose he had the sheep and the going price was $20 dollars apiece? He had the opportunity to sell at $10 or use some posture and demand to sell at the $20 dollar price. But the moral of my Father story was if a customer has a demand but you can’t supply your losing money. 8. Define Price Elasticity of Demand, and give an example of its application as it relates to Revenue. Definition of Price Elasticity is the extent to which demand changes with price are known as "price elasticity of demand. An example would be in 1991 Apple Computer Inc. drop prices of some of its Macintosh computers models by as much as 50% hoping to stimulate its demand quantity. The end results were phenomenal. Sales had increased as much as 85%. Cutting the price clearly benefited Apple Computer Inc revenue. 9. Explain how businesses can use Demand Estimation in Forecasting. Typically, companies use forecasting techniques based on statistical models to predict demand and use the resulting forecast to produce or order the amount they anticipate their customers will demand. But even with the most sophisticated forecasting models, forecasts are inaccurate. On the contrary companies can minimize forecast errors by creating a more responsive supply chain so that they can react to demand fluctuations even when they are not anticipated. 10. How is Estimation of Production used in the operational planning of an organization? It is used by organization’s operational plan to determining a firm’s level of output (i. e. , the production function) either short or long run function ability. Because this can fluctuate with various attributes it is usually hard to perform controlled laboratory experiments with respect to production. Instead, actual operating data is used with statistical procedures to derive these estimates. 11. How is Estimation of Cost used in the operational planning of an organization? Decision-making is imperative for operational planning. You must obtain at a minimum production and costs functions (accounting data). But this data creates problems because economic and accounting definitions of costs are different. By using Estimation of Cost will help or condition the manager to properly strategize and forecast sound operational goals via planning mode (before production starts). Productions goals based on time series analysis for short-run costs, cross-sectional regression technique has a better advantage with long-run cost estimations. 12. How would an organization use the theories of managerial economics to guide market research conducted with consumers? The term market research encompasses a number of activities that are designed to connect marketers to consumers through information gathering and evaluation. Market research provides businesses with information about their customers, their competitors, and their overall industry. Managerial Economics is a science dealing with effective use of scarce resources (market research). It guides managers in taking decisions relating to the firm’s customers, competitors, and suppliers as well as relating to the internal functioning of a firm. It also makes use of statistical and analytical tools (market research) to assess economic theories in solving practical business solutions.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Managerial Economics. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Ghana’s Independence

Abstract This paper looks at the recent history of Ghana and explains the series of events that led up to Ghana's independence in 1957. The paper specifically discusses the effects of colonization in terms of economic and social development and the cultural tensions and tribal divisions in the newly independent Ghana. The paper then looks at the current population and government and concludes that while Ghana is still very much a developing country, Ghana is significantly better off than its West African peers. From the Paper "The country of Ghana was the first dependent African country to achieve independence.

Various factors contributed to the effective push for independence. These factors included constitutional reform as a means by which to slowly erode British influence, the stirring of the masses by African political elites, and the general post-WWII concern over colonization and its destructive forces. Growing nationalist sentiment unleashed itself in the riots of 1948, though the consequences of such violence sent a message to the British and promoted a more controlled and systematic push towards independence. Under the leadership of Mr.

Kwame Nkrumah, a bright and devoted politician, Ghana found its way towards independence through relatively bloodless means. " Sub-Saharan Africa began its journey of decolonization in 1956 when the Sudan won independence after the Egyptian revolution in 1952 (Findley/Rothney 387). One of the first African countries to gain independence was Ghana, in 1957. Ghana is located in West Africa near the equator and on the Greenwich meridian. The colonial power that ruled Ghana until their day of independence was Britain. The Portuguese were the first to arrive and they named the place where they settled the Gold Coast.

This became the name of the country till independence when it was changed to Ghana. The British were not the first Europeans to arrive in Ghana but they were the last to leave. The capital of Ghana was moved from Cape Coast to Accra by the British in 1876. The beginning struggle for independence began in the mid 40s when a British Civil Service and Legislative Council was established. This group called many of the Ghana people to fight Britain's wars in Europe and North Africa. This they did with valor and great courage, only to be denied compensation and benefits upon their return to the Gold Coast.

This single act began the beginning of the end for the British in Ghana (Brody Since the 1950s and 1960s, especially after independence, Ghana has joined numerous world-wide and regional organizations, e. g. the United Nations Organizations (UNO), International Labour Organization (ILO), World Health Organization (WHO), Organization of African Unity (OAU) (now transformed into African Union – AU), the Economic Commission of West African States (ECOWAS) and the New Partnership for Africa’s Development (NEPAD) respectively.

This has been done in a bid to demonstrate her interest in being integrated into the world or African communities and to allow for integration into Ghana of foreign nationals. Before Ghana attained her independence the peoples who now form Ghana were used to the running of states, empires and kingdoms. These peoples co-existed and were bonded by kinship and principles. The arbitrary borders drawn by colonialists only succeeded in forming artificial a multiethnic nation Ghana. Ghana lacks the internal political cohesion that is absolutely necessary for her survival as a nation.

It lacks the moral core that would otherwise be provided by ethnicity, thus the ingredient required for constructing one nation with local roots. There are competing ethnic nationalisms that are hardly prepared to relinquish their hold onto their freedoms and self-determination. Apart from this reluctance to let go their grip on their valued raison d’etre as independent peoples, certain ethnic groups believe that they are superior to others, thus making consensus-building even more difficult.

Ethnic loyalty also makes it difficult to build “strong and viable resources of political association and mass-based political parties, [since selfish politicians can easily manipulate] ethnic loyalty as the cheapest and most reliable strategy to acquire and consolidate power” (Yoh, 2004: 2). As already demonstrated above, violent conflicts have erupted and will continue to erupt in areas where traditional states, traditional land tenure, chieftaincies are collapsing or there is a fragmentation of communities.

Examples of such situations are shown by many young nation-states, e. g. Nigeria, Ethiopia, Pakistan and Rwanda, which have been shaken and partly divided or destroyed by power struggles caused by ethnic and religious conflicts. Education and Development in Nation-Building Lack of education is one of the most serious factors hindering development in nation-building. This fact was realized in the early days of nation-building in Germany. Also, when Ghana became independent in 1957, the first President realized the need for the promotion of education in Ghana.

In the case of Germany, for instance, it can be said that: “From 1763, against resistance from the nobility and citizenry, an ‘enlightened absolutism’ was established in Prussia and Austria, according to which the ruler was to be ‘the first servant of state’. The economy developed and legal reforms were undertaken, including the abolition of torture and the improvement in the status Jews; the emancipation of peasants began. Education was promoted” (Wikipedia, History of Germany, 2008: 12). In Ghana education has been considered very essential for nation-building.

Even during the colonial administration educational policies, were formulated, e. g. through Advisory Committees on Education, to accelerate the development of the indigenous people. During the first government Nkrumah and the CPP embarked vigorously upon the promotion of education. For example: “For the first time in the history of the country, the Central Government was to assume full responsibility for educational policy and practice. Educational development itself had passed the where it was a political project of the greatest magnitude.

It had been both fundamental and crucial to the political economy, and was to find full expression in the Seven-Year Development Plan of 1964, the CPP’s programme for ‘work and happiness’” (Haizel, In: Arhin, 1991: 60-61). Since the CPP regime a couple of educational reforms have taken place, notably the 1987 Education Reform by the PNDC Government and the 2007/2008 Education Reform by the NPP Government. However, in many cases governments have paid lip-service to education, initiated inappropriate reforms and made arbitrary changes not backed by sound reflection and preparation.

Thus, education is still developing effectively to boost nation-building. Education Education, together with language, forms the all-important keys to participation in society. Education is relevant to work/employment, rural development, modernization, national identity, cultural identity, ethnic identity, national identity, citizenship, exercise of civic rights and responsibilities, and political awareness which all lead to effective nation-building. Gender issues Gender issues are essential in nation-building and ought to be tackled vigorously.

In both Germany and Ghana women are ceasing to mere play the second fiddle in society and are assuming highly responsible positions. For example, for years now, Dr. Angela Merkel has been the German Chancellor, the first female Chancellor indeed. Also, another prominent German female political figure worth mentioning is Prof. Dr. Maria Bohmer, Federal Government Commissioner for Migration, Refugees and Integration and Minister of State in the Federal Chancellery to boot. In Ghana we now have the first woman Chief Justice, Mrs. Georgina Wood, the first woman Speaker of Parliament, Mrs.

Justice Joyce Adeline Bamford-Addo and the first woman Acting Inspector-General of Police, Mrs. Elizabeth Mills-Robertson (since the establishment of the Ghana Police Service in 1874 by the British Colonial Administration). These new developments with regard to gender issues go a long way to enhance the image not only of women but also of their own society and nation. References Andah, B. W. and Anquandah, J. (1988): The Guinea belt: the peoples between Mount Cameroon and the Ivory Coast, In: Elfasi, M. , Hrbek, I. (eds. ) General History of Africa III: 488-529. California: UNESCO, Heineman Anderson, Benedict (2005): Die Erfindung der Nation.

Campus Verlag, Frankfurt am Main/New York, ISBN 3-593-37729-2 Arhin, Kwame ed. (1991): The Life and Work of Kwame Nkrumah. Papers of Symposium organized by the Institute of African Studies, University of Ghana, Legon Accra: Sedco Pubishing Ltd. Bade, Klaus J. (2008): Immigration and Integration in Germany. The Three Main Waves of Migration and their Effects, In: Deutschland, E6 No. 5/2008 October/November: 50-52. Frankfurt/Main: Societats-Verlag and Federal Foreign Office, Berlin Deutschland, E6 No. 5/2008 October/November (2008): Integration and Diversity. Living Together. Frankfurt/Main: Societats-Verlag and Federal Foreign Office, Berlin

Elfasi, M. , Hrbek, I. (eds. ) (1988): General History of Africa III: Africa from the Seventh to the Eleventh Century. California: UNESCO, Heineman Ghana “https://en. wikipedia. org/wiki/Ghana“ Hagan, George P. (1991): Nkrumah’s Cultural Policy. In: Arhin, 1991: 1-25, Papers of Symposium organized by the Institute of African Studies, University of Ghana, Legon Accra: Sedco Pubishing Ltd. Haizel, E. A. (1991): Education in Ghana, 1951-1966. In: Arhin, 1991: 55-87, Papers of Symposium organized by the Institute of African Studies, University of Ghana, Legon Accra: Sedco Pubishing Ltd. Hippler, Jochen Hrsg. (2003):

Nation-Building – ein sinnvolles Instrument der Konfliktbearbeitung? Dietz Verlag, Bonn Schayan, Janet (2008): Living Together in Germany. Opportunities for Immigrants. In: Deutschland, E6 No. 5/2008 October/November: 50-52. Frankfurt/Main: Societats-Verlag and Federal Foreign Office, Berlin Yoh, John G. Nyuot (2004): Notes on Ethnicity, Democratization and Nation building: Experience in Africa and relevance to West Asia: The Case of Cameroon and Ghana. Pretoria: Department of Political Sciences, University of South Africa. Amman, Jordan Presidential Diary (2007): History of Ghana. Golden Jubilee Edition: 35-41

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Ghana's Independence. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Recent Global Economic Recession

Foreign Investment during the recent global economic recession ABSTRACT:- The year 2008 marked the end of a growth cycle in international investment that started in 2004 and saw world foreign direct investment (FDI) inflows reach a historic record of $1. 9 trillion in 2007. Since then FDIs have been decreasing. The fall in global FDI in 2008–2009 is the result of two major factors affecting domestic as well as international investment. First, the capability of firms to invest has been reduced by a fall in access to financial resources, both internally – due to a decline in corporate profits – and externally – due to the lower availability and higher cost of finance. Second, the propensity to invest has been affected negatively by economic prospects, especially in developed countries that are hit by the most.

The setback in FDI has particularly affected cross-border mergers and acquisitions (M&As), the value of which was in sharp decline in 2008 and early 2009 as compared to the previous year’s historic high. It has also taken the form of a rising wave of divestments and restructurings. Nevertheless, some favorable factors for FDI growth are still at work, some of which are even a consequence of the crisis itself. Public policies will obviously play a major role in the restoration of favourable conditions for a quick recovery in FDI flows. Structural reforms aimed at ensuring more stability in the global financial system, renewed commitment to an open environment for inward and outward FDI and the implementation of policies aimed at promoting investment and innovation are key issues in this respect. INTRODUCTION:- The current global financial crisis has its roots in the US, Europe and other advanced countries. Its proximate causes include sub-prime lending, faulty distribution models, unsustainable financial engineering and derivatives usage, and faulty credit rating by agencies, a lax regulation and large global imbalances in those countries.

But the fundamental cause of the crisis was the loose and excessively accommodative monetary policy followed by the US and other advanced economies from 2002-04. The global economic crisis has triggered a slowdown in global economic growth that is manifesting itself in a demand-driven fall in international trade exacerbated by the deficit of credit and trade finance; falling commodity prices; declining remittances; contracting foreign direct investment (FDI); and the potential of declining official development assistance (ODA). With a globalized system, a credit crunch can ripple through the entire (real) economy very quickly turning a global financial crisis into a global economic crisis. EFFECT ON FOREIGN INVESTMENT:- The financial instability triggered by the United States subprime crisis which began in summer 2007 has led to a progressive deterioration of the investment situation. Foreign direct investment (FDI) flows declined by more than 20% in 2008 . In 2007, the capital outflows from US to emerging market economies spurted to around $600 billion per annum, only to crash soon . The effect of the sudden reverse flow of capital (particularly of portfolio investments) was a particularly traumatic experience for the EMEs. It had severe implications for their monetary management and financial stability. The global crisis has a direct bearing on capital inflows into India.

The rate of FDI inflow recorded an increase in 2008-09 compared to the previous year, the FIIs (net) recorded heavy stream of outflows from India in 2008-09 contrary to a healthy rate of inflow in the previous year . A major challenge for developing countries is to continue to attract foreign investment during the crisis to stimulate economic activity, especially for investments that serve long-term development goals and enhance competitiveness (e. g. investments in infrastructure, agriculture, sustainable energy, material/resource/energy efficiency and technology). While 2007 was a record year for FDI to developing countries , equity finance is under pressure and corporate and project finance is already weakening . The proposed Xstrata takeover of a South African mining conglomerate was put on hold as the financing was harder due to the credit crunch . There are several other examples e. g. in India . In the face of the global economic slowdown (and recession in a number of major economies), tighter credit conditions and falling corporate profits, many companies have announced plans to curtail production, lay off workers and cut capital expenditure, all of which has implications for FDI . However, the impact of the crisis varies widely, depending on region and country, with consequences for the geographic pattern of FDI flows . The current crisis began in the developed world, though it is rapidly spreading to developing and transition economies. Developed countries have thus been directly hit by the financial crisis, while its effects on developing economies have so far been indirect in most cases, with varying degrees of severity among regions and countries. This has direct consequences on the geographical patterns of FDI inflows. There is ample evidence that the global crisis is having a negative impact on international investment. Tighter credit conditions and lower corporate profits have weakened companies’ capability to finance their overseas projects; while the global economic recession and a heightened appreciation of risks have eroded business confidence.

Many large TNCs have revised their global expansion plans downward, and divestments have taken place . The trend is widespread, hitting all sectors and all three major types of foreign investment (i. e. market-, efficiency- and resource-seeking foreign investment) . FDI flows to financial services, automotive industries, building materials, intermediate goods, and some consumption goods have been the most significantly affected, but the consequences of the crisis have been quickly expanding to FDI in other activities, ranging from the primary sector to non-financial services. Concrete examples of decreases in FDI •Financial services are experiencing a wave of restructuring in most affected countries. AIG of the United States, for example, is selling off its Japanese and Philippines insurance affiliates . In the mining industry, Rio Tinto (United Kingdom and Australia) and Anglo American (United Kingdom) have indicated that they will reconsider their global expansion plans in the light of waning business confidence and the worsening economic outlook . British Petroleum announced in October 2008 that it will cut 5,000 jobs worldwide in 2009, mainly in developed markets . •In the Democratic Republic of the Congo, for example, there has been a spate of mine closures forced by the global economic downturn, and fly-by-night investors have undermined the mining industry’s sustainability and the welfare of its workers. In the automotive industry, leading United States automobile maker General Motors announced in November 2008 – even before the bailout granted by the United States Federal Government – plans to cut costs and capital spending while raising funds through the sale of assets . Daewoo, a subsidiary of General Motors, announced that it would temporarily close Republic of Korea factories in the same month . Opel, a subsidiary of General Motors, has asked for more public support from the German Government . Ford shut down its operations in Berdaux, France, due to poor sales, from October 2008 to January 2009 . French automaker PSA halted its car production in China, and it intends to temporarily close factories in Spain and France. Another French automaker, Renault, also plans to reduce jobs significantly in Europe. Nissan also eliminated 20,000 jobs . •Lafarge the world’s largest cement producer also sold its cement and aggregates units in Italy to local group Sacci . •GlaxoSmithKline (United Kingdom), the world’s second largest drug maker by revenue, is cutting its operations in the United States . French cosmetics group L’Oreal, faced with a sales slump, announced in November that it would close two factories in Europe, one in Monaco and one in Wales (United Kingdom) . •ArcelorMittal (Luxembourg) and POSCO (Republic of Korea) have started to revise their growth plans . The setback in FDI has particularly affected cross-border mergers and acquisitions (M&As). It has also taken the form of a rising wave of divestments and restructurings. International Greenfield investments have been less impacted to this point, but could be increasingly affected in 2009 as a large number of projects are presently being cancelled or postponed. In developing and transition economies, FDI inflows have so far remained more resilient.

The growth rate of FDI inflows to developing countries, while lower than in 2007 (when it exceeded 20 per cent) should still reached 4 per cent. The situation is rapidly deteriorating. UNCTAD estimates that global FDI inflows declined by 15 per cent in 2008, to about $1. 6 trillion This sharp decrease marks the end of a growth cycle which lasted four years. Further decline is anticipated for 2009, especially as regards flows into developing countries. While the decrease in FDI inflows has hit developed countries the hardest, some developing economies with open but weak financial systems are also very vulnerable to external shocks . They face unprecedented challenges from the possible drying up of financial flows from both official and private sources. For example, FDI inflows are expected to have declined sharply in such countries as Indonesia, the Republic of Korea, Pakistan, Singapore and Turkey, due to fallout from the financial crisis. A major exception is the United States, where FDI flows may have risen by 38 per cent in 2008 to $321 billion (annex table). This can be explained by two major factors: foreign parent companies may have transferred capital to their United States affiliates in financial distress, in the form of equity or intra-company loans, and/or the crisis in the United States economy has triggered new opportunities for the acquisition of local firms by foreign interests . Reduced access to finance. Financial factors have negatively affected TNCs’ capacity to invest , both internally and externally, as tighter credit conditions and lower corporate profits curtail TNCs’ financial resources for overseas investment projects (as well as domestic ones). On the one hand, credit has become less abundant and more expensive.

The external funding environment for non-financial companies has deteriorated markedly since mid-2008 , making it more difficult for them to invest in foreign operations or to make cross-border M&A deals. The gloomy evolution of markets, including the looming sharp economic recession worldwide (and even recession in a number of developed countries) and a heightened appreciation of risk, has also reduced firms’ propensity to invest for further expansion both domestically and internationally of production capacity. Risk aversion. Companies’ investment plans may also be scaled back due to a high level of perceived risks and uncertainties, in order to develop resilience to possible “worst-case” scenarios regarding financial and economic conditions . There has been a recent rise in divestments and restructuring of operations. Companies indeed undertake divestments and make cuts in existing production capacity – either by shutting down plants or factory lines, or by selling some of their assets to other companies– to restructure foreign operations, save costs, or improve their balance-sheet situation, especially through lowering the debt-equity ratio . There is also evidence that cross-border M&As have already been sharply affected as a direct consequence of the crisis, with a 17 per cent decline in cross-border M&As in the first 10 months of 2008 as compared to the same period of 2007. The decline in cross-border M&As is of utmost importance for FDI flows, which are strongly correlated with cross-border M&A amounts. However, positive driving forces remain at work. There are a number of reasons why TNCs might remain committed to FDI, even in the midst of the crisis.

First, a number of large emerging economies, such as Brazil, China, India and the Russian Federation, have remained attractive to FDI, particularly to market-seeking FDI. They maintained relatively high economic growth rates (compared to advanced economies) in 2008 . As prospects continue to deteriorate in developed countries (more markedly than in developing ones), investors will favour the relatively more profitable options available in developing countries . Examples of FDI in developing and transition economies arising from continuing market opportunities in those countries, or the longer-time horizons of investing TNCs include: •PepsiCo announced in early November that it would invest an additional $1 billion to expand its production in China in the next four years , while at the same time shutting down six factories and laying off 3,300 workers in the United States in order to cut costs . Italian automaker Fiat Group and OJSC Sollers signed a letter of intent in November to expand production of Fiat cars in the Russian Federation , where demand remains strong, despite the slowdown in the automobile industry in Europe and the United States. This is part of the shift of production towards emerging economies.

For example, in 2008, the total number of car sales in the “BRIC” countries (Brazil, the Russian Federation, India and China) was expected to exceed that in the United States . Second, financial crises and tough economic periods also offer opportunities to companies to buy assets at “bargain prices” and take advantage of large-scale industry consolidation in some activities. For aggressive, cash-rich TNCs – or those from cash-rich countries – the acquisition of undervalued assets may boost their investment in both developed and developing countries, depending on the circumstance and opportunities . Examples of increases in FDI through cross-border M&As:- Japanese financial companies have recently acquired several United States financial companies affected by the financial crisis . •Financial companies established abroad by Icelandic firms were also bought up: Glitnir AB (a branch of Glitnir in Sweden), and DLG Ltd. and Kaupthing Singer & Friedland Premium Finance Ltd. in the United Kingdom, both of which were owned by Kaupthing Bank, were acquired by HQ AB (Sweden), DM Plc (United Kingdom) and Close Brothers Group Plc (United Kingdom), respectively, in 2008 . Several mega M&A deals (those with an acquisition value of over $1 billion) have occurred in manufacturing industries (such as computer equipment, aircraft and pharmaceuticals) in the United States since September 2008 . Third, companies are still committed to increasing their level of internationalization in the medium term, a finding which constitutes a significant indicator for a future upturn in FDI flows . Large TNCs around the world still seem to be eager to pursue internationalization strategies (and thus increase FDI expenditures in the medium-to-long term). Fourth, new sources of FDI have emerged, especially from the South. Emerging economies and countries well-endowed with natural resources are becoming a growing source of FDI, either through the internationalization strategies carried out by their TNCs, or through the investment activities of their SWFs. FDI inflows The global economic crisis has translated into a sharp decline in FDI inflows both for developed and developing countries. FDI into developed countries in 2008 decreased by an estimated 25 per cent compared to 2007, mainly as a result of the protracted and deepening problems affecting financial institutions and the liquidity crisis in financial markets. As cross-border mergers and acquisitions account for the bulk of FDI in most developed countries, these countries are particularly vulnerable to the credit crunch . Almost all developing countries and countries with economies in transition have been affected by the global financial and economic crisis, but to different degrees. The setback is associated with a rising wave of restructuring and divestment and the cancellation of a large number of Greenfield projects, as well as a decline in cross-border mergers and acquisitions. Compared to cross-border mergers and acquisitions, international Greenfield investments were less impacted in 2008. But they were increasingly being affected in 2009, as a large number of projects awere being cancelled or postponed. FDI outflows FDI outflows from the United States went down as large repatriations of reinvested earnings and debt from foreign affiliates of the United States corporate sector took place and new investments abroad were halted . FDI outflows from Europe also declined. FDI outflows from the South slowed down, but to a lesser degree than those from the North. Therefore, the share of developing countries in global FDI outflows continues to rise, highlighting an increasingly significant presence of TNCs from the South. Many of them see their capability and propensity to invest abroad inevitably weakened due to the global financial crisis.

However, in a few dynamically growing countries, the driving forces of capital outflows, such as a large amount of foreign currency reserves, enhanced firm competitiveness and supportive government policies are still at work . In addition, companies and sovereign wealth funds from these economies are, in general, less affected by the financial turmoil than are enterprises in developed countries; they may continue to be active in overseas investment as part of their long-term strategies and become more important actors in the global FDI arena . For them, the global financial crisis and tough economic period ahead may create good opportunities to buy bargain assets, which can help promote cross-border mergers and acquisitions. However, they have also become more cautious in view of the considerable financial losses that some recent overseas investments have caused. POLICY RESPONSES – KEEPING INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND INVESTMENT FLOWING AND REVIEWING DEVELOPMENT STRATEGIES India has made changes in its FDI regulations several times. One in December 2008, wherein larger share of foreign ownership in many activities such as industrial parks, mining and petroleum, air transport was decided. And the other in February 2009 , which facilitated application of caps on foreign ownership in strategic sector (defence, aviation, telecommunications). It also swt out new paramenters to calculate parameters for calculation of indirect foreign investment in an Indian company . It further clarified the circumstances in which an Indian company with foreign investment will be required to obtain government approval for making downstream investments in India. Another protectionist measures include state initiatives to come up with a funding package of $6. 8 billion or 300 billion rupees – this fund will be used for infrastructure, i. e. schools, roads, and hospitals . The offers announced by Union Finance Minister, Pranab Mukherjee, in Union Budget 2010-11, to enhance investment ambiance in India on February 26, 2010 entail: •Measures implemented to un-complicate the FDI system •System for computation of indirect foreign investment in Indian firms has been comprehensively classified. •Entire liberalization of costing and imbursement of technology transmit charges and trademark, and royalty expenses. Additionally, the Indian government has permitted the Foreign Investment Promotion Board (FIPB), to sanction FDI tenders of up to US$ 358. 3 million. The global financial and economic crisis has stimulated consideration and implementation of mitigating policies and measures by countries and the international community. Some of these measures are valid in terms of safeguarding domestic industries and jobs . The challenge is to restore the credibility and stability of the international financial system, to provide stimulus to economic growth and to encourage investment and innovation. A number of policy initiatives at the national level could stimulate FDI. Three categories of policy measures can be distinguished.

First, many developed countries have adopted large-scale bailout plans and rescue packages for the financial sector . Providing State guarantees to financial institutions could have a crowding-in effect on FDI, as these companies might be considered as “safe” investments by foreign investors. Moreover, some countries have even actively sought the participation of foreign investors in individual rescue deals . Second, several countries – such as the United States, France, Germany and Spain – have announced large public investment programmes, mainly aimed at infrastructure investments, which not only builds confidence in economy but also opens up investment opportunities by TNCs. Third, a number of countries have adopted fiscal or monetary stimulus measures which might also have a positive impact on FDI flows. PROTECTIONISM IS STILL A THREAT Over recent months, many national governments have resorted to various policy measures to safeguard domestic industries and employment affected by the global crisis. With regard to investment, there are few signs of deliberate government actions to impede the cross-border flow of investment in reaction to the crisis. However, there is a risk that the massive increase in state intervention and the greater role of governments as economic agents could have a downside in terms of indirectly impacting investment policies, especially in terms of active policies favoring investment domestically and discouraging investing abroad. One of the more interesting aspects of the current wave of investment protectionism is governments” response to sovereign investments. The number and size of worldwide SovereignWealth Funds (“SWFs”) have both seen substantial increase between 1990 and today.

Numerous governments in developed countries have partially or fully nationalized domestic companies or are envisaging such a step . For instance, the French Government established a Strategic Investment Fund in December 2008 , which since then has acquired shares in several distressed companies. In February 2009, it augmented its capital participation in VALEO, a French producer of car parts . Reducing foreign investment, including divestment abroad, may be an economic necessity and may be unavoidable even in the absence of state intervention. Much depends on whether the trend towards more state ownership and control remains a temporary “fire fighting” measure during the crisis, or whether it results in more permanent structural changes with long-term implications. Nationalization policies and increasing state interference reduce investment opportunities for private investors – domestic and foreign – and may create an investment disincentive. While many private investors may currently not have much interest in acquiring enterprises that were or are to be bailed out, state ownership or control may become a more serious investment obstacle in the future if it is maintained after the actual crisis is over. A key global priority must be to resist and arrest tendencies towards protectionism and economic nationalism. In this regard, confidence in the multilateral trading system must be strengthened, with strong support by all countries to conclude the Doha Round on balanced and pro-development terms on an urgent basis. To avoid divestment, developing countries need to consider how to accommodate the cost-saving strategies of TNCs. For instance, a number of developing countries have included tax relief in their economic stimulus packages . CONCLUSION: The negative impact of the current financial crisis and the economic aftermath from it on FDI are likely to become stronger, and a further decline in global FDI flows is expected at least in the short-to-medium term. Countries with healthy macroeconomic fundamentals and robust financial systems are likely to recover sooner. Despite clear signals of economic slowdown, a number of large dynamically growing economies may remain attractive to market-seeking FDI, There are however a few positive forces still at work that can provide some relief to global investment flows. These include, for example, investment opportunities triggered by cheap asset prices and industry restructuring, large amounts of financial resources available in some dynamically growing countries such as sovereign wealth funds, and quick expansion of new activities such as fuel switching, renewable energy, material/resource/energy efficiency and some other environment-related industries. The crisis was less destructive to FDI than had been feared.

While investment budgets, including those for FDI, were squeezed during the crisis, TNCs did not engage in wholesale divestment of their foreign affiliates. The crisis did, however, accentuate one recent trend, namely the shifting of TNCs? geographical focus to developing and transition economies.

Also, the various economic stimulus programmes recently launched in many countries may have a positive impact on FDI inflows. The commitment of G20 leaders to take steps to facilitate trade and investment may also help to improve business confidence among companies. BIBLIOGRAPHY:- Articles •The Global Economic Downturn and Protectionism, Raymond J. Ahearn, Congressional Research Service •Protectionism And Sovereign Investment Post Global Recession, Dr. Efraim Chalamish , OECD Global Forum on International Investment •UNCTAD Investment Brief, Global FDI in Decline due to the Financial Crisis, and a Further Drop Expected, November 1, 2009 •Does Foreign Direct Investment Promote Development? , Theodore H. Moran, Edward M. Graham, and Magnus Blomstrom, Institute for International Economics •Assessing the impact of the current financial and economic crisis on global FDI flows. Note prepared by the UNCTAD secretariat. April 2009 •“Congo miners suffer as boom turns to bitter bust”. Barney Jopson Financial Times. 10 March 2009.

• “Corporate profits: global recession intensifies downside risks”, Morgan Stanley, Global Economic Forum, 6 November 2008. •Mehrdad Baghai, Sven Smit, and S. Patrick Viguerie, “M&A strategies in a down market”, The McKinsey Quarterly, September 2008 •“Importance of the substitution effect between investment abroad and home” study by E. L. Yeyati, U. Panizza and E. Stein (2007). “A global love affair: a special report on cars in emerging markets”, The Economist, 15 November 2008. •World Investment Prospects Survey, 2008–2011 (UNCTAD, 2008a) •Press notes of 2009 ,Government of India Ministry of Commerce & Industry •World Investment Prospects Survey 2010-2012, UNCTAD Websites: •https://www. adbi. org •https://www. rediff. com

• https://www. iie. com

• https://www. twnside. org. sg

• https://www. yourstory. in

• https://www. mining-journal. com •https://www. iom. int

• https://www. ifatca. org •https://www. asianewsnet. net

• https://www. iningtopnews. com •https://www. msnbc. msn. com •https://www. bloomberg. com •https://www. worldcarfans. com •https://www. worldbank. org •https://www. bloomberg. com •https://www. globalcrisisnews. com •https://biz. thestar. com. my •https://www. reuters. com •https://www. cosmeticsdesign. com •https://www. nytimes. com •https://www. turkishweekly. net •https://in. reuters. com •https://www. india-server. com •https://www. unctad. org •https://www. euractiv. com •https://www. imf. org •https://www. forbes. com •https://www. swfinstitute. org •https://www. mayerbrown. com

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Recent Global Economic Recession. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Phidias

Andrew Reyes Ancient Humanities Professor Hubbs July 22, 2010 Phidias The name Phidias will be remembered for the rest of time. Phidias was a sculptor born around 490 BC. Phidias is often recognized as a the most renown ancient Greek sculptors. While there are no originals of his work remaining, his reputation has been made well known through various writings. Most of the writings give praise to Phidias. His two greatest contributions came from sculptures; one of Athena, and the other of Zeus. Phidias was a man recognized for his talents, it is a shame that this generation or generations to come will never get to see his work first hand. Phidias’ work on Athena was marveled upon for centuries. Phidias’ colossal statue of Athena was housed in the Parthenon and was displayed the symbol of Athens. It is believed that the statue was damaged in several fires and eventually was burned beyond repair around the fifth century. The statue was believed to be of great stature and heavy in gold. The sculpture was assembled on a wooden core, covered with shaped bronze plates covered in turn with removable gold plates, save for the ivory surfaces of the goddess's face and arms; the gold weighed 44 talents, the equivalent of about 2,500 pounds (1,100 kg); the Athena Parthenos embodied a sizeable part of the treasury of Athens (Phidias, 2010). ” The Second contribution was similar to Athena. Zeus was erected in the temple of Zeus in approximately 432 BC. Similar to Athena it was a chryselephantine, meaning that is was both gold and ivory. At one point Zeus’ statue was considered one of the Seven Wonders of the World. In 1954 a great discovery was found; the location of Phidias’ workshop was found in Olympia. “Tools, terracotta moulds and a cup inscribed ‘I belong to Phidias’… This has enabled archaeologists to re-create the techniques used to make the great work and confirm its date. (Phidias, 2010)” Phidias’s hard work and dedication to the gods allowed the statue to be well regarded throughout all of Greece. Phidias was not limited to the two sculptures; he also helped create other works of art. Phidias directed and supervised the construction of the temple [Parthenon] over a period of more than ten years… (Fiero, 2006). ” The Parthenon is where the statue of Athena was erected, and is believed to have been a remarkable site to see when it was intact. Phidias also contributed a tribute to Marathon. Marathon ran 26 miles to Athens to tell of Greece’s win over the Persians. “Fragments remain of his [Phidias] work on the Parthenon friezes and commemorative works of the battle of marathon (Sheldon, 2010). Phidias works have helped shape architecture to what it is today. Even in the earliest of times Phidias was able to construct marvels such as the Parthenon, the Statue of Athena, and the Statue of Zeus. His sculpture skills and architecture abilities have led him to be one of the most influential artists to have ever walked the face of the earth. It would be hard to say that there is an architect or an artist today that has not been influenced in some way by the great Phidias. ? Bibliography Eddy, S. (1977). The Gold in the Athena Parthenos . American Journal of Archaeology , 107-111. Fiero, G. K. (2006). The Humanistic Tradition. New York: Mcgraw-Hill. Phidias. (2010). Retrieved July 22, 2010, from Wikipedia: https://en. wikipedia. org/wiki/Statue_of_Zeus_at_Olympia Sheldon, N. (2010, June 28). Phidias: The Most Famous Scupltor of Ancient Greece. Retrieved July 22, 2010, from Suite101. com: https://archaeology. suite101. com/article. cfm/phidias-the-most-famous-sculptor-of-ancient-greece
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Phidias. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Case Study on Otisline

Q1: Why did OTIS launch this project? Background: OTIS was a market leader in both the aspects of elevator industry i. e. sales and services. However, the services industry despite being very stable had become very competitive due to entrance of many small players since services involved higher margin on profits, which attracted many entrants in the field. An elevator service company would be typically invited on the basis of responsiveness, quality and price. OTIS was able to charge premium for its products because of its established name but it had to maintain the quality and customer satisfaction high to get new installation contracts (more sales) and service contracts. It all started for OTIS with a companywide cost reduction program in 1981. Key reasons for the program were: 1. A centralized customer service system was deemed desirable because getting new contracts would only be adjudged based on through responsive call-backs by the company. 2. Reduction of response time which only a centralized system would make possible to do. A centralized system would enable the company to accept calls even during non primetime. This didn’t work efficiently for the company through local answering services due to non alignment of interests. 3. Get timely feedbacks from the customers on service quality. 4. More aligned cost effective solution was needed. 5. The response on call-backs till now varied across locations and it was felt to make it more effective to enhance customer satisfaction, the company needed to be more effective across all locations. 6. Of the 2300 service mechanics employed by NAO in 1985, most handled both call-backs and preventive maintenance. According to NAO OTIS could save up to $5 million by reducing call-backs which centralized system could make possible achieve Q2: How was value created in this model? OTISLINE proved to be greatly beneficial to the company in terms of following value propositions- 1. Responsiveness: Fact: Reduced response time to up to 1 second, enabled component specific problems to be tackled and increased visibility of the company to end customers. Implication: The system not only improved and tracked the responsiveness to customer calls, but also provided reports of response-time tatistics that could be reviewed with customers. The company could therefore start offering a guaranteed response time to customers because of OTISLINE’s capabilities. 2. Communication: Fact: Quality of services also improved owing to centralization of the system. This was made possible through centralized records accessible to all, hence improving overall efficiency of the system. Implication: Not only it improved communication between the customers and manufacturer, but it also provided the sales and service department with an effective submission of various reports to the management. . Reliability of data: Fact: Standardization of procedures through efficient data management. This enabled trend analysis for flawed designs of products and corrective mechanisms to tackle it in advance. Integration of services enabled management to be able to handle and monitor the system in a better way and work to make it more reliable. Implication: Reliability data could be used by management to allocate resources to locations with recurring problems. Engineering could also investigate trends that could be an indicator of flawed design or problem. 4. Customer Satisfactions: All the above lead to greater customer satisfaction and thus improved company’s reputation in services. Also it empowered Otis to compete with independent competitors. Q2: What adjustments in the organization were needed to accommodate OTISLINE? In order that OTISLINE proves to be a good fit satisfying strategic need and delivering successful outcomes, the critical thing is to have an appropriate infrastructure and to employ a good implementation process. One of the very important ways to provide this environment is by transforming the organizational structure from a decentralized one to a centralized centre. This transformation is bound to have a positive effect on performance, but at the same time it would bring a variety of negative effects on many people's jobs. Otis had to move from a highly decentralized handling of elevator service, controlled by the field office managers, to a highly centralized approach. Many of the immediate and future benefits of OTISLINE follow from this radical change, which was not just a redesign of the business process of dispatching, but a transformation of managerial control within the firm. Centralized handling of services mean, replacing local dispatchers with new ones at the central site. For mechanics, the improved dispatching will make their lives better in some ways, but it will also subject their performance to greater monitoring. Also, field office managers may find themselves bypassed as service data would directly flow to corporate headquarters, which will start to liaise in local service operations. So, the consequences for people in the organization are going to be very mixed. Also, some changes have to be introduced both on technical front also. This changes involve migration of one computer platform to other; including IBM 3083 replacing IBM 370/158, change in programming requirements, change in functionality of jobs, which could possibly leave certain professionals obsolete in new environment. In short, we can conclude on the cultural front, the major changes involve shifting of resources to establish new helpful systems rather than application development resources to automate old manual procedures. The organization is changing the way it required its employees to do business.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Case Study on Otisline. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

H.K. Porter Company and Vln Corporation

Introduction Cooper industry, H. K. Porter Company and VLN Corporation are entangled in a battle over the takeover of Nicholson File Company. Both H. K. Porter Company and VLN Corporation have already made their offers to the Nicholson File Company shareholders and now the management of Cooper Industry have to decide whether to jump into the foray for the control of Nicholson File Company or not. The major issues faced by the management of Cooper Industry are as following: 1. Is Nicholson File Company an attractive acquisition target for Cooper Industries? Specifically, what synergies can be created by merging these firms, and in what other aspects is Nicholson an attractive target? In what respect, if any, is Nicholson not an attractive target? Overall, is there sufficient strategic fit to justify pursuing this acquisition? 2. What sort of integration issues is Cooper Industry likely to face if it is successful in acquiring Nicholson? What should Cooper's management do to facilitate successful integration? 3. What should be the range of prices Cooper Industries should be willing to pay for each share of Nicholson's stock, in case it wants to acquire the firm? Strategic Analysis - how does Nicholson fit into Cooper's acquisition strategy Cooper could become a major factor in the hand tools business given its expertise in manufacture of machine tools. Moreover, one of the main problems that Cooper faces currently is a large cyclicality in its business, characteristic of the heavy machine tool industry, but more pronounced because of its dependence on Oil and Gas industries. These industries are heavily correlated with the state of the economy. So when there is a slowdown, Cooper would be one of the first companies to go down - something that they would want to avoid through diversification by way of acquisitions. The hand tools business is a lot less cyclical and cash flows are likely to be less lumpy. This fits in with Cooper's requirement of smoothing its income flows. The hand tools industry has a broad focus ranging from files to saws and hammers - mostly small ticket items. This ensures that Nicholson does not depend on any particular customer/industry for its revenues, as is the case with Cooper. Nicholson is the market leader in files and rasps and ranks 4th in handsaws and saw blades. Thus it very much fits into Cooper's strategy of acquiring only leading companies. The Nicholson acquisition would come on the heels of 3 previous acquisitions, all in the hand tools business, showing definite intent on the part of Cooper to move into this line. Nicholson would provide a wider range to Cooper's current hand tools portfolio. The idea was to build a comprehensive hand tools company that could share the common distribution channels as the parent company, thus improving returns. As per its outlined strategic policy Cooper should look at Nicholson as a favorable acquisition target. Improvements in Nicholson's operations as a result of the acquisition Cooper believes that some of Nicholson's product lines are not profitable, a case which is very common in family run businesses. Cooper's view is that if Nicholson focuses on its profitable product lines then it can reduce its inventory costs and manufacturing efficiency causing the COGS to reduce by 4% of sales. The distribution network required for selling Nicholson's products are the same as those maintained by Cooper for its acquired hand tools businesses. So in case Cooper acquires Nicholson, the Selling, General and Administrative expenses will reduce by 3% of sales. On the basis of these two reductions itself, the PBT of Nicholson would rise by about 7% of its sales value. In 1971, the net sales figure was $55. 3 mn. Therefore the PBT would increase by $ 3. 87 mn. PBT = $ 5. 89 mn PAT = $ 3. 54 mn (tax @ 40%) Equity = $ 31 mn ROE = 11. 4% This is much higher than the current ROE levels. Thus Nicholson has a lot to gain from increases in ROE. As per our projections of ROE, (assuming that the synergies take around 4 years to settle in) the ROE rises from 6. 3% in 1972 to 12. 25% in 1977, meaning an increase of almost 100% in 5 years. There are more synergies to be gained from the acquisition, though these are more difficult to quantify. As mentioned in the case, the sales pattern of Nicholson and Cooper's hand tools business are complementary. Nicholson has strengths in the industrial sector, whereas Cooper is more into the consumer market. Thus an acquisition would lead to a possibility of Nicholson pulling Cooper's hand tools line into the industrial sector (as a result of its strong brand equity in this sector) and vice versa. This would help both to increase their share of the pie in either sector. Bargaining power of Cooper vis--vis Porter Shareholding pattern of Nicholson industries: Shareholder# of sharesRemarks Porter177,000Does not want VLN preferred shares. Will sell at approx $50 / share to Cooper Nicholson family117,000They won't sell stake unless assured of management independence. Are more likely to take the VLN offer than Cooper. Uncommitted shareholders172,000They would most likely go by the management's advice Speculators75,000They will go wherever they find short term gains Cooper29,000They want to take control of Nicholson. Will probably make an open offer and get into an agreement with Porter VLN14,000They want to take control of Nicholson, but are willing to allow management independence. Their offer is dubious in terms of the value of the preferred stock in the future. Cooper needs 265,000 more shares to get a simple majority in order to take control. The Nicholson family would not part with any of its shareholding, since Cooper is not likely to allow independent management. In fact Cooper's entire offer is based on the premise of improving operations at Nicholson. This would require retiring certain lines of business and cutting down on the distribution and sales personnel and using Cooper's distribution network. This is not likely to be acceptable to Nicholson's management. The total shareholding of the speculators and uncommitted shareholders is 247000. So even if this entire lot sells its stock to Cooper (a highly unlikely event) they would still be short of the 50. 1% mark. So they cannot afford to not get into an agreement with Porter. On the other end, Porter is stuck with a huge stockholding of 177,000 shares. In case the VLN offer goes through then as per Rhode Island laws, Porter will have to accept VLN preference shares, which in its view are not valuable. Therefore they would be quite desperate to get out of this shareholding, and Cooper's preference shares seem to be a plausible arrangement. Therefore, both sides Cooper and Porter are somewhat on loose bargaining grounds. In the event of this, it may be possible for Cooper to negotiate and try and bring down its costs from $50/share of Nicholson's as quoted by Porter. Integration issues of Cooper with Nicholson The entire analysis of projected cash flows and ROE assumes that Cooper is successful in brining about the changes in Nicholson's operations and bring about effective synergies. In case the merger does not work out in the sense that Cooper is expecting it to, then the price of approximately $50/share that it will land up paying would probably be too much. In the event of Cooper going in for the acquisition without the buy-in of the Nicholson management and shareholders, there is likely to be friction between the two operations post-merger. It is quite unlikely that Nicholson's top management would remain with the merged firm, as had been the case with the previous 3 mergers. This would mean extra costs for Cooper to put in a new management in place. The distribution network used by Nicholson is likely to be rationalized post-merger. This is because the distribution network already owned by Cooper for its hand tools business more or less covers the requirements of Nicholson as well. This would mean laying off a number of workers. This might not go down very well with the rest of the personnel. This again might not be exactly what Cooper is expecting in terms of the coordination. This could be a very significant roadblock in the path of affecting the synergies between the two companies. The premise that Nicholson would help Cooper gain market share in the industrial sector is an estimate at best. This may not happen, since the Nicholson brand is specific to a particular set of tools, and it may not be directly possible to extend this to Cooper's entire line of products. Keeping in mind the various strategic and integration issues of Nicholson File Company with the Cooper Industries, we believe that in spite of few hiccups, it should be good acquisition target for Cooper. We will now move to the valuation of the Nicholson File Company to find out what should be the price Cooper should be ready to pay for each share of Nicholson File Company for the takeover. Valuation of the Nicholson File Company Estimation of Cost of Debt: Nicholson pays an interest of $0. 8 mn on the long term debt of $ 12 mn. This gives the cost of debt for Nicholson as: Cost of Debt = (0. 8 / 12) * 100 = 6. 66 % Assuming the tax rate to be 40%, then after tax cost of debt is: After tax cost of Debt = 6. 666 * (1-0. 4) = 4% Estimation of cost of Equity: The company's common stock had the market value of $30 on 3rd March, 1972. The industry has been growing at annual rate of 6%, while Nicholson had been growing at 2%. Given Nicholson's sound market presence a distribution network, we assume that the investors expect it to grow at CAGR of 6%. Now, the company has been paying a dividend of $1. 6 per annum. M&M theory states that the dividend policy does not matter. Hence, the capital appreciation expected in the Nicholson, coupled with constant dividend of $1. 6 is equivalent to the annual growth rate of 6% on dividend, starting with dividend at time t=1, D1 = $1. . Hence, the expected return wanted of the equity investment in Nicholson is calculated as shown: MV of share = PV of future dividends $ 30 = $1. 6 / (r - 0. 06) r = 11. 33% Calculation of WACC: At present Nicholson has a Long term Debt of $12 mn and equity of $ 31mn. This gives the values of: D / (D + E) = 12 / 43 = 29% E / (E + D) = 31/43 = 71% We assume that after acquisition, Cooper will maintain the same capital structure in Nicholson. Hence, the weighted average cost of capital (WACC) is as calculated below: Type of securityAfter-tax cost of capitalWeight in capital structureWeighted cost of capital Debt40. 91. 160 Common stock11. 660. 718. 279 WACC9. 439 Predicting the future Free Cash Flows (FCFs): In predicting the future Free Cash Flows (FCF), we make the following assumptions: 1. Tax rate remains constant at 40% 2. Depreciation remains constant at $2. 1 mn per year. 3. Long-term debt remains constant and no further new Equity is issued. Any cash requirement, if any, is funded through Short term debts. 4. Interest is paid on the debt at 6. 66% pa. 5. Number of shareholders remains constant at 5,73,275. 6. Other deductions remain constant at $0. 2 mn per annum 7. The company maintains a constant operating cash of $1 mn. Any excess cash that is generated is considered non operating. 8. Sales grow at the rate of 6% pa from 1972 to 1976. Thereafter, they grow at 4% per annum. 9. Accounts receivables, Accounts payables, inventories and net Plant, property and equipments grow at the same rate as the sales. 10. The Cost of goods sold decreases from 68% of the sales in 1972 to 65% in 1975. Afterwards it remains constant at 65% until 1981. 11. The selling, general and administrative expenses change from 22% of sales to 19% from 1972 to 1975. Thereafter they remain constant at 19% of sales. 12. We assume that the investments in subsidiaries are operating. This assumes that the subsidiaries further the business ambitions of the company. Calculating the Market value of Nicholson after acquisition by Cooper: Using the above assumptions, the market value was arrived at with the help of 2 methods: 1. Discounted FCF 2. Equity value - to - Book value multiple The results are summarized as shown below: Discounted FCFEquity value-to-BV Market Value$ 21. 2 mn$ 26. 2 mn Value of single share$ 36. 6$ 45. 7 Calculations shown in Appendix 1-5 Does the merger make Economic Sense for Cooper? Thus far we have considered the strategic overtures of the merger. Now from the above discussion, we can fairly say that as a strategic initiative this merger makes good sense to Cooper. Now the next factor to consider is whether the price that Cooper will have to pay for the Nicholson shares is worth the value. For this purpose, we first performed a valuation of Nicholson using 2 methods: oDiscounted Free Cash Flows oEquity-value to Book-value multiple The two methods resulted in different values of a Nicholson share viz. $36 and $45 respectively. Now if Cooper was to agree to Porter's demand of $50/share then the amount it would be paying for 177,000 shares would be $50. Moreover, the current market (in May 1972) was quoting $44 per Nicholson share. So if Cooper was to lure the other shareholders (uncommitted and speculators) it would have to make an offer with a premium over $44. We can safely assume that the final cost per share for this merger would be anywhere between $48 and $50. Now as per our valuation, the average value of each share would be approximately $40-42. So Cooper will land up paying a lot more than the actual value it stands to gain from this merger. Therefore just looking at these numbers, our recommendation to Cooper would be to not go into this deal. But then there are some caveats to this recommendation. Firstly, the $50/share value that we are paying to Porter is based on the premise that the share price of Cooper is set to rise in the years to come. This may not materialize in which case the cost of the acquisition may not be as much as it comes out of this analysis. Moreover, considering the bargaining position of Cooper vis--vis Porter, it may be possible to negotiate the price to somewhat below the quote of $50/share. Moreover the synergies that are expected out of the merger might be very significant, and have not been factored into the analysis. These inflows might just make the $3-4 premium that Cooper is paying over the market value at present worthwhile. Therefore, our recommendation would be that the spread between the value received and paid is quite thin, and hence Cooper should take a decision based on its estimate of the synergies that are possible with the present portfolio, and also with possible acquisitions in the near future.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

H.K. Porter Company and Vln Corporation. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Case of doing Business China

CASES OF DOING BUSINESS IN CHINA Editor: Professor Zhu Mingxia University international Business and Economics 2010 CONTENTS Introduction to China In context of “Doing Business in China – A Global Perspective” CASE 1: Starbucks management strategies in China CASE 2: The expansion of McDonald’s in China CASE 3: A Case Study of KFC and other Fast food Chains CASE 4: Successful story of IKEAN in China CASE 5: General Motors in China CASE 6: L’Oreal Group CASE 7: Market entry for David Lloyd in China CASE 8: The water treatment market in China CASE 9: Danone Group CASE 10: A Success Story in Retailing: Carrefour CASE 11: The Expansion of Snow Beer in China Introduction to China In context of “Doing Business in China – A Global Perspective” Introduction China is set to emerge as the world’s greatest economy and superpower in the near future. As global organisations rush to expand operations in the largest consumer base in the world, the global economy as a whole is accelerating as rapid, substantial changes in technology unfold. China is said to be the manufacturing capital of the world, and although true, organisations are increasingly looking to China for more than purely cost competitiveness. Globalisation & ‘The Flat World’ “A set of processes leading to the integration of economic, cultural, political, and social systems across geographical boundaries” Globalisation is the single, most influential driver of change in the 21st century. Management out of necessity are forced to align their business operations with the emerging global economy in order to merely survive in today’s environment. The global market place is intrinsically linked to technology as a means to close the gap of time, culture and geography. A few major recent historic converging events are regarded as core drivers of globalisation as we know today and are investigated below.

Although the internet was around for some time, Netscape Navigator, released in 1994 is regarded as bringing the web to life by allowing ordinary users to interact with content easily. Netscape triggered massive attention during the mid 1990s, the so called ‘dot com boom’ as investors scrambled to cash in on the newly established, ‘information revolution’. Huge investments during this time were placed on network providers such as Lucent, Cisco and Nortel. With such a rapid increase in capital, an estimated $1trillion was spent during this time laying thousands of miles of fibre optic cable, establishing high speed infrastructure links between the United States, Asia and Europe. Over-investment at this time lead to the ‘dot com bubble’ and the as a consequence, the ‘dot com burst’. While the ‘dot com burst’ paved way for a more conservative approach to IT investment as the public perceived the information revolution extinguished, this was merely the end of the beginning as the investments in fibre optics effectively made Asia and the United States next door neighbours overnight, allowing more people than ever before communicate virtually for free. Another major contributing factor occurred in the 1990s which saw extraordinary development in a plethora of software applications which when combined with high speed data exchange, had the effect of creating a multiplicity of forms of collaboration. This instance during the 1990s is regarded as the genesis of globalisation and the flattening of the world. Outsourcing has also contributed to the flattening world as managers realised the potential for coordinating business operations online to radically cut costs, leveraging foreign location economic conditions. Similarly, the rise of ‘offshoring’ practices has also emerged. We see a wide range of open-source software development collaborations as a result of globalisation, a powerful form of collaboration. The Firefox web browser created by a 24 year old from New Zealand and a 19 year old from Stanford University was downloaded over ten millions times during the first month of release, acquiring some 5% of Microsoft’s market share.

The Linux Apache community have also demonstrated the power of open-source which holds some 15% of the web server market share today. Supply chain management is also regarded as a major contributing factor and in itself, an entirely new form of collaboration. The largest organisation in the United States, Wal-Mart, manufactures nothing, but focuses exclusively on managing their supply chain down to the last atom of efficiency. ‘Your World Synchronized’, the UPS logo, strives to do just that and the company is regarded as another major supply chain player which is gaining business on areas which seem counter intuitive.

Insourcing’ (the process of undertaking business operations from third party organisations) Toshiba’s entire laptop repair service and charging Toshiba once laptops have been delivered back to customers demonstrates the ability of organisations to undertake radically different forms of business operations as a result of the ‘flat world’. The convergence of all of the above technologies and forms of collaboration are being rapidly accelerated by more recent developments in technology such as VOIP, file-sharing, ubiquitous computing and wireless communications. Such technologies are now allowing people to collaborative anytime, anywhere and with any device on the move. Much like the electricity revolution, the information revolution truly emerges once a variety of factors reach a pivotal tipping point, resulting in exponential and sudden gains in productivity. Infrastructure fuelled the development of software, which in turn fuelled outsourcing, offshoring, open-sourcing, ‘insourcing’, and ‘supply-chaining’. All of these factors have very recently contributed largely to the flattening of the world as we know it today by creating a global, web-enabled platform for sharing multiple forms of sharing knowledge and work across time, distance, geography and language. Furthermore, government deregulation, free markets, cheap air travel, global warming regulations/legislation and other factors are regarded as other contributing factors.

The convergence of all forms of technology and collaboration can be used as a framework for sense-making for a large proportion of things which we see today. Today, value is created in interactions which cut across departments and organisations in a horizontal fashion rather than the traditional vertical silo structure. The ability for organisations and IT project managers to restructure their organisation and integrate with third parties in this fashion will ultimately result in the necessity of survival. Russia, China and India, some 3billion people are not becoming, but are major players in the global business environment. Broadband penetration in total in these areas, some 10%, equates to roughly 300million new entrants (greater than the total broadband enabled population of the U. S) over the traditional powers of the west, which have access to the same tools, resources and education are poised to shape the brief history of the 21st century. When the ‘dot com bubble’ burst, it was said that globalisation was over, yet this statement could not be further from the truth as it was conversely the catalyst of the globally integrated environment which we have created and know today.

Large organisations are sensitive to this change and have radically restructured and reinvented operations as a result of a change of mindset. IBM last year stated that they expect that 50% of their new product innovations will come from outside their organisation and as a result have rolled out a highly modern open platform for innovation and learning which constitutes loose forms of collaboration and rapid prototyping by leveraging ‘Web 2. 0’ technologies (blogs, wikis, test beds, social networks & others) to develop and test ideas across all distributed geographic regions of the organisation. Xerox has similarly undergone an extensive change as a result of the flattening world. Organisations are pulling customers more and more into the supply chain as a means to reduce costs and enhance focus on core competency. Design, distribution and advertising we see are increasingly being undertaken by consumers. It can be said in this way that if you buy an electronic flight ticket with Ryanair for example, that, if you value your time, you are paying Ryanair to work for them. There are cases of organisations adopting an extreme approach – where every business operation is outsourced, allowing total flexibility and speed for change. Such organisations may be regarded as branding shells which emphasise brand strength and awareness through the utilization of highly specialized competencies of third part providers.

The flat world dictates greater consolidation as a necessity for large organisations to acquire high technology SMEs which have accumulated a large number of users or high technology (intellectual property) goods/services. As a consequence, managers must develop new and align existing IT projects to cope with this potentially large contrast in culture, organisation structure, existing IT infrastructure and customer preferences. It is estimated that in the future almost every product and service will become a commodity as vendors flood into the global market and compete exclusively on price performance. Furthermore, markets we expect will become more complex, will have more opportunity and will comprise a large number of product/market niches. As a result, how can organisations gain sustained long term sustained competitive advantage? Managers must acquire a portfolio of projects, strategically focused, almost exclusively on innovation and idea generation, something which is seen to be impossible to commoditise. Organisations must adopt a proactive approach to embrace the emerging flattening world and encourage open communication and collaboration, share knowledge and receive insight by reciprocated knowledge with all. Managers must encourage open collaboration both internally and increasingly externally, as a core component of an organisation’s overarching business strategy. China & ‘The Flat World’ China’s role in the global economy appears to be set. The country is regarded as the most important nation today for both developing and developed countries. China can do not only high-quality, low-cost manufacturing but increasingly, high-quality, high-cost manufacturing.

Organisations such as Google and Microsoft have relocated research and development operations close to Tsinghua University in Beijing as a means to acquire fresh talent from the country’s greatest science and technology institution. Despite substantial losses, Microsoft has taken the seemingly counter intuitive stance of sustained funding in China, implicitly signifying their intensions of the future of the Chinese economy. In 2005, both the Microsoft and Google labs accumulated 12 out of a total 110 computer science and technology PHD studies which have been developed into prototype ventures. In this way, we see that China is increasingly being utilized for more than purely cost based economies of scale.

The Chinese government is also supportive of such objectives and is keen to maximise China’s full potential given their shifts in policy from the so called ‘open door’ policy, to ‘made in China’ and to today’s slogan of ‘created in China’. China to this end has adopted a proactive stance to the flattening of the world by allowing itself to connect to more people than ever before through the adoption of cheap broadband and mobile services and the correct physical roads, airports and other transportation systems. Educating the population as a whole to be thinking in more creative and innovation ways and furthermore, to adopt reliable rules of law and fiscal policies to allow people to connect to the global information platform in the most productive way possible is vitally important for the continued growth of the Chinese economy. Between China, India and Russia, roughly 12% of their combined populations have broadband access, equating to some 340million people. These people have access to the same resources, education and tools as people in western countries and are therefore considered to be new and equal entrants into the global playing field. Although broadband penetration in these regions is low, this 340million is greater than the entire population of the U. S, some 300million, of which there is roughly 75% broadband penetration. The implications of this trend are outstanding and will pave the way for the changes which we will see in the coming years as China grows from a manufacturing base to an intellectual hub. In order to facilitate the economic, social and political transition to accommodate the flattening of the world, she must overcome a few major barriers which are particular to China; protecting intellectual property, working with government bureaucracy and developing effective business relationships.

Protecting Intellectual Property Intellectual Property (IP) is regarded as a major deterrent for foreign and domestic companies wishing to establish themselves in the Chinese market. It is estimated that as much as 90% of business software used in China is derived from pirated copies. Furthermore, it is estimated that the American entertainment industry lost some US$1billion to piracy in China in 1997. Heinz also discovered that 36 of their products we copied along with SC Johnson estimating that two thirds of their products were available on the black market. While this problem today remains rampant despite recent hanges in IP policy, it is unclear if this problem will subside in the future. Many of the roots causes for counterfeit goods arise from the corruption of local government officials. Organisations today may protect their IP by not excessively building their brand name in China. By doing so, products will gain substantial sales revenues yet will not experience the popularity to warrant unwanted pirate attention.

Organisations may furthermore allow customers to send pirated goods to the official manufacturer by which organisations may track down pirates to prosecute them. Joint Ventures are also regarded as a potential for IP theft. Organisations often sign a confidentiality clause with their counterparts but such a contract usually takes years to resolve if exercised given the inefficiency and bureaucracy of the Chinese legal system. Furthermore companies may study the reasons pertaining to technology and IP leaks which occur within the Chinese market as a means to discover mitigation strategies. Organisations can also determine the ways in which they may effectively build relationships with customers and entities as a means to gain loyalty among the local market. Working with Government Bureaucracy China is one of the world’s most corrupt regions of the world to do business.

Today’s problem stems from Deng Xiaoping’s declaration of ‘to get rich is glorious’ – which lead many people to pursue personal monetary gain, a significant move away from socialist society. Secondly the government also controls access to resources and approvals that managers need to run their business which puts the power of an organisation firmly in the hands of the government. Corruption usually takes one of the following forms; demands for payments of unauthorized fees, payment for services that should be provided as part of a bureaucrat’s job, or a payment or kickback for awarding a business contract. The future looks bright however for the Chinese corruption situation. The Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) and five other countries have recently signed the OECD Convention on Combating Bribery. All countries strive to ensure that corruption be governed and eradicated by establishing legislation in all contributing nations home countries in a way which is best suited to their individual legal system. In addition, research suggests that managers may improve communications between stakeholders thereby increasing cooperation.

Communication also increases the sense of group effectiveness, cohesion, mutual obligation and interdependence all of which may deter corruption. Conclusion Given the vast amount of complex challenges which managers and organisations face in China today, it is no surprise that the majority of corporations fail or have limited and varied success. In 1998 it was estimated that as much as one half on companies experienced losses due to ‘black hat’ activity. While Deng Xiaoping’s efforts have allowed China to radically transform its economy, political and legal reform has unequally developed and has resulted in an imbalance.

This imbalance has ramifications for foreign and domestic investors alike whom wish to develop and expand business operations within the Chinese market. Undoubtedly Chinese ascension toward a global superpower will depend on such reforms to be realised. Foreign investment and open door policy have throughout history allowed such barriers to be broken down in the past in similar situations in different nations. The author speculates that over time, the willingness of China to be open and free to trade will gradually erode such barriers in the future and allow business to further flourish. CASE 1: Starbucks management strategies in China 1. Introduction: history of Starbucks Starbucks calls itself the leading retailer Coffee Company in the world. It has more than 6,000 retail locations in North America, Latin America, The Middle East and the Pacific Rim, wherever there is demand for coffee. They are committed to offer their consumers the world’s best coffee while conducting their business in ways that produce social environmental and economic benefits for the countries where the shops are located. The first Starbucks shop opened in the 1970’s in Seattle’s historic Pike Place Market by three partners: English teacher Jerry Baldwin, history teacher Zev Siegel, and writer Gordon Bowker.

Due to the demand for coffee, Starbucks was able to expand beyond Seattle during the nineties. Starbucks became a publicly traded company and offered stock options to its part-time employees. During the last decade, Starbucks continued its worldwide expansion. As the largest coffee house company in the world, Starbucks has total stores 16,706 as of Dec. 27, 2009 which include 8,850 company-operated stores and 7,856 licensed stores. Next to coffee and espresso Starbucks started to offer tea and other drinks to their consumers. The providing of a great work environment and the embracement of diversity is clearly pointed out in its mission statement. Starbucks tries to apply the highest standards of excellence for the ingredients of the products and to satisfy their consumers without losing eye for profitability (Starbucks: 2007). In this paper we first outline how Starbucks conquered the Chinese market. An overview is given about the main marketing strategies concerning the product, place, price, promotion and people. Furthermore we try to compare Starbucks to its main competitors. In the last chapter of the paper we end with a conclusion. 2. Starbucks conquers the Chinese market In 1999 Starbucks opened its first shop in China, in Beijing’s China world trade center. One year later the first shop in Shangai was opened. At this moment Starbucks has over 436 retail shops mostly situated in mainland China, Taiwan and Hong Kong. In mainland China the majority of the stores are located in Shanghai and in Beijing, respectively 95 and 57. In less than 10 years China became the most important market for Starbucks outside the United States.

The majority of the shops can be found in cities where the Western culture has already penetrated the Chinese culture significantly. In the beginning Starbucks needed to find local partners to expand the market. As a result, expansion was very slow. Government regulations forced Starbucks and other international retailers to open stores through partnerships with local firms. Starbucks and other multinationals left many operational activities to be completed by their local partners. This resulted in inconsistencies like in case of Starbucks, big disparities in their products from shop to shop. (Reuters: 2006) Since 2004 it became much easier to conquer the market because the government adapted the law and no more local partners were needed to open a retail shop (Adamy: 2006). In figure 1 the numbers of Starbucks stores in mainland China, Taiwan and Hong Kong are presented over a time period from 1999 until 2006. The number of new shops each year has been increased significantly because of the less strict regulations since 2004. This result is in line with Starbucks worldwide expansion plans. In the year 2007 the company’s goal is to open 2,400 stores among the United States and other worldwide markets.

This expansion is mainly driven by the growth of the company in China. [pic] Figure 1: Expansion of Starbucks in China, Taiwan and Hong Kong. Information available on https://english. cri. cn/2946/2006/11/29/199@168770. htm 3. Market Strategy The probing question Starbucks and other multinationals have to answer is: should we change our products to have more appeal in China or should we try to change the Chinese taste? Eventually Starbucks decided to go for the second option and tried to promote their coffee specialties in a tea drinking country. Promotion and information was very important in the approach of Chinese consumers. By distributing brochures titled “Coffee Brewing Wisdom” with frequently asked questions such as “What is Cappuccino? they tried to educate the people. Other multinationals like Kentucky Fried Chicken chose the first option and adapted their product to the Chinese taste. As Chinese people like fried food and chicken, KFC is doing very well in the mainland of China and its market share is even bigger then Mac Donald’s who sticks more to their traditional products. Another successful example is General Motors Corp, which has adapted its Cadillac for the Chinese consumer market. This proves that both options, adapting the product or change the Chinese preferences, can be successful. The company does need an effective and efficient market strategy concerning the place, price, product and promotion discussed in the following paragraphs. . 3. 1 Product Starbucks had to close the huge gap between Chinese citizens and their Coffee. In the beginning Coffee was really unknown and unpopular in the country with a tea drinking culture.

Starbucks overcame this overwhelming obstacle by a successful marketing strategy. In fact, it turned out that the tea drinking culture was not the biggest obstacle. Coffee can easily be adapted by adding more sugar and milk so that one can make it as sweet as he or she wants. Starbucks main goal was to let people get use to visit a Starbucks shop a couple of times a week like after class or after work.

They want to make their clients addicted to visiting Starbucks, maybe not for the food and drinks, but for the cozy environment, to meet friends and to show other people their status. Like one client in Starbucks said: “I don’t really like the coffee but I come here because there are so many girls. I prefer the environment above the products they offer, you just feel so comfortable here”. (CBS: 2006) The drinks menu today focuses on the same coffee-based beverages as in the U. S. with tea playing only a minor role. Next to the hot coffee and tea, Starbucks also offers cold drinks. Furthermore it added sweet food, fruits, vegetable cups and sandwiches to its product mix.

Starbucks stores started to sell green-tea cheesecake and Chinese moon cakes. The latter is a special pastry served during the Mid-Autumn Festival. 3. 2 Price Thanks to the enormous economic growth in China during the last ten years, the average income of the Chinese population has increased a lot. The middle class became bigger and the overall purchasing power grew. The Chinese population is more and more able to spend money on luxurious products. Although statistics show us that the purchase of luxurious products has increased during the last decade, the Chinese population still remains very price sensitive. When those new trends are considered and related to the market position of Starbucks, two basic rules become clear.

Firstly, because of the overall increase in purchasing power, coffee shops like Starbucks have a potential clientele in the Chinese market. Secondly, because of the fact that the most consumers remains very sensitive to the price and because the overall purchase power remains low compared to Europe and the US, there has to be diversity in the price of the products. For this reason, Starbucks has added cheaper products in their retail shops like small pastries for people who can not afford the more expensive drinks. (Reuters: 2006) 3. 3 People Starbucks is targeting the young Chinese generation which prefer high-status brands. China’s one-child rule created a generation who has been spoiled a little bit by their parents. This generation has more many to spend compared to older generations and like to show off their better social status. Whereas the older generation is very careful to spend money, the new generations has a different view of the world and spend more money on leisure, personal healthcare and food. In recent years there is a tendency towards more individualism among this young generation.

Starbucks embraces this tendency by offering customized products and service. For instance the Macchiatto (coffee with a lot of milk), the White Chocolate Mocha and the Frappuchino (ice coffee). The client decides himself how many coffee shots he would like to get. (Chinese Business Monitor: 2003) 3. 4 Place In the beginning Mr. Wang, the CEO of Starbucks in China, overhauled the company’s growth strategy to focus more on adding stores in China’s metropolises instead of entering lots of new cities. First Beijing and Shanghai were targeted as the cities in mainland China, later also Hong Kong. As the expansion was successful, Starbucks moved to smaller cities in mainland China and tried to expand over the whole country (Adamy: 2006) 3. 5 Promotion Promotion is one of the key points of Starbucks business. Because of the tough competition it becomes more and more important and reaches the almost the same level of importance then the product itself. Starbucks has to make the consumer aware of its product and establish a good image. In order to do this the company sponsors a lot of events (sports, charity, ect. ). Last year it donated $ 1. 5 million to train schoolteachers in China from the poor west and to provide books, computers and school equipment (Mcdonald: 2006). To familiarize Chinese people with Starbucks coffee, the company pours customers a one-ounce sample and invites them to join the shop for a tasting. Sometimes the promotion includes a free drip coffee and a brownie. In this way the Chinese population starts to become aware with the products and the tastes. 3. Competitors Starbucks shops try to create a relaxing environment by putting big lounge sofas in the shop.

This formula attracts especially young people but it has been copied by a lot of competitors like Subway and Chinese retailers of food services. Recently, Starbucks has competition from a new generation of Chinese teahouses — some of which offer both traditional beverages and a social, laid-back coffeehouse culture.

Chinese competitors of Starbucks like the typical Chinese teahouses or the Taiwan-based Barista Coffee consider the coffee focus a weakness given traditional Chinese tastes like explained in the introduction. They will enjoy tea more than coffee,” says Garvin Lau, a general manager for Real Brewed Tea. Launched in Hong Kong, the chain of teahouses considers itself to be “the Starbucks of tea,” It has carefully studied the Seattle chain. Real Brewed Tea’s locations have high ceilings, bright green chairs in style of the interior of the stylish Starbucks shop. (Chinese Business Monitor: 2003) Real Brewed Tea stores sell basic tea drinks for a price slightly less than what Starbucks charges (Adamy: 2006). The consumption price is a very influencing factor in the Chinese market. For an average Chinese citizen, 12 RMB is too much for a cup of coffee especially when we bear in mind that consumers get green tea for free in many Chinese restaurants. The consumption price is definitely one of the main marketing strategies were competitors can compete to each other in order to gain market share. As the price sensitivity is high among Chinese consumer, Beverage Company may prefer to lower their prices instead of spending a lot of money on promotion and advertising budgets. A new trend in coffee shops is the offer of free and wireless Internet to their customers. With this strategy the shops try to keep their clients as long as possible in the hope they will consume a lot of drinks.

Moreover the coffee and tea shops also want to create a meeting point for students and business people. Starbucks had to deal with copycat as well during the last years. In Shanghai they won a trial against the company ‘Xingbake’ which means star and bake pronounced ‘bah kuh’ so it sounds like ‘bucks’. Copycat is a common problem in China but the president of Starbucks says that he is confident that there will be less and less problems with copycat in the future. (Mcdonald: 2006). 4. Conclusion Starbucks worldwide growth is driven by the expansion of the company in China. China offers a lot of opportunities but in order to be successful one need to take a lot of facts into consideration. The Chinese market differs from the European and American market in many ways. First there is a huge diversity in preference between Chinese and Western markets.

Furthermore the Chinese market itself is not homogeneous at all. The geographical differences are significant like the cultural diversity between Shanghai and Beijing. Moreover within one city or region, there is a considerably high income gap between employees. As a result Starbucks should not only offer different products dependent on the region but also offer a wide price range of products in their shops. The company should adapt their products to the Chinese preference or should try to change the Chinese preferences in their benefit by active ways of advertising.

There is not much profit details published about the success of Starbucks in China. The company cites its expansion in Japan as proof it can carve out a market in a tea-drinking country — even though the chain has struggled to raise sales there. Starbucks says China stores have lower sales than U. S. stores. That’s offset by cheaper labor and other lower operating costs. One of the main hurdles of doing business in China is definitely the tightly and stricter regulations, the lack of unity in the government’s policy and the currency-conversion. Furthermore the company has to deal with a different culture, different thinking and a different way of doing business.

Cross cultural management training and expertise is needed and the right ‘Guanxi’ in order to succeed in China. Exhibit I The logo revolution pic] The original logo [pic] In the second version [pic] In the current version Exhibit II Starbucks’ expansion in Japan and China 1995 Starbucks enters to Japan – SAZABY Inc – The third largest coffee consuming country in the world, behind the U. S. and Germany. 1998 Starbucks enters to China with its first store in Taipei, Taiwan -President Enterprise Corp. 1999 Starbucks opens its first store in Beijing (1st Starbucks store in mainland China) -Mei Da Coffee Co. Ltd. 2000 Starbucks enter to Shanghai market -President (Coffee) Cayman Holdings, Ltd Questions What marketing strategies the company adopted in China? Please underline the pro & cons of the company marketing strategies.

What suggestions and comments would you give to the relative company? What do you learn from this case? CASE 2: The expansion of McDonald’s in China Introduction The Chinese market is a great opportunity for foreign companies. With a population of 1. 3 billion people, the Chinese market is world’s largest consumer market. But foreign companies need to be careful, for example the governmental procedures for foreign investors to make investments in China, is extremely complicated. Therefore, it is important to be familiar of the investment procedures before carrying out business in China. The Chinese fast food market has been booming the last decade because of fast changing lifestyles and eating habits.

The reason for this evolution is that Chinese consumers have accepted the Western-style fast food restaurants as a way of life in China. As a result, the popular American food has become a huge success story, creating a growing market for U. S. frozen potatoes. This report makes a comprehensive analysis of one of the key players in the Chinese fast food market, namely McDonald’s. : History of McDonald’s China McDonald’s is the leading global foodservice retailer with more than 31,000 local restaurants serving more than 52 million people in more than 119 countries and regions each day. McDonald’s opened its first Chinese restaurant in Shenzhen in 1990. In the following decade McDonald’s China achieved a steady growth, opening over 400 restaurants in China and serving more than 1. 5 million customers every day. With such a fast expansion of business, McDonald’s China had to take care with a rapidly increasing volume of transactions every day. Over the years, the main priorities of McDonald’s China were providing outstanding quality, service, cleanliness and value. Today there are more than 1,000 McDonald’s restaurants in China, 200 more in Hong Kong, and more than 50,000 McDonald’s staff. (Beijing 2008, 2007) To manage a business across such a large country, McDonald’s China has gradually set up offices in Shenzhen, Guangzhou, Shanghai, Beijing, Tianjin, Fuzhou, Nanjing and Dalian. During Olympic 2009, McDonald’s opened four stores in Beijing Olympic area. Also it launched a new advertisement with logo “I really like it, China wins. ” which involving restaurant employees and customers throughout China. In 2010 McDonald’s is planning to open 175 franchise, 500 stores in the next three year. An important remark is that McDonald’s is the world’s leading fast food restaurant, but as the figure shows, the main fast food giant in China is Yum! Brands Inc. This is the parent of fast food chains Kentucky Fried Chicken, Pizza Hut and Taco Bell. [pic] Source: National Bureau of statistics 2: McDonald’s expansion strategy: The success of franchising McDonald’s is stepping up its China expansion efforts through franchising.

The expansion strategy has played a major role in the company’s growth in many other markets. It became applicable in China after the change in franchise regulations by the Ministry of Commerce as part of commitments to the World Trade Organization. Since it opened its first outlet in China in 1990, McDonald’s has been expanding in the country, mainly through joint ventures with various local partners. In contrast, about 70 per cent of its outlets worldwide were franchised. (Yiang Yan, 2005) In 2005 McDonald’s launched its franchise strategy in China, because the legal environment for franchising has been greatly improved in China. For opening a franchise restaurant in China the following necessities are required. First you need to have 300,000$ to invest, secondly you need three years of operating experience in the catering sector and last but not least a specific training is required. McDonald’s has established staff training centers in Beijing, Guangzhou and Shanghai. (Liu Jie, 2004) Such a model reduces the business expansion costs of McDonald’s but also creates more jobs for local people. Other advantages of franchising is that McDonald’s can reach more customers by opening more outlets and can gain more market share from its competitors like Kentucky Fried Chicken. In the past this strategy wouldn’t be very effective because they were not a lot of educated people in China.

Now China has a bigger range of people with business experience who can manage the restaurants. One of the problems is that this strategy can have a higher rate of defaults in China than in more affluent markets, because McDonald’s lends money to franchisees to help them set up restaurants. Le-Min Lim, Bernard Lo, 2004) 3: Marketing Strategies To position a product in a country, a good marketing strategy is needed. McDonald’s success in China is based on a five-point strategy focused on product, price, people, promotion and place. A new trend is the introduction of the sixth P, namely profit. McDonalds also tries to improve the profitability in China. (Edward B. Colby, 2006) 3. 1 Product McDonald’s product strategy consists of three categories. First they try to reflect the tastes and customs of the local markets by offering different kind of menus. Examples: Happy Meal options in China now include a cheese and egg sandwich on a steamed bun, yoghurt, and milk. (McDonald’s Corporation a, 2007) The Chicken McNuggets in China come with the traditional BBQ, Sweet & Sour, and Honey Mustard sauces, but there’s also a Chili Garlic Sauce, which is very popular in China. (Answers. com a, 2007) In 2001 McDonald’s Vegetable and Seafood Soup and Corn Soup were introduced. In 2006 McDonald’s introduced the Mega Mac: a Big Mac with four beef patties, and a Quarter Pounder. The McPepper currently being promoted is a black-pepper-sauce-seasoned double-patty burger. (Cheryl V. Jackson, 2006) Secondly McDonalds tries to provide information about their products. In cooperation with their global nutrition team, their local business units develop and implement nutrition information, which can be found on the packaging of the products.

The packaging provides information on key nutritional values in a simple and clear format, so that customers around the world can use the information to make menu choices that suit their preferences. Also other communication tools are used, such as advertising both on television as on the World Wide Web to give information about the quality of their food products. McDonald’s Corporation b, 2007) Thirdly McDonald’s promotes physical activity, for example their sponsorship of the Olympic Games. McDonald’s history with the Olympic Movement dates back to 1968. As the Worldwide Olympic Partner and the Official Restaurant of the Olympic Games, McDonalds has served millions of athletes.

With the sponsoring of the Beijing Olympic Games in 2008 McDonald’s wants to continue to promote an Active Balanced Lifestyle and Olympic Spirit among Kids, Families and Adults of all ages. (Beijing 2008, 2007) 3. 2 Price The conventional wisdom about China is that most consumers are highly sensitive to price. As a result, a decrease in burger prices is likely to be more effective than a big marketing campaign. To convince Chinese consumers coming to McDonald’s, McDonald’s lowered prices for its basic menu consisting of a hamburger, fries and drink from 12. 50 Yuan to 10 Yuan. (Scott Hume, 2007) Across China there are a lot of differences in purchasing power. Therefore McDonald’s China is also exploring menu pricing by taking into account both market and restaurant. (James A. Skinner, 2006) 3. 3 People McDonald’s provides employment and growth opportunities for a lot of people, more than 1. 5 million worldwide. Entering the Chinese market they can give many people the opportunity to operate in their restaurants. They focus also on training and development, which is necessary to learn the required skills, to do their jobs well. McDonald’s has its own learning academy, namely the Hamburger University (HU), where a leadership development program is established based on Western management practices. (McDonald’s Corporation c, 2007) 3. 4 Promotion Promotion is very important to make the consumer aware of your product. The most important part of promotion is branding.

Building a good image in a country is one of the most key points a company has to do. McDonalds is trying to establish a good image by sponsoring sports, educational or charity events. An important thing to keep in mind is that sponsorship requires cost and reputation and is therefore not suitable for every company, but McDonalds has this possibility. Building a good image consists not only of sponsorship. A major part of the promotion budget goes to advertising. Nowadays the value of an advertisement depends not only from its creative element. A good ad promotes sales and builds the brand image. In China, creativity is way down on the list of ad-making priorities. The ad industry fluctuates according to the state of the economy. Through the dynamic economic development, it has caused chaos.

China’s advertising industry has developed and redeveloped in line with reforms to a noncompetitive planned economy. The great diversity of consumers tastes causes trouble for advertising firms who must work out, how to hold the attention of a wide scope of consumers with different standards of living long enough to communicate new brand ideas. In the following some campaigns of McDonalds will be made clear. (China Today 2007) International fast food giant McDonald’s has launched a new “Bag Breakfast” for Chinese consumers. McDonald’s organized a survey, which founded that through the growth of China’s urbanization a lot of people eat only a very simple breakfast. Some of them even don’t eat breakfast, which is harmful to their health. With this campaign McDonalds is trying to promote the concept of eating a healthy breakfast. (China Retail News, 2007) Another promotional campaign consists of trying to introduce beef on the Chinese market. With messages, such as beef is luxurious, healthy and sexy, McDonalds is trying to convince the Chinese consumers to eat more beef hamburgers, like the Quarter Pounder.

One billboard ad features a close-up of women’s lips. The campaign, which supports the introduction of the Quarter Pounder in China, is part of a change in strategy. The company recently started focusing less on selling menu. They want to convince the consumer to eat more beef hamburgers to higher the profit margins. (Gordon Fairclough, 2007) The “I’m Lovin’ It” campaign of McDonald’s is an important milestone in the history of McDonalds. The new ads of this campaign have all vital elements of Chinese spirit, music and taste. This global campaign has increased sales of McDonald’s all over the world, especially in China.

Another evolution in advertising is the broadening of the focus group. Not only teenagers are taken into account but also mothers. In May McDonalds launched a Mom’s Club program, where more than 10,000 women have signed up for in order to access in-restaurant activities such as story-telling, arts and crafts, exercise instruction and games. (Cheryl V. Jackson, 2006) Another campaign, which proves McDonalds is adapting his business to the Chinese culture, is the following.

During the 2004 Spring Festival, McDonald’s on Beijing’s Wangfujing Street attracted many people with a traditional Chinese look, decorating their interiors with paper-cuts of the Chinese character Fu (Happiness), magpies and twin fishes, all typical symbols. To encourage Chinese consumers to visit McDonald’s and understand what it is all about, the chain offered an Open Door event last year. Consumers had the possibility to see the kitchen and ask questions about menu, quality, preparation etc. hich has been extended to an every-day policy. 3. 5 Place There are two important evolutions concerning this subject. First evolution is to open McDonald’s China 24 hours a day. Presently, more than 400 restaurants of the 800 restaurants in China have provided services for 24 hours a day. In Beijing 40% of the company’s stores open their business for 24 hours. In Shanghai 50% and in Guangzhou 60% have a 24-hour service.

The major reason for opening 24-hour restaurants is to meet the demand by the customers, because more and more customers need the services at night because of their changing living habits. In Beijing customers actually weren’t eager for the night service due to the relatively cold weather there at night. This is different from the customers in the warmer southern China. (Answers. com b) A second important evolution is the establishment of drive-throughs in China, because car ownership continues to grow. In 2006 McDonald’s signed a deal with the Chinese largest gas retailer, namely Sinopec. The strategic alliance with Sinopec gives McDonald’s the opportunity to further expand their business. 3. 6 Profit Jeffrey Schwartz, CEO for McDonald’s China, says he has added a sixth “P,” for profit, to the China Plan to Win. We’re instituting the idea that we’re also about making money,” he says. China’s middle class is rapidly growing, but consumers remain very price sensitive. The goal is to pull Chinese consumers up to higher-price, higher-margin Smart Choice menu combos such as a Big Mac, fries and drink for 16 Yuan and ultimately to items such as the recently introduced Quarter Pounder which costs 18. 50 Yuan. (Scott Hume, 2006) As a conclusion of the marketing strategies, it is obvious that McDonalds is doing a lot of efforts to improve his position in China and to improve his image under the Chinese people. : Evolutions of Unions One of the latest labor developments in China consists of forming unions in multinational corporations.

Unions exist already a long time in China but they have been traditionally weak. For instance, it wasn’t possible to challenge management or to bargain for higher pay. Unions have been used especially for coordinating employee activities. Recently Union leaders are fighting for the rights of workers.

The All China Federation of Trade Unions wants to have unions active in 70 percent of the foreign-invested companies operating in China by the end of this year. This evolution is also affecting McDonald’s. McDonald’s has already unionized some of its outlets in China. Since November of last year McDonald’s is making progress in setting up a union branch by productive discussions with the Guangzhou city union officials. The effort of McDonald’s to establish a union branch is also a consequence of a recent report of the company, which highlighted some violations of the law. The main topics were that they pay employees less than the minimum wage and that they deny their employees some benefits. David Barboza, 2007) The All-China Federation of Trade Unions said that McDonald’s paid part-time workers less than the legal wages in southern Guangdong province.

China’s New Express newspaper reported that McDonald’s was paying its part-timers, mostly college students, 4 Yuan an hour in Guangzhou. This is only half of the city’s minimum hourly wage of 7. 5 Yuan. (Josh Fineman and Samuel Shen, 2007 ). Conclusion China has great opportunity for a lot of companies to do business, but you have to take into account several things. The most important is “Guanxi”. Regardless of business experiences in a company’s home country, in China the right “Guanxi” makes all the difference in ensuring that business will be successful. In the case of McDonald’s the strategic alliance with Sinopec made a great difference.

Also a lot of other things need to be taken into account for example building a good image, adapting product to the tastes of consumers and obeying the laws of the country. McDonald’s had some problems with the last example but they are on their way to solve it. So a good advice for foreign companies to come to China is: “To succeed in China requires local knowledge and local players, but the key is local representation. ” Questions What marketing strategies the company adopted in China? Please underline the pro & cons of the company marketing strategies. What suggestions and comments would you give to the relative company? What do you learn from this case? CASE 3: A Case Study of KFC and other Fast food Chains Introduction: China has been undergoing a lot of changes in recent years. The opening of the market has led to a lot of influences from abroad. The lifestyle of the Chinese is also changing; Chinese people are starting to lead more western style lives, especially in the big cities. The introduction of fast-food restaurants in China was a risky venture, and not all firms were successful. In this case study an analysis will be done of the most successful fast-food chain in China: KFC. This paper will start with theoretical aspects of market entry, and market strategies, followed by an application to the KFC case and then an analysis of other market players and new entrants. Also an analysis will be provided of the Chinese market and its opportunities and threats and finally a conclusion will be given what should be done for a successful market entry into the Chinese fast-food market.

Strategy Theory: Modes of Entry There are various forms of market entry, all with varying degrees of commitment and different drawbacks and benefits. The different modes will be listed from least amount of resources committed to the most expansive mode of market entry. Of course some modes are not applicable for fast food chains such as exporting, licensing and contract manufacturing. The ones described are the only ones that are applicable for fast-food restaurants. Franchising Strictly speaking franchising is a specific form of licensing in which the franchiser grants the franchisee the right to do business in a prescribed manner. In this vertical cooperation the franchiser makes a whole marketing program available to the franchisee. This program includes brand name, products, symbols, merchandise, method of operation and overall expertise. The franchisee runs his own business but has close links to the franchiser spreading the risk for both. The franchise system combines the advantages of economies of scale offered by the franchiser and the local knowledge, entrepreneurial talents and the motivation to run an independent business of the franchisee providing growth for both (Hollensen 2001). As in a licensing agreement the franchiser receives fees, running royalties, and other compensation from the franchisee for letting the franchisee use his concepts.

However franchising is somewhat an umbrella term that can mean anything from the right to use a name to the total business concept. In the case of fast-food restaurants it is of course a total business concept. Joint ventures A joint venture is a form of strategic alliance in which two or more companies form a partnership and found or buy a third company together. In this new co-owned enterprise the owners share ownership, control, losses and profit. The partners can come from different countries and can even be operating in different businesses. Reasons for such joint ventures are various and include the following (Hollensen 2001): Complementary skills, know-how and technologies of the partners lead to new opportunities in existing sectors improving the situation for both companies. One partner is located in the host country and the other is hoping to increase the speed of market entry through cooperating. Foreign ownership is restricted in some less developed countries and makes local co-owners a necessity.

Global operations are expensive but necessary in some businesses to achieve competitive advantage. To diversify the portfolio of investments, the joint venture asks for substantial financial and managerial commitment in the foreign market. It is a form of direct investment in which the risk is shared with a partner. The difference to a licensing agreement is that the international company owns equity shares in the joint venture company and therefore has a voice in the firm. (Hollensen 2001) Joint ventures are also seen as the extension of the idea of licensing Joint ventures can be formed in nearly all stages of the product value chain. The important thing about forming a joint venture is examining the future partner and setting goals for the joint venture. Of course before partners can be selected a cost and benefit analysis has to be made to find out whether the strategy of a joint venture is the best solution for market entry. After partners have agreed on forming a joint venture business plans have to be made for the new enterprise. Then when everything is put into a contract the new company can start to operate but will be closely watched by its parent companies (Hollensen 2001) The real difficulty about a joint venture is managing it when it is already set up. Most difficulties arise due to different bargaining power and goals of the parent companies. This power generally shifts between the partners and it requires understanding and good relations between the parent companies to have a long lasting joint venture.

Most conflicts come up due to the following motives according to Hollensen (2001): Diverging goals and interests of the involved parties. Managerial independence of the joint venture cannot be achieved and one partner always has more influence on decisions concerning the joint venture than the other one.

One partner has the feeling that he gives more input than the other one and does not receive the deserved reward. Trust in the joint venture has not developed and it is regarded better to pull out before the fear is proven true. In case such a motive becomes too strong and the joint venture is actually terminated it is of course important to fix an exit strategy before the joint venture is set up in first place. This prevents legal struggles in the worst case. Acquisition or Greenfield investment A company wanting to choose either of the hierarchical entry modes presented in this chapter has the possibility to acquire an existing company or to set up new operations. The acquisition strategy enables the company to enter a market faster since it enters the market with existing products and market segments using in most cases established brand names and corporate reputations Through acquisition a company also gains access to existing distribution channels and can take advantage of the trained workforce and the management’s knowledge of the market environment The acquisition strategy does not only have advantages as described in the previous paragraph. The difference in management styles and corporate culture may lead to problems that can only be solved through hard work and coordination between the parent company and its new subsidiary (Hollensen 2001). Therefore selection has to be made carefully and acquisition candidates have to be monitored for some time in order to successfully enter a market through take over. A company has to be aware of the problems that might occur and come to an objective evaluation of the candidate An investment in a completely new facility offers the company the possibility to build verything according to its expectations, image and requirements. This is not only meant with regard to technology but especially concerning management practices and corporate culture.

Also newest technologies guarantee up to date production. (Hollensen 2001) Motives for market entry In the case of KFC for China this is very clear, China is the largest new opening market of the world. With a population of over one billion it has a huge sales potential. However in the past China was a closed country and Chinese people had no disposable income. However through the economic growth and the economic reforms and trade liberalization China is becoming westernized and people have more disposable income. The lifestyles are changing into a new lifestyle where KFC and other fastfood chains fit in. Finally China is a chicken eating country. Chinese have always used a lot of chicken in their cuisine and love chicken based meals. (Hollensen 2001) Market entry barriers Basically bureaucracy was and is one of the main issues for market entry into China.

Getting licenses and government cooperation are painstakingly slow processes till the right approvals are given out. Operations in China started in 1987 and even though bureaucracy is not as bad as it used to be it is still very high compared to western standards. The next market problem is the amount of people that have enough disposable income to visit fast-food chains. Food cooked at home or in Chinese restaurants can be a lot cheaper compared to a fast-food meal. People need to have the income levels high enough and be willing to spend it at KFC for the price premium.

The final big issue is the fact that intellectual property rights are not enforceable. For a fast food chain one would expect this not to be a problem. However in China copied fast-food chains have appeared such as QQ (McDonald’s clone) and KFG Market entry timing KFC was the first fast-food chain to enter into China in 1987 and this brought them some strong first mover. Being seen as the first western symbol in China there were long lines of at the first KFC who all wanted to try western food. It took them 9 years to open the first 100 stores, because of the start-up problems such as the right quanxi connections, the right contracts and agreements and licenses. The pace has been speeding up and it took KFC just 11 months to go from 400 to 500 KFC stores in China. There are more than 14,000 KFC restaurants in more than 80 countries in the world. Everyday about 12 million customers visited KFC. As of the 4th quarter of 2006 there are now 1600 KFC restaurants in mainland China (Yum! Brands. com). At the end of 2007, there are more than 146,000 employees worked for KFC in China.

Market segmentation The big question is of course who will eat at KFC or any other fast-food chain since fast-food clashes with traditional Chinese dining culture. Well the first thing to recognize is a change in culture and lifestyle towards westernization. In major cities many Chinese people lead very western lifestyles. After some demographic research it was concluded that in the top 20 cities of China 63% of the Chinese people visit fast-food restaurants, 28% visits KFC frequently, and 18% goes to McDonald’s frequently.

The majority of this public naturally consists of young people so they should be targeted for marketing. (Woods, 2005) Market Development of fast food industry China’s nearly two-decade high economic growth, its open-up and the improvement of the people’s lifestyles and the changing of rhythm of daily life have driven the rapidly rising demand for consumption of fast food and it has become one of the most important parts of the food and beverage industry in China. Since 1991, the country’s consumption of fast food has grown 23. 2% annually. By the end of 1996, there are about 800 professional fast food enterprises all over the country, with more than 4000 chain operation enterprises, and nearly 400 thousand fast food restaurants. The revenues of fast food reached 135,200. 0 million Yuan (16,368. 0 million US dollars) in 2001. Along with the improvement in overall living standards, not only in more developed regions, but also in less developed and low-income areas the total revenues of fast food is expected to increase 26. 1% annually to 431,597. 4 million Yuan (52,251. 5 million US dollars) by the year 2006 and it will advance to 1,322,487. 3 million Yuan (160,107. 4 million US dollars) by the end of 2011, increasing by 25. 1% per annum. Wood, 2005) Development of fast food industry in China is not the same between the more sophisticated regions as such Beijing, Shanghai and coast line cities and relatively less-developed regions in the central and the west. The more sophisticated regions, with an enhanced economy, catch much more attention from fast food investors than the less-developed regions.

Especially Shanghai, the economic and financial centre of China, is regarded as the most important city for fast food industry. Shanghai history has provided it with ample opportunity to adapt itself to the western world. Wu, 2002). Fast food is highly demanded by Chinese consumers because of their busy city life style and particularly white-collars working in offices enjoy KFC chicken, hamburger, pizza or other fast food. Along with fast economic growth in china, the popular American fast food such as KFC and McDonald’s has become a huge success story. Two major competitors, KFC and McDonald’s Fast-food restaurants with strong brand name images, such as McDonalds and Kentucky Fried Chicken, are more popular than Chinese-style fast-foods because they are known for quality control and good store management. KFC and McDonald’s are also known as the most active and prominent fast food companies in China. In spite of the competition between the two companies, they have been occupying the largest market share and enjoying great profits in China (Kentucky reached US$241 million in sales in 2000, ranking on top of the China fast food list). Kentucky Fried Chicken (KFC) Kentucky, a member of Yum! Brands inc. , was the first foreign fast food company to open up shop in China. It opened their first outlet in Beijing on November 12 1987 as a joint venture – a full 5 full years ahead of McDonald’s entry into China. Subsequently it opened a wholly-owned outlet in Shanghai in 1989. Since opening its first mainland outlet in Beijing, the fried-chicken chain has gone on to become the most recognized global brand among urban consumers in China. Kentucky Fried Chicken had more than 510 outlets in China as of October 2001 compared to less than 400 outlets for McDonalds. (Wattanavitukul, 2002) What’s more important is that market surveys by AC Nielson consistently confirm Chinese consumers’ general preference for KFC outlets and products over McDonalds’. One of the main reasons behind this is that chicken is already familiar in China and much cheaper and more widely available than beef.

Furthermore Chicken has long been regarded as a kind of nutritious food which is especially good for the patients, the elders and children. Therefore more health conscious consumers prefer the consumption of chicken over beef. It took Kentucky 9 years ( till 1996 ) to set up 100 KFC chain restaurants in China, while it only took 11 months for KFC to increase the number from 400 to 500 restaurants in the country in 1997. Now, KFC has presence in almost all major cities in China, and in some smaller cities too. Wu, 2002) In November, 2007, KFC opened a restaurant in Chengdu until then it had 2000 stores in China. In 2009, KFC has around 2728 restaurants in China. It is said that ‘KFC would continue to aggressively to open new restaurants in China with a goal of opening about 600 restaurants over the next three years. ’(Annual Report, 2009) The entry strategies of KFC The China expansion of KFC plans first came-up in the early 1980’s after several successful expansions in the South East Asian region including Japan. International fast food companies have different market entry strategy options when they decide to expand overseas. They are strategies such as franchising/licensing, wholly owned subsidiary and joint venture. However franchising strategy, which emphasizes standardization and reduces financial risk, on the expense of cultural sensitivity and control was not feasible in case of China due to the country’s strict foreign investment laws.

Furthermore wholly owned subsidiary which relies upon total control over competitive advantages and ensures complete operational and strategic control is not compulsory either with high levels of resource commitment and little country-level flexibility and responsiveness. In case of KFC’s market entry in China a joint venture strategy is used, as a joint venture can solve many logistic problems such as access to good quality chicken and other supplies, ease the access to the Chinese market, where the local knowledge of culture, language and geography is beneficial for any foreign entrant into a relatively unknown market. In addition, due to the complexity of many barriers to entry into China, a potential joint venture partner with sufficient contacts (guanxi) with government agency officials make the process of setting-up operations in the nation more easily. Typically a new entrant would find it very difficulty to form local and personal networks between businesses and government agencies, which are crucial to success and

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Case of Doing Business China. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

What is the Scope of Electrical and Electronics Engineering

www. outlookindia. com | https://www. outlookindia. com/articlefullwidth. aspx? 237765 WEB MAGAZINE SECTIONS INTERACTIVE FEATURES REGULARS RESOURCES RSS Business MAGAZINE | JUN 30, 2008 Top 35 Private Engineering Colleges Rank Name of Institute City IC II I PP PS GT IC: Intellectual capital (600), II: Industry Interface (300), I: Infrastructure (650), PP: Placement Performance (400), PS: Pedagogic System (200), GT: Grand Total (2150) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 BITS IIIT (Please see Clarification) PSG College of Technology BIT, Mesra Thapar University VIT University Manipal Inst. f Technology Dhirubhai Ambani Inst. of Information & Comm. Tech. RV College of Engineering SSN College of Engineering SASTRA PES Inst. of Technology Amity School of Engg & Tech. Sir M. Visvesvaraya Inst. of Technology (Please see Clarification) Karunya University Nirma Univ. of Science & Technology BIT, Sindri(Pl See Clarification) Mepco Schlenk Engineering College Inst. of Technology & Management KIIT University ICFAI Institute of Science & Technology Kongu Engineering College Amrita School of Engineering MS Ramaiah Institute of Technology Bangalore Inst. of Tech. Velagapudi Ramakrishna Siddhartha Engg College GITAM Inst. of Technology Hindustan College of Engineering Sona College of Technology Babu Banarasi Das National Inst. of Tech. & Mgmt Chaitanya Bharathi Institute of Technology Sreenidhi Inst. of Science & Technology BMS Inst. of Technology Yeshwantrao Chavan College of Engineering Shri Ramdeo Baba KN Engg College Galgotia's College of Engineering & Technology Vishwakarma Institute of Technology Pilani Hyderabad Coimbatore Ranchi Patiala Vellore Manipal Gandhinagar Bangalore Chennai Thanjavur Bangalore Noida Bangalore 64 239 253 256 269 264 214 208 247 221 258 233 179 193 191 150 158 68 73 67 74 76 83 62 64 65 64 54 435. 8 433. 2 412. 9 435. 7 452. 9 400. 5 388. 9 328. 8 315. 4 362. 2 373 323 387 334. 1 302. 2 286. 7 257. 5 257. 2 231. 3 178. 8 219. 9 250. 2 230. 3 221. 7 178. 3 216. 4 217 234. 6 171 130 120 170 120 135 124 148 120 122 108 130 116 120 1464 1239 1201 1187 1146 1045 1020 1011 995 989 981 967 963 936 14 15 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Coimbatore Ahmedabad Dhanbad Sivakasi Gurgaon Bhubaneshwar Hyderabad Erode Coimbatore Bangalore Bangalore Vijayawada Visakhapatnam Kancheepuram Salem Lucknow Hyderabad Hyderabad Bangalore Nagpur Nagpur Noida Pune 200 181 169 214 215 191 178 228 195 239 193 210 190 191 237 142 177 193 166 178 197 178 198 50 66 54 56 63 51 76 68 51 49 73 56 52 55 49 52 54 57 56 57 44 48 54 376. 1 345. 5 361. 3 348. 4 303. 3 344. 7 324. 9 344 367. 4 312 321. 1 326. 9 352. 1 354. 4 335. 5 344 317. 5 296. 4 292. 5 359. 7 313 336. 1 269. 4 192. 2 211. 8 242. 9 189. 9 215. 7 228. 2 214. 2 179. 3 212. 1 214 178. 6 188. 9 189. 6 180 170. 5 232. 7 210. 1 195. 4 215. 3 159. 1 187. 4 174. 9 201. 9 112 125 100 118 128 108 128 102 88 99 135 118 106 96 84 104 106 118 122 96 104 102 114 30 929 928 926 925 923 922 921 914 913 901 900 890 877 876 874 864 860 852 850 845 840 837 Some private engineering colleges, ranked in the Top 35 in 2007, did not respond to the Outlook-Synovate survey this year. These include VJTI, Mumbai; The Sardar Patel College of Engineering, Mumbai; SJ College of Engineering, Mysore; Sathyabhama Engineering College, Chennai; National Institute of Engineering, Mysore and the Jaypee University of Information Technology, Solan PS: As per Clarification in issue dated July 7, 2008, keeping in view the misleading advertisement -- and past conduct of misleading advertisements -- by Amity of 7 6/7/2010 2:49 PM www. outlookindia. com | https://www. outlookindia. com/articlefullwidth. aspx? 237765 School of Engineering & Technology, their ranking has been withdrawn with immediate effect. Post Script 2: The above list has been revised as per the Clarification in Outlook Print Issue dated 14 July, 2008, Page No 2: Clarification Our research agency Synovate informs us that it has wrongly classified and ranked some colleges in Outlooks listing of top professional colleges. IIIT Hyderabad is a private engineering college (revised rank: 2), Sir M. Visveswaraya Institute of Technology, Bangalore, is a private engineering college (revised rank: 12) and BIT, Sindri, is a government engineering college (revised rank: 28) (last edited July 3, 2008 -- SD) ALSO IN THIS STORY ESSAY The Rank The File, And A Whole New Chapter Indian students never had it so good. Outlook-Synovate map the nation's best campuses. Sunit Arora Top 35 Govt Engineering Colleges Top 15 Medical Colleges Top 15 Fashion Technology Institutes Top 15 In Hotel Management Top 15 Law Colleges Top 10 In Healthcare Management Placements Engineering Infrastructure Methodology MORE IN: BUSINESS DAILY MAIL COLLAPSE COMMENTS : AUG 08, 2008 12:00 AM HAVE YOUR SAY 38 Could i please get contact details of the firm which did this survey? I think there is one college in the list(TOP 10) which really doesn't deserve to be there. That college will register anyone who has political influence and money and moreover also help you get a USA visa for a fee.... Well, there's a lot more to it... Let me know if someone is interested in the details... ANONY GGG NOWHERE, INDIA JUL 21, 2008 12:00 AM 37 JUL 08, 2008 12:00 AM y not SRM Institute of Science of Technology this time. its not correct KARTIKEY MEERUT, INDIA 36 JUL 05, 2008 12:00 AM ell it seems akaash u have underestimated da-iict and VIT. but SRM and MIT(maeer) has been neglected. its pretty strange actually SUDIP GUPTA SILIGURI, INDIA 35 Sir, Thanks a lot for publishing my letter in your printed issue. I still did not get answers to my questions. 1) Did MIT-Pune and BMS , Bangalore participate in the rankings,. If they have not participated then it is OK, otherwise please note that I strongly feel That MIT-Pune is in top 10 private colleges of India and BMS Bangalore in top 20. Please rely. Thanks.. AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA JUL 05, 2008 12:00 AM 34 Sir, Thanks a lot for publishing my letter in your printed issue. I still did not get answers to my questions. 1) Did MIT-Pune and BMS , Bangalore participate in the rankings,. If they have not participated then it is OK, otherwise please note that I strongly feel That MIT-Pune is in top 10 private colleges of India and BMS Bangalore in top 20. Please reply. Thanks.. AKASH MUMBAI INDIA AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA 2 of 7 6/7/2010 2:49 PM www. outlookindia. com | https://www. outlookindia. com/articlefullwidth. aspx? 237765 JUL 03, 2008 12:00 AM 33 JUL 03, 2008 12:00 AM sir, can you please confirm whether SRM university has not been able to make it to top 35 or it did not participate? Agitations have already started because of this. it has affected the admission too as bank loan also require ranking. its infrastructure is really good and has improved dractically over the last two years. response will be highly appreciated SUDIP GUPTA SILIGURI, INDIA 32 Hello Editor, Please do make change in your record that BIT-Sindri(Jharkhand) is a well known, a prestigious college and is a Govt. Engineering college. The Alumini are excellent and the college is having tremendously good and deserving candidates as students there. Any BITian can take legal action against this mistake done by you. Please do make the changes... DEEPAK KUMAR MODI BANGALORE, INDIA JUL 03, 2008 12:00 AM 31 JUL 03, 2008 12:00 AM Surprised to find BIT Sindri, the only government engineering college in the state of Jharkhand among list of top 35 private engineering college. Isn't it a blunder? Can't you correct it including scores. ASLAM M CHAKRADHARPUR, INDIA 30 How is IIIT no 2. I do not get it as its total score is less than some other colleges ranked below it. You have given all possible explanations and also corrected lot of mistakes, but tell me clearly which colleges did not participate in the rankings. I want to know if MIT-Pune and BMS Bangalore participated in the survey. MIT-Pune was ranked 13th in India last year and BMS was in the top 20. Give some explanation man, your's is a national magazine and you just cannot play with the future of students by doing a survey which does not look authentic. AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA JUL 03, 2008 12:00 AM 29 JUL 03, 2008 12:00 AM I think outlook has to be responsible and give some replies, they got everything wrong. The survey of 2007 was better. I am thinking what will happen to students if they follow this survey, everday the list is changing. AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA 28 Now for the top 10 let me think1. BITS PILLANI. 2. THAPAR, PATIALA. 3. RV COLLEGE, BANGALORE. 4. VJTI MUMBAI. 5. MIT-PUNE. 6. MANIPAL INST OF TECH, MANIPAL. 7. PSG COLLEGE OF TECH, COIMBATORE. 8. DHIRUBHAI AMBANI IICT, AHMEDABAD. 9. BMS, BANGALORE 10. VIT, Vellore AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA JUL 03, 2008 12:00 AM 27 any comments on this list please. I have tried to be reasonable and also done lot of groundwork. There are few more institutes in top 20 which are also good. The logic in this ranking is not to be biased region-wise. these rankings are based on1. academic environment 2. infrastructure/facilities/sports/ international chapters etc. . Placement and companies in which placed(eg. mnc's, global leaders, it companies etc) 4. student value+results 5. industry interface. 6. industry response and hr perception. regards, AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA JUL 02, 2008 12:00 AM 26 ashok, wht d hell u think u r?? u were d 2st person who didn't wanted anyone 2 pay much attention 2 these ranking.. now u r taking a u-turn when i also agreed u..... i think u r much stupid than me.......... PRANAV LUCKNOW, INDIA JUL 01, 2008 12:00 AM 25 i have passed 12th this year. i m looking for admssions to a good college in india. i went thru ur survey. i have found it impressive. till, i want to know how much can i depend on this survey of TOP 35 PRIVATE ENGG. COLLEGES for my choice of engg. college. i would be obliged if u reply to my query very soon since my counsillings are going to began from 4th july.. PRANAV LUCKNOW, INDIA JUL 01, 2008 12:00 AM sir, in this year's Engg. colleges' survey, you hav ranked BBDNITM, lko. at 28. its not that much good college to deserve that ranking. instead, many good colleges of noida n ghz. are missing . i cant understand. i feel u mint money 4m these inst. to 24 3 of 7 6/7/2010 2:49 PM www. outlookindia. com | https://www. outlookindia. om/articlefullwidth. aspx? 237765 rank them. am i true? do reply.. pranav lucknow PRANAV LUCKNOW, INDIA JUL 01, 2008 12:00 AM "ant to know how much can i depend on this survey of TOP 35" Let me answer and give an unsolicited advice. 10%. The best way to gauge any college is to actually speak with the current students(lot of them) and then make a decision. The ranking process of US universities is much more reliable. I used usnews rankings quite a bit to find out my university. I am not sure about the ranking methodology in India. It is in its infancy and I would not put much trust on that. It is simply a guideline. GANESAN NJ, USA 23 JUN 30, 2008 12:00 AM 22 Please note that BMS College Of Engineering, Bangalore and BMS Institute Of Technology, Bangalore are different institutions. Please note that you have not mentioned BMSCE in your rankings, but in Top 10 placements in Private Colleges you have mentioned "BMS Inst. , Bangalore" which is NOT possible. It should be "BMS College Of Engineering, Bangalore" Also, do clarify the reason of not including BMS College Of Engineering in the top 35 Private Institutes, where you have written "BMS Institute Of Technology", which is far behind "BMS College Of Engineering, Bangalore". Please rectify the same in the future. SHANTANU BANGALORE, INDIA JUN 29, 2008 12:00 AM Dear sir, For Top 35 private engineerging collegs, AICTE norms are considered or not? In which way the non approval to be considered for admission ? And can I go for admission as per the given info? Thanking you, PS Rao SRINIVASA RAO HYDERABAD, INDIA 21 JUN 29, 2008 12:00 AM 20 Sir, I went through your survey of Top Private Engineering collegs in India for the year 2008. I was quite surprised to see SRM University not occupying any of the top 35 spots. Whether SRM university didnt take part in the survey?. Last year it was ranked 19th. How come it dropped below 35 this year. Also seeing SASTRA University in rank 10 is an eye sore. SRM university is far better than SASTRA in many aspects. Do rectify the mistakes in your survey. Also reply why premier institutes like MIT-Pune and SRM university skipped out of the survey. AJANTH CHENNAI, INDIA JUN 29, 2008 12:00 AM 19 Sir, The rankings are pathetic. So many good colleges didnt participate in your survey which makes it a weak point. You just cant write off IIT madras and IIT G in their industry interface. They have tie ups with so many companies. The intellectual capital of IIT G is not so bad. You cant put it in league of colleges like SASTRA. You can see how many research proects are on there. There are so many other errors I can point out. Its too heart breaking and erronous to see BITS PILANI having engineering infrastructure lower than THAPAR,a big mistake. I am totally dissapointed to see this ranking,maybe you should change your faulty methodology or totally stop it. SOUMENDU SINHA PATNA, INDIA JUN 28, 2008 12:00 AM 18 I have done a lot of research on the engineering college rankings. My first impression on the outlook rankings is that they tried their best but missed some important colleges. Some colleges in the list makes it hard to believe that the rankings are correct. some independent views: 1)Sastra ranked 10th. It is too high a ranking. 2)Amity at 12 is surprising. 3)VIT at 5 is too much to digest. Come on now, atleast RV College is better than VIT. 4)Thapar should be no 2. 5)Top 11 to 20 list is all wrong. 6)Mepco Schlenk cannot be no 16. 7)ICFAI at 19, I almost fainted. How can you it in the top 20, have you gone mad. 8)How can you rank Chaitanya Bharati so low. 9)MS Ramaiah is much better than some of the colleges you have ranked before it. Do something please to get some reasonable rankings in future. Your list is pathetic. AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA JUN 28, 2008 12:00 AM 17 Outlook tried its best, but I believe that the data provided by the colleges are not correct. They have given false data and ruined the reputation of a magazine like outlook. My rerquest to outlook is to go to these colleges and verify the data they are sending, otherwise these rankings look pathetic and not good for a reputed magazine like outlook. regards, AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA JUN 28, 2008 12:00 AM 16 the top 15 list should be as followsnot in order of rankings please. This is my independent view 1)MS Ramaiah Bangalore, 2)BMS Bangalore, 3)BITS Pillani, of 7 6/7/2010 2:49 PM www. outlookindia. com | https://www. outlookindia. com/articlefullwidth. aspx? 237765 4)RV College Bangalore, 5)VIT vellore, 6)BIT Sindri, 7)MIT-Pune, 8)Chaitainya Bharati Hyderabad, 9)Manipal Inst of tech, Manipal, 10)Thapar Patiala, 11)Dhirubai Ambani IICT, Gandhinagar, 12)PSG College of Tech, Coimbatore 13)Sathyabhama Chennai. 14)VJTI, Mumbai. 15)Inst of Technology and Mang Gurgaon. AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA JUN 28, 2008 12:00 AM 15 Now for the top 10 let me think1. BITS PILLANI. 2. THAPAR, PATIALA. 3. RV COLLEGE, BANGALORE. 4. VJTI MUMBAI. 5. MIT-PUNE. 6. MANIPAL INST OF TECH, MANIPAL. . PSG COLLEGE OF TECH, COIMBATORE. 8. DHIRUBHAI AMBANI IICT, AHMEDABAD. 9. BMS, BANGALORE 10. SATHYABHAMA, CHENNAI AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA JUN 28, 2008 12:00 AM 14 JUN 27, 2008 12:00 AM For your info BIT sindri is a govt. institute under the government of jharkhand. please do a better and dedicated research before publishing your rankings because many people of the country follows your ranking. VIPRAV JAMSHEDPUR, INDIA VJTI, Mumbai and Sardar Patel College of Engineering, Mumbai, both are government colleges and not private institutions. SPB NEW YORK, USA 13 JUN 26, 2008 12:00 AM 12 JUN 26, 2008 12:00 AM Dear Editor, I just simply fail to understand the purpose of printing these rankings when all of the colleges did not respond to the survey. For eg. , a college you ranked say 30 would not have been even 40 if all the colleges would have responded to the survey. Also make sure that all colleges respond to your survey before publishing the rankings in the near future. ABHISHEK SHARMA MUMBAI, INDIA 11 Dear Editor, I noticed some top class private engineering colleges which were ranked within top 25 in 2007 and 2006(if govt and pvt are seperated ) did not appear in 2008 rankings. Also you did mention below some colleges which did not respond to the survey,BUT I REQUEST YOU TO PUBLISH A COMPLETE LIST OF ALL COLLEGES IN EVERY SECTION WHICH DID NOT RESPOND TO THE RANKINGS 2008 BUT WERE A PART OF TOP 30 COLLEGES in 2007 in the coming issue. ABHISHEK SHARMA MUMBAI, INDIA JUN 25, 2008 12:00 AM 10 To The Editor, OUTLOOK. Dear Sir, I wonder how could 300 professionals working in a few Cities assess the ever changing field of Engineering Education and rank the Colleges functioning across India?! Did anyone or any analyst from 'Outlook' make a visit to these Engineering Colleges ever to assess them personally? Did you take feedback from students, parents, alumni and Members of AICTE-NBA or UGC-NAAC? Without going through the strictly prepared Reports of NACC/NBA it is impossible to identify whcih college holds what tag and how? The data provided to you by the socalled Professional Colleges might not be true! People will not develop trust in Magazines unless they adopt a foolproof system while giving National Rankings to the Professional Colleges. Otherwise a few unworthy Institutions may take the baseless Rankings to their advantage and fool the Public with cheap advertisemnts! You please organise region wise Survey to take stock of the ground realities before awarding the coveted Rankings. Take the help of Local Media persons while conducting the survey. This will ensure correctness to your statistical data and veracity to your Rankings! Let me give a simple example: There are highly rated Engineering Colleges in and around Guntur and Vijayawada, Andhra Pradesh but none of them had figured in your Ranking List?! But parents and students of our region know which College is better and which is not! When people notice the fact that the names of some of the Colleges which are known for maintaining low academic standards finding place in your Rankings, there is every danger that they may fast change thier very outlook towards the 'Outlook'now and ever!! Be fair and be realistic!? Srinivas Putta, Vijayawada, A. P. SRINIVAS PUTTA VIJAYAWADA, INDIA JUN 24, 2008 12:00 AM 9 JUN 23, 2008 12:00 AM PSG, Thapar, VIT and Manipal cant be above DAIICT by any means. At least not in pedagogy, Infra and Intellectual capital. Even BIT mesra is below it.. AYUSH RAIPUR, INDIA 8 JUN 23, 2008 12:00 AM Sir, BMS college of Engineering also did not participate in this year's rankings. It is BMS Institute of Technology Bangalore, which is different from BMS college of Engineering. But your list of non-participating engineering colleges does not include BMS College of Engg, which is a great surprise to me. AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA 7 Sir, MIT-Pune was ranked No-13 in your list of private engineering colleges in India'2007. This year it does not appear in the list of non-participating institutes(institutes which did not respond to your survey). Moreover I cannot see it in the Top 35 private 5 of 7 6/7/2010 2:49 PM ww. outlookindia. com | https://www. outlookindia. com/articlefullwidth. aspx? 237765 engineering Institues of 2008. There is some mistake in the whole affair. I think MIT-Pune has not responded to your survey, otherwise one of the top ranked Institutes of the country cannot just drop below 35 from the 13th rank. Please also keep in mind that MAEER's group has three Engineering Colleges1)MIT-Pune (one of the best engineering colleges of the country). 2)MIT College of Engineering(opened in 2001)-relatively new institute. 3)Maharashtra Academy of Engineering-relatively new Institute. Is it so that ither no 2 or three has participated in the survey and you have mistaken it for MIT-Pune. Please clarify. Regards, AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA JUN 23, 2008 12:00 AM 6 Sir, MIT-Pune is one of the best engineering colleges of Maharashtra and certainly the best in Pune. I was a lot surprised to see VIT-Pune in the rankings but not MIT-Pune. MIT-Pune is much ahead of VIT-Pune,your rankings of 2007 suggest and which is 100% true. Is it because of the comment of someone last year that made you chnage the ratings or MIT-Pune did not participate in the rankings. Please clarify or I seriously doubt that any research has been done by you. AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA JUN 23, 2008 12:00 AM 5 Sir, Please make some important changes like1) MIT-Pune and BMS College of Engineering did not participate in this year's rankings. 2) Did SRM Chennai participate in this year's rankings? Please atleast give some explanantion. I am a great fan of Outlook so please give some reply. AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA JUN 23, 2008 12:00 AM 4 JUN 22, 2008 12:00 AM What is the purpose of ranking the engineering colleges if they are not correct. There are lot of errors and no one from outlook is bothering to reply to the queries. I would like to hear some answers from Outlook. AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA 3 Sir, I saw the rankings for the Private Engineering colleges of India. You have also given the name of Institutes which did not participate in this year's rankings. But surprisingly it does not contain MIT-Pune and SRM Chennai. Out of the top 20 rankings last year, I did not find MIT-Pune(ranked 13th in India, 2007)and SRM college Chennai, (ranked 19th in India, 2007). It seems you missed MIT-Pune and SRM College in the list of Engineering colleges which did not participate in the rankings. Please confirm and make the correction as soon as possible. As I am a great fan of Outlook, these errors does not look good. Atleast mention that these two institutes did not participate in the rankings. Otherwise your ranking list does not look correct. A engg college with 13th rank in India cannot just drop below 35 in a year and this is only possible if it did not participate in the rankings. Thanks and Regards, AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA JUN 22, 2008 12:00 AM Please let me know if the following institutes participated in the ranking for private engineering colleges: SDM College of Engg Dharwad Mukatam Jha Hyderabad Vasavi College of Engg Hyderabad Thanks, AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA JUN 22, 2008 12:00 AM 1 Sir, Can I have some answers to my queries. Regards, AKASH MUMBAI, INDIA COLLAPSE COMMENTS Post a Comment You are not logged in, please log in or register Comments Policy AB OUT US | CONT ACT US | SUB SCRIB E | ADVE RT IS ING RAT E S | COPY RIGHT & DIS CLAIME R | CO MME NT S P OLICY 6 of 7 6/7/2010 2:49 PM www. outlookindia. com | https://www. outlookindia. com/articlefullwidth. aspx? 237765 7 of 7 6/7/2010 2:49 PM

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

What Is the Scope of Electrical and Electronics Engineering. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Sex Education in Delhi

Attitude Towards Sex Education Amongst Adolescents in Delhi Ajanta Anindita (P09066) Eresh Sabharwal (P09080) Rahul Agrawal (P09102) Personnel Management & Industrial Relations, XLRI School of Business and Human Resources Jamshedpur, Jharkhand, India Abstract Purpose - The purpose of the study is two-fold. First, it tries to investigate the effect of attitude adolescents posses towards sex and sex education on their level of sex awareness. Also, it tries to establish whether gender is a moderator of the relationship between adolescents ? attitude and sex awareness. Design/Methodology/Approach - A questionnaire was given to the students of schools and colleges in Delhi asking their attitudes towards sex, attitude towards sex education and their level of sex awareness. The results of this questionnaire were then analyzed to validate the study. Findings - Positive correlation was found between the attitudes and the level of sex awareness. Also, partial mediation effect of the attitude towards sex education was proved. Another important finding was that the beta coefficient of attitude towards sex and sex awareness was egative in case of males but positive in case of females, showing the effect of gender as a moderator. Research Limitations/Implications - The limitations of the research were that no existing study of attitude towards sex education of adolescents was done. Also, our research was targeted only towards the urban population which can be stretched to rural population as a part of future researches. Future research can also include a higher difficulty level questionnaire testing sex awareness among adolescents. Practical Implications - Sex education is very necessary for the students in India because they eceive information from different media s whic? h is incomplete and incorrect. Originality/Value - The study is one of the first to test the attitude of adolescents towards sex education bringing out the importance of sex education in today s society.? Keywords - Sex awareness, Attitude towards sex, Sex education Paper type - Research Paper Introduction In India, adolescents receive most sex related information from media and peers. Schools have not played an active role in providing sex education to the students. It is very important for the students to know about sex and the bodily and health effects that sex causes. India has the highest number of HIV/AIDS infectants in the world. Adolescents are the most vulnerable to such sexually transmitted diseases, and more so with the lack of knowledge that they possess. Even the knowledge that the adolescents possess is incomplete and inaccurate as it is received from secondary sources. Sex awareness is affected by the attitude of adolescents towards sex and sex education. Several authors have tried to define attitude in several different ways. Shaw and Wright (1967) opined that attitude entails an existing predisposition to respond to social objects, hich in interactions with situational and other dispositional variables, guides and directs the overt behavior of the individual. In India sex is considered as a taboo. Most families do not feel comfortable talking about sex. Females face societal restrictions till they are married. All these factors heavily affect the attitude that adolescents share towards sex. We have also tried to measure the attitude of adolescents towards sex education as it is considered a great help to impart sex awareness among students from an early age in their life. Sex education in schools oes not only give the students the information they require about sex at the correct time but also give them complete and correct information as it comes through the right source. Gender has been taken as a moderator which affects sex awareness. The societal obligation that exists in India gives existence to a different kind of attitude towards sex between boys and girls. Even though boys and girls live in the same society study in same institutions, there are various restrictions that are put on the females which are exhibited in their attitudes. The aim of the study s to verify the mediation effect of gender on the three related components, namely attitude towards sex, attitude towards sex education and level of sex awareness. Research Background and Hypothesis Attitude towards sex education Sex Education is an instrument which schools in many countries have included as a means to impart knowledge among the students about sex and its related impact on health. In India, sex education is a means still to show its dominance in schools. Adolescents today require basic knowledge about reproductive biology so as to develop better understanding about their own body and health. Sex education in schools becomes all the more important because this information needs to come through the correct medium. Adolescents receive information about this from almost everywhere, especially mediums which do not give them correct and complete information. Ignorance in such matters is exacerbated through low school attendance, attitudes that prohibit discussion about sexual matters and lack of sex education (Bott & Jejeebhoy 2003; McCauley & Salter 1995). There have been studies in the past which demonstrate lack of knowledge among adolescent regarding reproductive biology (Gupta 1988). There are potential ifficulties in incorporating sex education in the education policies of a state. According to authors like Beattie and Meredith (1989), sex education is a potential are of political discredit. . Oz (1991), Kirby et al. (1979) and Sonenstein and Pittman (1984) mentioned these difficulties in the USA. In Europe, Csincsak et al. (1994) referred to the same difficulties that Lo? pez (1990) had also identified in Spain. The European countries where sex education was more integrated into the educational policies were the Scandinavian countries (Meredith 1990). Sex Education in South- Asian countries has never really picked-up. In India, there have been talks of making sex education a mandatory part of the course curriculum but it is a very tough proposition. As per the current state, there are a very few schools (mostly in the urban parts of the country) where sex education is being provided. This dismal state should work as an initiator for the education ministry to make sex education a part of the course so that the students learn about the same from legitimate sources rather that sources which give them incorrect and incomplete information. Instrument: We have used a questionnaire on a Likert scale (5-point scale ranging from strongly isagree to strongly agree) which was used in the study on Validity of a scale to measure teachers attitudes towards sex education (Helena and Gonc, 2006). The questionnaire was used ? on teachers but here we are trying to study the attitude of adolescents towards sex education with the same set of questions. Such a study about attitude towards sex education among adolescents in India is lacking at present and hence we have tried to bridge this gap through our study. Sex Awareness Sex Awareness, literally means the awareness about sex and related issues. The related issues ould range from the bodily effects of sex to the various health concerns that it can cause. Adolescents, in general have various sources to learn about sex. The sources range from school, peers, family to media. In India, peers play a very important role while imparting knowledge about sex to each other. According to some studies, male adolescents gather a major chunk of information about sexuality and reproduction mechanisms from their peers or the media. Yet, there is also willingness in them to learn more about the same topics from other more suitable sources. Another study showed that although the level of knowledge about puberty, menstruation, sex organs, reproduction, contraception, pregnancy, RTIs, HIV were low among young adolescents, older adolescents had better knowledge about the same. According to a particular study which was carried out by the Centre for Population Studies in 2003, more than 90% of the adolescents of the semi-urban areas around Kolkata had awareness about HIV/AIDS, nearly 50% had knowledge about the mechanisms through which the virus is transmitted and most of them were aware of at least one reversible birth control methods. A survey conducted by The NACO National Behavioral Surveillance indicated that 30% of the male adolescents in the age group of 15-19 years had knowledge about how the HIV virus is transmitted. This shows that the knowledge levels are not extremely low among the adolescents in India but still need a considerable amount of improvement. Another reason for the increasing importance to imbibe sex awareness among adolescents is the extremely low national average age of marriage for women in India which currently is 16. 4 years. Instrument: To measure the awareness about sex among adolescents a simple open-ended uestionnaire is used which has been taken up from the paper: “Adolescent Male Reproductive Health: Awareness and Behavior among Peri-Urban and Rural Boys in West Bengal, India (Mohan Das and Ray 2007). ” The answers have been rated on a 5 point scale with 1 for a wrong answer and 5 for the correct answer, so as to measure how well aware one is about sex and related issues. Attitude towards Sex In India, most adolescents are not very comfortable talking about sex with their family, which exhibits the fact that sex is considered a taboo in our country. According to a study done by International Herald Tribune (2006), even talking about sex is considered to be a taboo in wide parts of the country. The attitude of adolescents towards sex has changed over the years. The Family planning Association of India has conducted two surveys among people of the age of 15- 29 years twice in the years 1990 and 1993 in 13 and 16 cities, respectively. In 1990, 67% of all males and 87% of all females surveyed disapproved of sexual relations. Whereas in 1993, survey showed that the proportion had decreased, especially among the males. There are various omponents that affect the attitude of adolescents towards sex. Evidence has shown that adolescents with more liberal attitudes towards sexuality are more likely to experience premarital sex (Rakesh 1992). A study conducted by Mohan Ghule et al (2007) showed that majority of the students of rural college in Maharashtra, India expressed conservative attitudes towards premarital sexuality. At the same time, a study done by Goparaju (1993) showed that the college students reported liberal attitudes to pre-marital sex. Religious beliefs also play an important role on the attitude towards sex. The negative influence of self-religiosity on attitudes towards sex clearly show that individuals who perceive themselves as more religious display conservative attitudes towards sex. (Rangaiyan 1996) . Another component that affects one s attitude towards ? sex is the kind of social upbringing. Young people living in urban areas have a more liberal attitude towards sexuality and are more likely to engage in pre-marital sexual inter-course as compared to their rural counterparts. (Promote et al. 1987; Orubuloye et al. 1991). Instrument: The questionnaire chosen uses a 5-point likert scale to judge the attitude of dolescents towards sex. The questionnaire was used in the study Attitude Towards Premarital Sex among Rural College Youth in Maharashtra, India (Ghule, Balaiah and Joshi 2007). The questionnaire tests the attitude that both boys and girls have towards sex and if societal obligations and restrictions do play a part on such an attitude. Moderator: Boys and Girls We want to study the mediation affect of gender on the level of sex awareness that adolescents exhibit in India. Numerous studies have shown that the level of sex awareness exhibits variations when the two genders are compared. In different cultures, men and women are governed by different practices, social norms, values, symbols and representations. They are taught to be this way right from their childhood. This influences their expressions of masculinity and femininity. Generally, men are taught to be tough, aggressive, and dominant and risk taking whereas women are taught to be docile and well mannered. Males have been found to be more likely to engage in premarital sex and to have more positive attitudes towards premarital sex than do females (Carrol et al. 1985; Hendrick et al. 1985; Cernada et al. 986; Alexander et al. 1989; Rangaiyan 1996; Abraham 2001). The Indian society has always seen females being imposed restrictions upon. Most parents prefer their daughters going in convent schools (although this notion is taking a change in the past few years), not allowing them to socialize with the other sex and getting them married as soon as they attain reproductive age. The mediation effect between the two genders will validate whether or not the studies regarding the societal restrictions put on women and sex being considered a taboo especially for the females are true. Attitude towards Sex and Sex Awareness Human sexual behavior is instinctive as well as learnt which is why societal values and norms interfere with this behavior. Cultural myths and taboos result in sexual ignorance. (Avasthi A. K. , et al. , 1992). Adolescence, which is a transition between childhood and adulthood, is marked by reproductive development, which is why adolescents need to be aware of the physiological and emotional changes their bodies undergo. However, most adolescents in India lack reproductive health knowledge mostly due to various socio-cultural factors. (Das B. M. et al, 007). This lack of awareness eventually contributes to the spread of STDs such as AIDS (Kumar A. , et al, 1997). Starting from childhood, males and females are socialized by different sets of practices and norms. Boys are expected to be aggressive and tough which automatically drives them to high risk sexual behavior, which poses potential risk for them as well as their sexual partners. (Das B. M. et al, 2007). Such attitudes towards sexuality eventually affect sex awareness, especially among adolescents. Adolescents in India are either sexually unaware or clouded in myths deep-rooted in Indian culture. Reproductive health needs and sexual urges of adolescents though different from those of adults are poorly understood. (Das B. M. et al, 2007). A society s sexual behavior is controlled by the extent to which social control and self? - restraint is valued by the society. Of late, in India, social and community controls have weakened, giving way to greater individual freedom. This autonomy though available to all classes of men, is limited, in the case of women, only to upper and middle classes to a certain extent. However such social values restraining sexuality have not been replaced by sexual ducation (HIV and AIDS Prevention and Care). This results in unsafe sexual practices, without increasing awareness. (Ambati, B. K. et al, 1997) It just leads to increasing cases of sexual assaults on women and girls, which are conducive to the spread of AIDS in women (HIV and AIDS Prevention and Care). Parents hardly discuss sexual issues with their wards. Hence, adolescents rely on peers, media and fiction for information related to sexuality, which might not always be accurate. Knowledge of sexually transmitted diseases is limited. (Patil S. S. , et al. ) Attitude towards Sex and Attitude towards Sex Education The sexually conservative nature of Indian society inhibits educational efforts, especially since discussing sexual issues at a personal level is discouraged. (Ambati, B. K. et al, 1997) (Bhan N. B. , et al. 2004) showed that hesitance in talking about reproductive health results in a poor level of sex knowledge (i. e. knowledge regarding HIV, AIDS and menarche) among girls. Adolescents usually are expressive about their sexual desires, mostly when talking about crushes. Sexual fantasies used as a source of arousal for masturbation. However fear of the consequences of iscovery on reputation inhibits adolescents from seeking out correct information about these issues. (Bhugra D. et al. , 2007) They are mostly concerned about masturbation and nocturnal ejection. (Patil S. S. , et al) Social taboos against open discussion of sexuality lead to a lack of awareness among the general public, minimal skills and training among health professionals. (Garg S. et al. , 2007. ) As a result, India is currently facing an emergence of STIs and HIV. Any program to raise awareness of STIs and HIV needs to keep in mind the underlying attitude of the society towards ex, since this affects attitude towards sexual education. The effectiveness of sexual education is highly inhibited by a negative attitude towards it. Indian socialization process is such that boys are expected to be independent and self- reliant. This makes them ignore reproductive health problems and rely on self-treatments. (Das B. M. , et al. , 2007) Females have a more negative attitude towards sexuality as compared to males. (Avasthi A. K. , et al. , 1992. ) Adolescent girls find the concept of homosexuality horrifying and the practice of masturbation unacceptable; they believe in myths that masturbation ould lead to impotence and weakness. (Bhugra D. et al. , 2007) Such lack of openness about sexual issues also extends to half-hearted acceptance of sex education. On the positive side, the fact that premarital sex is considered a taboo ensures that girls are aware of contraception for fear of discovery. In fact fear of pregnancy, parental trust and expectations, and societal pressures stops many youngsters from indulging in premarital sex. (Bhugra D. et al. , 2007). In this case, societal pressure ensures a positive attitude when it comes to issues such as pregnancy, transmission of STDs, etc. However, at times adolescents, especially boys overcome societal attitude to sex in gathering basic sexual and reproductive information. They resort to indirect methods like fiction, peer interaction, media, etc. (Bhugra D. et al. , 2007). However, these sources aren t? always accurate which in turn clouds sexual education. There is an urgent need to encourage flow of information via more direct sources. Attitude towards Sex Education and Sex Awareness The topic of introducing sex education in school has been debated over and over again. The controversy surrounding this reflects the attitude of the society towards sexual education. In short, sex education requires a positive attitude of professionals delivering these courses. (Reis M. H. A. , et al. , 2006. ) This would go a long way in increasing the effectiveness of these programs thereby increasing sex awareness. An educational intervention program carried out among rural adolescent girls in Karnataka indicated the potential of such programs in increasing reproductive health knowledge among this segment. (Rao R. S. P. , et al. , 2008. ) Adolescent pregnancies contribute to 10-15% of total pregnancies in India, largely due to early marriages. Among the two genders, girls are more vulnerable because they can be coerced for unprotected sex and because they are biologically more susceptible to STDs including HIV infection. Early childbearing also has an adverse impact on their long-term economic potential. Thus sexual education goes a long way in improving sexual awareness. Despite the controversy surrounding effectiveness of health education, it has been established that it at least leads to increased awareness among adolescent girls empowering them to take care of their own reproductive health. (Rao R. S. P. , et al. , 2008. ) For diseases like HIV with no cure, education is very important; prevention being the only route. (Ambati, B. K. , et al. , 1997) The Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act legalized abortion in India, the intention being to reduce illegal abortion and consequent maternal mortality. However, unsafe abortions levels are still high, especially among low-income rural women and adolescents. (Johnston H. B. , 2002. ) It is essential to target and educate adolescents about reproductive health issues. Knowledge about major routes of HIV transmission is high without any intervention mostly due to exposure to media. Patil S. S. , at al. ) This is indicative of the fact that sexual educational programs along these lines could increase sexual awareness. Methods Sample A sample of 180 respondents consisting of 108 boys and 72 girls from schools and colleges of Delhi has been taken for the study. The survey was sent to 250 students of which 180 finally responded back, i. e. a response rate of 72% was achieved. Among the 180 responses, 30 responses were received from personal interviews whereas 150 responses were received from e- mails. The questionnaire was given mostly to urban schools and colleges in Delhi. Measures The above three constructs were measured as follows: Attitude towards Sex : Likert Scale (1=strongly disagree, 5=strongly agree) Attitude towards Sex Education is measured by a likert scale with questionnaire taken from the study „Validity of a scale to measure teachers attitudes towards sex education (Helena and ? ? Gonc, 2006). Attitude towards Sex Education: Likert Scale (1=strongly disagree, 5=strongly agree) Attitude towards Sex is measured by a likert scale with the questionnaire taken from the study „Attitude Towards Premarital Sex among Rural College Youth in Maharashtra, India (Ghule, ? Balaiah and Joshi 2007). Sex Awareness: Open-ended questions (1=incorrect answer, 5=correct answer) Sex Awareness is measured by open ended questions with the questionnaire taken from the study “Adolescent Male Reproductive Health: Awareness and Behavior among Peri-Urban and Rural Boys in West Bengal, India ? (Mohan Das and Ray 2007). ” Analysis & Results Data Reliability Analysis The following table indicates the measures of internal consistency. Item Cronbach s ? coefficient? No. Of Items Attitude To Sex 0. 722 12 Attitude To Sex Education 0. 798 10 Sex Awareness 0. 765 10 Data validity measures As can be seen, all the variables are internally consistent since their values are greater than 0. 7. Correlation Analysis The following table indicates correlation between the values. Sl. no Constructs Mean SD Pearson Correlation Sig. (2-tailed) Attitude To Sex Attitude To Sex Education Sex Awareness 1 Attitude To Sex 31. 93 4. 558 0. 722 2 Attitude To Sex Education 42. 15 2. 769 0. 724 0. 798 3 Sex Awareness 40. 733 5. 835 0. 925 0. 883 0. 765 Correlation coefficients All the constructs are positively and strongly correlated to each other, which confirm the empirical evidences on these relationships. Sexual awareness is strongly related to attitude to sex as well as attitude to sex education. Mediation Analysis The table below indicates linear regression result obtained by analysis. Step Variable Beta R2 1. Independent Variable: Attitude to sex Dependent Variable: Sex Awareness 0. 925 0. 854 2. Independent Variable: Attitude to sex Dependent Variable: Attitude to sex education 0. 724 0. 522 3. Independent Variable: Attitude to sex education Dependent Variable: Sex Awareness 0. 883 0. 778 4. Independent Variable: Attitude to sex, Attitude to sex education Dependent Variable: Sex Awareness 0. 600 . 448 0. 950 Linear regression results All the results obtained in this test are statistically significant, level of significance being considerably less than 0. 05 in each case. Step 1 indicates that attitude to sex is significantly related to sex awareness (beta = 0. 925, R 2 = 0. 854). Hence, there is an effect that could be mediated. Step 2 indicates that attitude to sex is significantly related to attitude to sex education (beta = 0. 724, R2 = 0. 522). Thus, antecedent variable is significantly related to the mediator. Step 3 shows a strong link between mediator and sex awareness. (beta = 0. 83, R 2 = 0. 778). Step 4 indicates that sex awareness depends upon both attitude to sex and attitude to sex education (R2 = 0. 950). The relationship between attitude to sex and sex awareness is lower (beta = 0. 600 as compared to earlier beta = 0. 925) when attitude to sex education is included in the model. This indicates that attitude to sex education acts as mediator. However, since the relationship between attitude to sex and sex awareness is highly significant, the mediation effect is partial, not complete. Thus, the model holds good with attitude to sex education having a partial mediating effect. Carrying out Sobel Testfor mediation using online Sobel calculator, Sobel test statistic of 10. 9 was obtained which is much larger than 1. 96. Hence, mediation is significant. Moderation Analysis The following are results of regression analysis carried out separately on females and males. Step Variable Females Males Beta R2 beta R2 1. Independent Variable: Attitude to sex Dependent Variable: Sex Awareness 0. 830 0. 685 -0. 304 0. 084 2. Independent Variable: Attitude to sex Dependent Variable: Attitude to sex education 0. 908 0. 822 -0. 659 0. 428 3. Independent Variable: Attitude to sex education Dependent Variable: Sex Awareness 0. 808 0. 647 0. 771 0. 590 4. Independent Variable: Attitude to sex, Attitude to sex education Dependent Variable: Sex Awareness 0. 552 0. 306 0. 697 0. 360 1. 008 0. 661 Moderation effect - regression analysis 1 When the same linear regression analysis is carried out separately on adolescent boys and girls, the results obtained are different for both the groups. For females, the partial mediation model still holds good. (beta = 0. 830 for attitude to sex and sex awareness, beta = 0. 552 when attitude to sex is also included in the relationship) However for males, the results change drastically. Attitude to sex is not a driving factor for sex awareness in this case (beta = -0. 304, R 2 = 0. 084). Though, when attitude to sex education is included in the analysis, some relation is observed between attitude to sex and sex awareness (beta = 0. 360, R 2 = 0. 661), which is primarily because attitude to sex education is strongly related to sex awareness. (beta = 0. 771, R 2 = 0. 590). Thus, sex education can enhance sex awareness in boys even though attitude to sex has no effect. Discussion and Implications The study has been able to verify the positive correlation between the various constructs, namely he attitude towards sex, attitude towards sex education and sex awareness with the moderator effect of gender. This shows that there is a link between the attitude that adolescents possess towards sex and the level of awareness they have. The study has shown a very interesting trend that a majority of the adolescents think of sex education as important and would like to impart it in the school curriculum. This presses on the need of our education system to include sex education as a part of the education that is provided in the schools itself, so that the youth is able to learn about it from an early stage in life. Sex education has been implemented well in other nations and various studies show that the level of sex awareness in such countries is much higher than that in our country. There have been enough talks about including sex education as a part of the course curriculum and now it is time that the education system incorporates this change. Another very striking development of this study is that because the adolescents are not been given information from the right sources, they are receiving incomplete and incorrect information from various mediums. The adolescents mostly receive sex related information from eers and media. This makes it all the more important for us to provide the students with the right channel and medium to get information about sex and its related issues. India is largely affected by various sexually transmitted diseases and to prevent this growth , sex awareness is a must. The societal restrictions that the Indian culture has had on the females are also exhibited with the differences in attitude towards sex among the two genders. Families need to loosen the restrictions that it has made on females so that they can also grow and be aware about the world as much as their male counterparts. Families need to be more liberal about discussing sex with children and should not consider sex as a taboo. Limitations and Conclusion Firstly the study was concentrated only to the urban section of students in Delhi and this does not show the general attitude of adolescents all over, especially those in the rural parts of the country, whose upbringing and social values are totally different from those of the urban population. This can work as moderator for future studies which can focus upon the difference in attitudes and awareness about sex of the two different classes- rural and urban. There are various studies that have been done for the same. Urban adolescents have better knowledge about the matters related to reproductive health and also the laws related to abortion and marriageable age. A gap that we found in the available studies was the non-existence of a study of the attitude towards sex education of students in India. Studies have been done regarding the level of sex awareness and attitude towards sex, but the attitude of adolescents towards sex education has never been studied. We have used the scales and the questionnaire from a study done in Portugal egarding the attitude of school teachers towards sex education. The set of questions are competent enough to be used for students as their main aim lies in measuring the attitude (whether positive or negative) of respondents towards sex education. Another limitation of our study was that we have used very basic questions to measure the level of sex awareness among students. The questions test the basic knowledge of adolescents about reproduction and sexual organs. A higher difficulty level questionnaire could also have been prepared but as we were apprehensive about the acceptance of these questions by ur respondents, we restricted our study to a basic level of questionnaire. In summary, despite the above limitations the study explains the relationship between the attitude towards sex and sex awareness among adolescents. It also explains the partial mediation affect of the attitude towards sex education of the adolescents. The moderator effect of gender exhibits the differences that still exist between the attitudes of the two genders towards sex owing to the culture and society we are a part of. References Adjahoto, E. O. , Hodonou, K. A. , De souza, A. D. , & Tete, V. K. (2000), Teenage knowledge about sex. Sante, 10, 195–199. Abraham, L. (2001), “Understanding youth sexuality: A study of college students in Mumbai City, India”, Journal of Social Work, 62(2), April 2001. Alexander, C. S. , Ensminger, M. E. , Kim, Y. J. , Smith, B. J. , Johnson, K. E. , & Dolam, L. J. (1989), “Early sexual activity among adolescents in small towns and rural areas: Race and gender patterns”, Family Planning Perspectives, 21, 261–266. Ali, M. , Bhatti, M. A. , & Ushijima, H. (2004), “Reproductive health needs of adolescent boys in rural Pakistan: An exploratory study”, Tohoku Journal of Experimental Medicine, 204, 7- 25. Ambati, B. K. , Ambati, J. , Rao, A. M. , (1997), “Dynamics of knowledge and attitudes about AIDS among the educated in southern India”, AIDS Care, Vol. 9, Issue 3. Avasthi A. K. , et al. , (1992), “Construction and Standardization of a Sex Knowledge and Attitude Questionnaire (SKAQ)”, for North Indian Population. Indian J. Psychiat, 34(1), 24-27. Beattie, A. & Meredith, P. (1989), The other curriculum (London, International Planned Parenthood Federation). Bhan N. B. , Mahajan P. , Sondhi M. , (2004), “Awareness Regarding Sex Knowledge Among Adolescent Girls (16-20 years)”, Anthropologist, 6(2): 101-103. Bhugra D. et al. (2007), “Sexual attitudes and practices in North India: A qualitative study”, Sexual and Relationship Therapy, Vol 22. No. 1. Bott, S. , & Jejeebhoy, S. (2003), Adolescent sexual and reproductive health in south Asia: an overview of the findings from the 2000 Mumbai conference. Bruce, J. , Lloyd, C. B. , & Leonard, A. (1995), “Families in focus: New perspectives on mothers, fathers, and children”, New York: Population Council. Carrol, J. L. , Volk, K. D. , & Hyde, J. S. (1985), “Differences between males and females in motives for engaging in sexual intercourse”, Archives of Sexual Behaviour, 14, 131–139 Cernada, G. P. , Chang, M. -C. , Lin, H. -S. , Sun, T. -H. , & Chen Cernada, C. -C. (1986), “Implications for adolescents sex education in Taiwan ”, Studies in Family Planning, 17(4), 181–187. Csincsak, M. , Bourdeaudhuij, I. & Van Oost, P. (1994), “School-based sex education in Flanders:problems, barriers and perceived needs for future practice ”, Health Education Research, 9(4), 473–483. Das B. M. , Ray S. , (2007), “Adolescent Male Reproductive Health: Awareness and Behavior among Peri-urban and R ural boys in West Bengal, India”, International Journal Of Men’s Health, Vol. 6, No. 2. Family Planning Association of India (FPAI). 1990), Attitude and perceptions of educated urban youth to marriages & sex, Bombay SECRT (Sex Education Counselling Research Training), Family Planning Association of India. Garg S. et al. , (2007), “Prevalence and awareness about sexually transmitted infections among males in urban slums of Delhi”, Indian J Med Sci, Vol. 61, No. 5. Ghule, Balaiah, Joshi (2007), Attitude Towards Premarital Sex among Rural College Youth in Maharashtra, India. Goparaju, L. (1993), “Unplanned, unsafe: Male students sexual behavior”, Paper Presented at the Workshop on Sexual Aspects of AIDS/STD Prevention in India, Tata Institute of Social Sciences, Mumbai Gupta, S. D. (1988), A study of reproductive health awareness and behavior amongst adolescents: Multicentric study. New Delhi: Indian Council of Medical Research. Hendrick, S. , Hendrick, C. , Sampion-Foote, M. J. , & Foote, F. H. (1985), “Gender differences in sexual attitudes”, Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 49, 1630–1642. International Institute for Population Sciences (IIPS). (2000), National family health survey (NFHS- 2), India. Mumbai: IIPS. Johnston H. B. , (2002), “Abortion Practice in India: A review of literature”, Centre for Enquiry into Health and Allied Themes (CEHAT). Kapamadzija, A. , Bjelica, A. , & Segedi, D. (2000), “Sex, knowledge and behavior on male high school students”, Medicinski Pregled, 53, 595–599. Kirby, D. , Alter, J. & Scales, P. (1979), An analysis of U. S. sex education programs and evaluation methods (Report No. CDC-2021-79-DK-FRI) (US Department of Health, Education and Welfare). Kumar A. , et al. , (1997), “Heterosexual behaviour and condom usage in an urban population of Delhi, India” AIDS Care, Vol. 9, Issue 3 Societal Influences on HIV and AIDS transmission and prevention. HIV and AIDS Prevention and Care Lamas, M. 1996), “Antropologia feminista y la categoria de genero [Feminist anthropology and gender analysis]”, M. Lamas (Ed. ), Genero: La construccion cultural de la diferencia sexual, (pp. 97–126). Lo? pez, F. (1990), Conceito e objectivos da educac? a? o sexual, Sexualidade & Planeamento Familiar, 47&48, 14–15. Masilamani, R. (2003). “Building a supportive environment for adolescent reproductive health programmes: Essential programme components”, S. Bott & S. J. Jeejebhoy (Eds. ), Towards adulthood: Exploring the sexual and reproductive health of adolescents in South Asia, 156-158. McCauley, A. P. , & Satter, C. 1995), “Meeting the needs of young people”, Population Reports, Series J, 41, 1-43. Meredith, P. (1990), “A education sexual nos pa?? ses europeus”, Sexualidade & Planeamento Familiar, 47&48, 11–13. National AIDS Control Organisation (NACO) & UNICEF. (2002), Knowledge, attitudes and practices of young adults (15-24 years). O Neil, J.? , Good, G. , & Holmes, S. (1995), “Fifteen years of theory and research on men s ? gender role conflict; new paradigms of empirical research”, In R. Levant. & W. Pollack (Eds. ),A new psychology of men, 164-206 Ortner, S. , & Whitehead, H. (1996), “Indagaciones acerca de los significados sexuales Explorations of sexual meanings]”, M. Lamas (Ed. ), Genero: La construccion cultural de la diferencia sexual, 97–126. Orubuloye, I. O. , Caldwell, C. , & Caldwell, P. (1991), “Sexual networking in Ekiti District of Nigeria”, Studies in Family Planning, 22(2), 61–73. Oz, S. (1991), “Attitudes toward family life education: a survey of Israeli Arab teachers”, Adolescence, 26(104), 899. Patil, S. S. , Chaturvedi, R. , & Malkar, M. (2002), “Sexuality and sexual behavior in male adolescent students”. Bombay Hospital Journal, 4. Retrieved March 16, 2006, https://www. bhj. org/journal_4404_oct/review_664. htm Promote, P. Chamrutrithirong, A. , Bennett, A. , Jitnagtanapataya, L. , Isarabhakdi, P. (1987), “Rural adolescent sexuality and the determinants of provincial urban premarital adolescent sex ”, Institute for Population and Social Research, Mahidol University, Bangkok. Rakesh, A. (1992). Premarital sexual attitudes and behaviour among adolescent girls. Jaipur: Print Well Publishers. Rangaiyan, G. (1996). “Sexuality & sexual behaviour in the age of AIDS: A study among college youth in Mumbai”, Ph. D. Dissertation (Unpublished), International Institute for Population Sciences (IIPS), Mumbai. Rao R. S. P. et al. (2005), “Acceptability and Effectiveness of a Breast Health Awareness Programme for Rural Women in India”, Indian J Med Sci, Vol. 59, No. 9. Reis M. H. A. , Vilar D. G. R. , (2006), “Validity of a scale to measure teachers ? attitudes towards sex education”, Sex Education, Vol. 6, No. 2. Santhya, K. G. , & Jejeebhoy, S. J. (2003), “Sexual and reproductive health needs of married adolescent girls”, Economic and Political Weekly, 38, 4370–4377. Scott, J. (1996), “El genero: Una categoria util para el analisis historico [Gender: A useful category for historical analysis] ”, M. Lamas (Ed. ), Genero: La construccion cultural de a diferencia sexual, 97–126. Shaw, M. C. , & Wright, J. M. (1967), Scales for the measurement of attitudes. New York, U. S. A. :McGraw Hiu Book Co. Sonenstein, R. & Pittman, K. (1984), The availability of sex education in large city school districts, Family Planning Perspectives, 16, 19–25. Verma, R. (1997), “Reproductive health issues, focus on men”, IASSI Quarterly, 16, 172-82. Zheng, X. (1997), “A survey of graduate student s knowledge, views and behavior with respect? to reproductive health”, Chinese Journal of Population Science, 9, 123-133. Appendix Questionnaire Attitude towards Sex Question 1 2 3 4 5 Virginity is a female students’ most valuable Possession If I love a girl/boy, I would do anything with her/him. While it is natural for men to have multiple sexual relations, it is morally incorrect for women to do so. Premarital sexual relations often equip persons for more stable and happier marriages Extramarital sexual relations is not bad. I am embarrassed to talk about sex with friends Religious groups shouldn’t attempt to impose their standards on sexual behavior. Easy access to birth control information and devices increases premarital sexual activities. My parents influence has inhibited me sexually. My friends mostly have sex for recreation/fun I like to look at sexy pictures of naked persons. My friends don’t think safe sex important. Attitude towards Sex Education Questions 1 2 3 4 5 School sex education is very important for children and youth. School sex education promotes earlier sexual involvement Sexuality is learned through life experiences and not in school. Only biology teachers should provide sex education School sex education should be obligatory. School sex education is an effective way to prevent HIV/AIDS Sex education is an effective way to prevent abortion. Sex education should be provided by parents not by school. With all the information in the media, school sex education is no longer necessary. All teachers are responsible for sex education Sex Awareness • What are the male and female sex organs • Where is Semen formed • What is the function of sperm • What is a major way to cause pregnancy • Does intercourse always lead to conception • Is abortion legal in our country • What is the statutory age of marriage for boys • What is the statutory age of marriage for girls • Have you ever experienced masturbation • Have you ever experienced sexual intercourse
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Sex Education in Delhi. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Analysis into Charity Campaigns

What techniques do charity campaigns use to convey their idea and persuade the viewer? Have they gone too far? Danielle Gough BA Visual Communication, Level 6 This essay will provide an in depth analysis into charity campaigns, their target audience and ways of communicating an idea, message and the methods used to persuade the viewer to donate or join the charity. In order to do this I will decode three images via semiotic analysis. Charity campaign techniques, symbols and signs , social and political issues used to persuade the viewer will be explored. The methods, history and theory of advertising, and advertising campaigns will also be taken into account. Advertising companies know their audience inside out, they know their weakness, strengths, what drives them to buy a product, and the psychology behind it. Scott, W states “ As it is the human mind that advertising is dealing with, it’s only scientific basis is psychology, which is simply a systematic study of those same minds the advertiser is seeking to influence. (Scott, 1916,p 2) They know figures and their target audience and human behaviour inside out.

Their campaigns and posters are an extension of this. Decoding them and the reasoning behind them, will be my basis of study. Charities are selling a certain type of agenda, idea, lifestyle or an objective or wrong that should be right within advertising, there campaigns are an extension of there brand identity and what they are about, how they say it, and their whole personality. As stated by Dyer, G “ Charity Advertising is usually non- profit making, but often usues the persuasive techniques of commercial advertising” also Nava A states about social cause advertising “within contempory Western societies identity has not only been linked to movements of self- affirmation, but has also become integrated into lifestyle decisiions made about the self”( Nava, 1997, pg 29) If you choose to donate, or give to a certain charity this says something about your views on the world society and what you as an individual believe in. Organisations have brand power, their brand is an extension of there beliefs. Danesi states “ Brands are one of the most important modes of communication in the modern media environment” ( Danesi, 2006, pg 3 ). Some may use the word propaganda when describing charity campaigns. Danesi states Propaganda is the craft of spreading and entrenching octrines, veiws, and beliefs, reflecting specific interests and ideoligies ( political, social, philosophical, etc) by attempting to persuade people through emotional appeals. ( Danesi, 2006, pg 10). EXPLAIN NOT RANDOM My first image for analyis is Figure 1, P. E. T. A campaign promoting vegetarianism.

The key element that firstly stood out to me was the women dipicted on the floor and the brave slogan “I am alica silverstone and I am a vegetarian”. Overall the campain ad is visually strong. The use of shock within advertisemnt is a key element advertisers use to promote an idea/ or put a message across in this case.

Advertisers use shock tactics as they convey a message” more loudly and clearly than competetors” ( Nava 1997, p 71). The louder and more shocking the advertisement, the more likely the consumer is to remember the campaign and campaign advert. The best examples of the benefits of shock imagery within advertising are the Benneton advertisements. Their adverts have brought up contravery and use current affairs and issues of race, gender and class as a campaign to persuade the viewer to buy products. Therefore the more shocking the advertisemnent, or message or slogan the more likely the consumer remembers the campaign. These shock tactics seem to work. In an article about shock tactics saves animals by the guardian it states” In terms of exposure, however, his campaigns are undeniably effective.

When he joined the organisation in his early 20s there were 60,000 members; now there are two million worldwide. ” ( The Guardian, 28/05/09, p 1) These memorable slogans are eye catching, The Guardian states “Yes, Peta could restrict its activities to scientific work, but how often do you read of that in the papers? It could just hand out lengthy tracts about ethics, but how many people would stop and take one, let alone read it? ”(The Guardian 21/01/2010 p1) P. E. T. A have used the strong slogan and image to shock the audience into looking, and remembering the campaign thefore having a lasting effect, which is why there publisitiy and popularity has grown ver the years. The slogan ‘ I am Alica Silverstone and I am a Vegetarian’, to me is contraversial. As these words can usually be accosiated with something you would say in a support group, here P. E. T. A have used this for shock purposes. This pycology states “ Seldom do words adeqeuately allow humans to explore and express the range and depth of our many subjective states” ( Boesch,E Waltr,J, Susana ,A , 2007 p172) The use of the powerfully statement and slogan reinforces P. E. T. A and their shock effect attitute. The image of the woman is the main signifier,Carolina Hein states “ Women displayed as sexual objects is the leif motif of erotic spectacle, from pin ups to strip tease she holds the look, plays to and signifies male desire” ( Hein 2008, pg349 ) using the male gaze as a way of portraying the female form, and drawing you into the advert. This use of the male gaze is dated back to pre raphlite paintings, the women is depicted as opressed and vunrable to draw our attention to the campaign advert. Sex in advertising is a key technique that gets campaigns noticed Shimp states “ sexual material in advertising acts to attract and hold attention for a longer period” (Shimp,T 2007 p263) Within this advert the draped inviting pose uggests the advert is using the women as an image for shock, totally unrelated to the P. E. T. A charity, just so the campaign ad makes you take another look and read it. You could argue that the portrayl of the women in this advert is degrading and could be showing the women as a sex object. Worell states “ the media portrayl of women limit them to the status of sex objects whose identies do not span beyond beauty, sex and reproduction”. ( Worell, 2002 p704 ) The advert overlly sexulises the female and shows the male gaze as you are drwn to the sexual oragns of the woman’s body which depicts the female in a submissive, powerless pose.

You could argue that ths un realistic view of a women in the media is bad press and not a good role model for women. Lind states” media portrayals of women have obvious effects (…) including negetive effects on a woman’s self image, increased rates of eating disorders, sexualization and racialiazm. ” (Lind,A Brzuzy,S 2008 p315) The women in the campaign ad is almost being depicted as an oject as the mai signifier, this could be degrading for women, and you could argue that it doesn’t realte to P. E. T. A, and that this degrading imagery is different to the moral ethos of the charity. You could argue that the imagery shows a negetive sterotype of a women. Pardan states” the male gaze constructs women as sexual objects in a erotic spectacle. According to this idea, the way men see women determines their value. ” ( Pardan,c 2009, p 137). The image is shcking and holds our attention, but it is a negeative objectilising way of portraying a woman, looking at other P. E. T. A campaign ads the over sexualisation of the woman’s body has been used countless times in a very exhibitionist way. Another technique used in the campaign ad is celebrity endorsement.

This is used to enhance popularity and recognition in the audience. McAuley states “ Using celebrities gets people to pay attention. That’s why info commercials and commercials use celebrities al the time. “ ( McAuley 2010, p 42) The Use of Alica Silverstone is promoting a vegetarian as being more of a sexy woman rather than the usual sterotype of a vegan or vegetarian being more of a tomboyish look. Alica Silverstone as well as being a actress and model is also know as an animal rights and environmental activist, and was voted “Sexiest Female Vegetarian,” by PETA. You could argue that P. E. T. A is aiming their adverts at a more male audience mainly because within all P. E. T. A ‘s campaigns women seemed to be used, which could be viewed as sexist and degrading to women. My second image for analyis is Figure 2, The Greenpeace Kit Kat campaign. The main elements of the campaign ad being the slogan ‘ The Easter Bunny: another supporter of the Kit Kat campaign, the image of the Easter bunny and the orangotan, and them carrying the messages ‘ Stop Nestle destroying rainforests for palm oil, and ‘ Give the Orang- utans a break. The strongest message for me is the use of the Nestle logo and the words ‘ Killer’ that states the message more clearly than the whole advertisement. The whole campaign uses guilt as a way of persuading Nestle to change it’s ways.

The use of the oragutan shows us the exact effect that eating a Kit Kat, showing an orangutan within the advertisement shows us what exactly we are effecting by eating the Kit Kat, giving us a sense of moral responsibility. Showing that eating a Kit Kat means that we are killing the orangutans. “ The other is a sociological or cultural argument, involving an implicit or exlicit critique (…) It suggests that we know of our collectve guilt which derives from our membersip of high consumption societies- guilt about depletion of the earth’s resourses or about the poverty and starvation endured by less fortunate peoples” (Richards, B, Mac, I Bottenll,J 2000 p 154). Nestle are using the fact that people don’t want the guilt of destroying the rainforests and the killing of a near endangered species on there head therefore using the oranutan within the campaign ad shows people responsibility for ther actions, a key technique used by charities. The other key technique used is the use of the Nestle logo with a different twist- ‘Killer’ and The Slogan ‘Give the orangutans a break’ which is a play n words of the Kit Kats original slogan ‘ Have a break, Have a Kit Kat ‘. “ However, the use of images as elements of activation and reinforcement of metaphors are also present in press ads, though text is given more importance than the image or photograph” ( Luis,J Campo,O Ives,J Navamoni,I 2005 p70). The play on words and the imagery metaphor on the Nestle logo says in a short space of time exactly what the campaign is about without going into any detail, and is a powerfull signifier. The use of pastiche in advertising here is used for irony purposes, making a mockery of Nestle, almost showing them up by playing with the slogans.

Shock in advertising is clearly used within the Kit Kat campaign, as a way of displaying a message. Another example of this is the U TUBE video (https://www. greenpeace. org/international/campaigns/climate-change/kitkat/) used on the campaign website that shows a man in an office eating an orangutan finger instaed of a kit kat chunk. This is a different form of shock in advertising from Figure 1, as intead of shock imagery that goes with sex in advertising the ‘ horror’ shock aspect is used, which is another aspect campaign advertisers use. You could argue that these shock tactics and ‘in your face’ tactics work to gain mayor public publicity. An article by the Economist states ‘ Nestle, another food giant, has been attacked in a spoof online advertisementthat shows an office worker eating a finger of a KitKat (…) These attacks are proving potent. Companies are changing their buying policies in response, and paying more attention to the distant reaches of their supply chains” (The Economist, 26/06/2010) The article states how the nestle video gained key media attention, causing Nestle to take action, thus causing other compaines such as Lush to stop using palm oil in there products. The article also states that “ We had been asking Nestle to stop buying products from rainforest destruction for two years before we launced our campaign. Nestle cracked within just two months because the verwhelmed public response made the company listen” (The Economist, 26/06/2010) The article proves that this type of direct action broadcasts the message more loudly than say a small advertisment or petition. My third case study, Figure 3 portrays a barnado’s ad campaign featuring a baby with methylated sprit being poured into it’s mouth.

The campaign is another example of shock in advertising to attract attention. The campaign uses the slogan ‘ There are no silver spoons for children born into poverty’ with a story describing how a poor upbringing can lead to substance abuse.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Analysis into charity campaigns. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Fuzzy Logic

Fuzzy Logic B. Vasanth, Electrical and Electronics Department, Rajalakshmi Engineering College Thandalam, Chennai, India vasanth1508@gmail. com I. INTRODUCTION Fuzzy logic was developed by Lotfi A. Zadeh in the 1960s in order to provide mathematical rules and functions which permitted natural language queries. Fuzzy logic provides a means of calculating intermediate values between absolute true and absolute false with resulting values ranging between 0. 0 and 1. 0. With fuzzy logic, it is possible to calculate the degree to which an item is a member. Fuzzy logic has rapidly become one of the most successful of today’s technologies for developing sophisticated control systems.

The reason for which is very simple. Fuzzy logic addresses such applications perfectly as it resembles human decision making with an ability to generate precise solutions from certain or approximate information. It fills an important gap in engineering design methods left vacant by purely mathematical approaches (e. . linear control design), and purely logic-based approaches (e. g. expert systems) in system design. While other approaches require accurate equations to model real-world behaviours, fuzzy design can accommodate the ambiguities of real-world human language and logic. It provides both an intuitive method for describing systems in human terms and automates the conversion of those system specifications into effective models. II. HOW DOES FUZZY LOGIC WORK? Fuzzy Logic requires some numerical parameters in order to operate such as what is considered significant error and significant rate-of-change-of-error, but exact values of these numbers are usually not critical unless very responsive performance is required in which case empirical tuning would determine them. For example, a simple temperature control system could use a single temperature feedback sensor whose data is subtracted from the command signal to compute “error” and then time-differentiated to yield the error slope or rate-of-change-of-error, hereafter called “error-dot”. Error might have units of degs F and a small error considered to be 2F while a large error is 5F. The “error-dot” might then have units of degs/min with a small error-dot being 5F/min and a large one being 15F/min. These values don’t have to be symmetrical and can be “tweaked” once the system is operating in order to optimize performance.

Generally, FL is so forgiving that the system will probably work the first time without any tweaking. III. FUZZY SETS A fuzzy set is a set whose elements have degrees of membership. That is, a member of a set can be full member (100% membership status) or a partial member (e. g. ess than 100% membership and greater than 0% membership). •A fuzzy subset F of a set S can be defined as a set of ordered pairs.

The first element of the ordered pair is from the set S, and the second element from the ordered pair is from the interval [0, 1]. •The value zero is used to represent non-membership; the value one is used to represent complete membership and the values in between are used to represent degrees of membership. IV. FUZZY SET OPERATIONS ?Union The membership function of the Union of two fuzzy sets A and B with membership functions and respectively is defined as the maximum of the two individual membership functions. This is called the maximum criterion. The Union operation in Fuzzy set theory is the equivalent of the OR operation in Boolean algebra. ?Intersection The membership function of the Intersection of two fuzzy sets A and B with membership functions and respectively is defined as the minimum of the two individual membership functions. This is called the minimum criterion. The Intersection operation in Fuzzy set theory is the equivalent of the AND operation in Boolean algebra ? Complement The membership function of the Complement of a Fuzzy set A with membership function is defined as the negation of the specified membership function. This is caleed the negation criterion.

The Complement operation in Fuzzy set theory is the equivalent of the NOT operation in Boolean algebra. The following rules which are common in classical set theory also apply to Fuzzy set theory. ?De Morgan’s Law ?Associativity ?Commutativity ?Distributivity V. WHY USE FUZZY LOGIC? Fuzzy Logic offers several unique features that make it a particularly good choice for many control problems. 1) It is inherently robust since it does not require precise, noise-free inputs and can be programmed to fail safely if a feedback sensor quits or is destroyed. The output control is a smooth control function despite a wide range of input variations. 2) Since the Fuzzy Logic controller processes user-defined rules governing the target control system, it can be modified and tweaked easily to improve or drastically alter system performance. New sensors can easily be incorporated into the system simply by generating appropriate governing rules. 3) Fuzzy Logic is not limited to a few feedback inputs and one or two control outputs, nor is it necessary to measure or compute rate-of-change parameters in order for it to be implemented. Any sensor data that provides some indication of a system’s actions and reactions is sufficient. This allows the sensors to be inexpensive and imprecise thus keeping the overall system cost and complexity low. 4) Because of the rule-based operation, any reasonable number of inputs can be processed (1-8 or more) and numerous outputs (1-4 or more) generated, although defining the rule base quickly becomes complex if too many inputs and outputs are chosen for a single implementation since rules defining their interrelations must also be defined. It would be better to break the control system into smaller chunks and use several smaller Fuzzy Logic controllers distributed on the system, each with more limited responsibilities. 5) Fuzzy Logic can control nonlinear systems that would be difficult or impossible to model mathematically. This opens doors for control systems that would normally be deemed unfeasible for automation. VI. HOW IS FUZZY LOGIC USED? 1) Define the control objectives and criteria: What am I trying to control? What do I have to do to control the system? What kind of response do I need? What are the possible (probable) system failure modes? ) Determine the input and output relationships and choose a minimum number of variables for input to the Fuzzy Logic engine (typically error and rate-of-change-of-error). 3) Using the rule-based structure of Fuzzy Logic, break the control problem down into a series of IF X AND Y THEN Z rules that define the desired system output response for given system input conditions.

The number and complexity of rules depends on the number of input parameters that are to be processed and the number fuzzy variables associated with each parameter. If possible, use at least one variable and its time derivative. Although it is possible to use a single, instantaneous error parameter without knowing its rate of change, this cripples the system’s ability to minimize overshoot for a step inputs. 4) Create Fuzzy Logic membership functions that define the meaning (values) of Input/Output terms used in the rules. 5) Create the necessary pre- and post-processing Fuzzy Logic routines if implementing in S/W, otherwise program the rules into the Fuzzy Logic H/W engine. 6) Test the system, evaluate the results, tune the rules and membership functions, and retest until satisfactory results are obtained. VII. DEGREES OF TRUTH Fuzzy logic and probabilistic logic are mathematically similar – both have truth values ranging between 0 and 1 – but conceptually distinct, due to different interpretations. Fuzzy logic corresponds to “degrees of truth”, while probabilistic logic corresponds to “probability, likelihood”; as these differ, fuzzy logic and probabilistic logic yield different models of the same real-world situations. Both degrees of truth and probabilities range between 0 and 1 and hence may seem similar at first. It is essential to realize that fuzzy logic uses truth degrees as a mathematical model of the vagueness phenomenon while probability is a mathematical model of randomness. 1)Truth values A basic application might characterize subranges of a continuous varirable. For instance, a temperature measurement for anti-lock brakes might have several separate membership functions defining particular temperature ranges needed to control the brakes properly.

Each function maps the same temperature value to a truth value in the 0 to 1 range. These truth values can then be used to determine how the brakes should be controlled. Fuzzy logic temperature In this image, the meaning of the expressions cold, warm, and hot is represented by functions mapping a temperature scale. A point on that scale has three “truth values”—one for each of the three functions. The vertical line in the image represents a particular temperature that the three arrows (truth values) gauge. Since the red arrow points to zero, this temperature may be interpreted as “not hot”. The orange arrow (pointing at 0. 2) may describe it as “slightly warm” and the blue arrow (pointing at 0. 8) “fairly cold”. 2)Linguistic variables While variables in mathematics usually take numerical values, in fuzzy logic applications, the non-numeric linguistic variables are often used to facilitate the expression of rules and facts. A linguistic variable such as age may have a value such as young or its antonym old. However, the great utility of linguistic variables is that they can be modified via linguistic hedges applied to primary terms.

The linguistic hedges can be associated with certain functions. VIII. LIMITATIONS OF FUZZY LOGIC It is difficult to make arguments for certain theories if it can’t be shown to perform alongside existing and accepted theories. Things like propositional logic are exact. If a statement in propositional logic could be illustrated with fuzzy logic… and fuzzy logic did it better, then maybe fuzzy would be more widely accepted. Fuzzy logic cannot be used for unsolvable problems.

This seems fairly reasonable, but its perception of being a guessing game may lead people to believe that it can be used for anything. An obvious drawback to fuzzy logic is that it’s not always accurate. The results are perceived as a guess, so it may not be as widely trusted as an answer from classical logic. Certainly, though, some chances need to be taken. How else can dressmakers succeed in business by assuming the average height for women is 5’6″? Fuzzy logic can be easily confused with probability theory, and the terms used interchangeably. While they are similar concepts, they do not say the same things.

Probability is the likelihood that something is true. Fuzzy logic is the degree to which something is true (or within a membership set). Classical logicians argue that fuzzy logic is unnecessary. Anything that fuzzy logic is used for can be easily explained using classic logic. For example, true and false are discrete. Fuzzy logic claims that there can be a gray area between true and false. But classic logic says that the definition of terms is inaccurate, as opposed to the actual truth of the statement.

Fuzzy logic has traditionally low respectability. That is probably its biggest problem. While fuzzy logic may be the superset of all logic, people don’t believe it. Classical logic is much easier to agree with because it delivers precision. Open-mindedness on the part of those who use logic is needed in order to change the acceptance of fuzzy logic. IX. EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 1 Fuzzy set theory defines fuzzy operators on fuzzy sets.

The problem in applying this is that the appropriate fuzzy operator may not be known. For this reason, fuzzy logic usually uses IF-THEN rules, or constructs that are equivalent, such as fuzzy associative matrices. Rules are usually expressed in the form: IF variable IS property THEN action For example, a simple temperature regulator that uses a fan might look like this: IF temperature IS very cold THEN stop fan IF temperature IS cold THEN turn down fan IF temperature IS normal THEN maintain level IF temperature IS hot THEN speed up fan There is no “ELSE” – all of the rules are evaluated, because the temperature might be “cold” and “normal” at the same time to different degrees. The AND, OR, and NOT operators of Boolean logic exist in fuzzy logic, usually defined as the minimum, maximum, and complement; when they are defined this way, they are called the Zadeh operators. So for the fuzzy variables x and y: NOT x = (1 – truth(x)) x AND y = minimum(truth(x), truth(y)) x OR y = maximum(truth(x), truth(y)) There are also other operators, more linguistic in nature, called hedges that can be applied. These are generally adverbs such as “very”, or “somewhat”, which modify the meaning of a set using a mathematical formula. EXAMPLE 2 Consider the colour wheel. Remember that there are 3 primary colours: Red, Yellow, and Blue.

These colours, separately, represent crisp sets. For example, true red is a non-member of true blue and of true yellow; true blue is a non-member of true yellow and of true red; yellow is a non-member of true red and of true blue.

There is a crisp boundary between these primary colours. But, it is possible to mix these colours with varying amounts of the true colours resulting in different shades of non-true colours. For example, mixing true red with true blue in equal portions of each will result in violet with a membership degree of 0. 5 in true red and 0. 5 in true blue. Different amounts of true red and true blue will result in varied membership values for the violet. The different violets represent the fuzzy boundaries between true red and true blue! EXAMPLE 3 Here is an example describing a set of young people using fuzzy sets. In general, young people range from the age of 0 to 20. But, if we use this strict interval to define young people, then a person on his 20th birthday is still young (still a member of the set). But on the day after his 20th birthday, this person is now old (not a member of the young set). How can one remedy this? By RELAXING the boundary between the strict separation of young and old.

This separation can easily be relaxed by considering the boundary between young and old as “fuzzy”. The figure below graphically illustrates a fuzzy set of young and old people. Notice in the figure that people whose ages are >= zero and 20 and < 30 are partial members of the young set. For example, a person who is 25 would be young to the degree of 0. 5. Finally people whose ages are >= 30 are non-members of the young set.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Fuzzy Logic. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Ballpoint Pen

Every writer has it. Every student needs it. Every teacher brings it along with him, also every secretary, and most especially every journalist. What is it? A ballpoint pen, or commonly known as ball pen. Pen, from the Latin word pinna which means feather, is a long, thin, rounded device used to apply ink to a surface usually paper for the purpose of writing or drawing. There are several different types of pen, including ballpoint, roller ball, fountain, and felt-tip. A ballpoint pen dispenses viscous oil-based ink by rolling a small hard sphere, usually 0. –1. 2 mm and made of brass, steel or tungsten carbide. The ink dries almost immediately on contact with paper. This type of pen is generally inexpensive and reliable. (Wikipedia) Ballpoint pen has a long history. It passed on many developmental stages before it became as a worldwide tool for writing. The story begins on 1888 when John Loud, an American leather tanner, patented a roller-ball-tip marking pen. Loud’s invention featured a reservoir of ink and a roller ball that applied the thick ink to leather hides.

However, it was never produced for the ink was the major problem - if the ink was thin the pens leaked, and if it was too thick, they clogged. Depending on the temperature, the pen would sometimes do both. After almost fifty years, an improved version of Loud’s patent was invented in Hungary in 1935 by Ladislao Biro and his brother, Georg. Ladislao Biro, who studied medicine, art, and hypnotism, was editing a small newspaper-where he was frustrated by the amount of time he wasted filling fountain pens and cleaning up ink smudges. Besides that, the sharp tip of his fountain pen often scratched the newsprint (paper). Determined to develop a better pen, Ladislao and Georg, who was a chemist, set about making models of new designs and formulating better inks to use in them. One summer day, the Biro brothers met Augustine Justo, the president of Argentina. After the brothers showed him their model of a ballpoint pen, President Justo urged them to set up a factory in Argentina. A few years later the Biro brothers fled to Argentina and found several investors willing to finance their invention, and in 1943 they had set up a manufacturing plant.

The Biro brothers devised a new design, which relied on "capillary action" rather than gravity to feed the ink. The rough "ball" at the end of the pen acted like a metal sponge, and with this improvement ink could flow more smoothly to the ball, and the pen could be held at a slant rather than straight up. One year later, the Biros were selling their new, improved ballpoint pen throughout Argentina. But it still was not a smashing success, and the men ran out of money. In an attempt to corner the market, the Eberhard Faber Company paid the Biro brothers $500,000 for the rights to manufacture their ballpoint pen in the United States. Eberhard Faber later sold its rights to the Eversharp Company, but neither was quick about putting a ballpoint pen on the market. There were still too many defects in the Biro design. Once again, it looked as if the ballpoint pen would be a complete failure. For the pen to regain the public’s favor and trust, somebody would have to invent one that was smooth writing, quick drying, nonskipping, nonfading, and most important didn’t leak. Two men, each had his own pen company, delivered these results. The first was Patrick J. Frawley Jr. Frawley met Fran Seech, an unemployed Los Angeles chemist who had lost his job when the ballpoint pen company he was working for had gone out of business.

Frawley was so impressed with his work that he bought Seech’s new ink formula in 1949 and started the Frawley Pen Company. Within one year, Frawley was in the ballpoint pen business with yet another improved model-the first pen with a retractable ballpoint tip and the first with no-smear ink. As more and more retailers accepted the pen, which Frawley named the "Papermate," sales began to skyrocket. Within a few years, the Papermate pen was selling in the hundreds of millions. The other man to bring the ballpoint pen successfully back to life was Marcel Bich, a French manufacturer of penholders and pen cases. He went to the Biro brothers and arranged to pay them a royalty on their patent. Then for two years Marcel Bich studied the detailed construction of every ballpoint pen on the market, often working with a microscope. By 1952 Bich was ready to introduce his new wonder: a clear-barreled, smooth-writing, non-leaky, inexpensive ballpoint pen he called the "Ballpoint Bic. The ballpoint pen had finally become a practical writing instrument. The public accepted it without complaint, and today it is as standard a writing implement as the pencil. (The Great Idea Finder) “Cops and soldiers wield guns, journalists wield words, and it’s a tossup which one is mightier, the pen or the sword, when reckoned not just in terms of how they cut to the quick but in terms of how quick they take to a cut. “ - Conrado de Quiros Ballpoint pen plays a significant role in the society as the universal tool for writing. First, ball pen serves as the basic need of every student. With it, he can take note of the important things that his teacher discussed about. He can also use it when he takes quizzes and examinations.

It is the most important thing that a student should have for writing is always done in school. Thus, a student should always remember the Filipino saying, “Huwag pumunta sa giyera kung wala kang dalang bala. ” Next, ball pen are really useful for everyone. A teacher uses it to write his lesson plans and check his students’ papers including home works, quizzes and projects. A secretary uses it to jot down important information that his boss would like to keep in mind. A doctor uses it to make a prescription for his patient while a cashier uses it to sign receipts of any transactions. A police uses it to record facts in a blotter. An artist uses it to draw while an engineer uses it to write formulas and solve problems. A pen friend uses it to write a letter for his pen pal. A journalist uses it to bare witness and to uncover truth as he writes his piece. Furthermore, ball pen can also be useful in any other ways. It can serve as a stick to hold and organize a woman’s hair. One can use it to vandal on a chair or draw different characters on any paper bill. If something is itching on an individual’s back, he can use it to scratch it without even experiencing difficultness to reach for it. If alarm by a stalker, one can use it as a tool for self defense. Its cap can also be used to clean the dirt under one’s nail. Nowadays, people also organize contest for the most number of a ball pen spin. “The pen is the tongue of the mind. ” – Miguel de Cervantes Ball pen is very helpful to an individual. It is an instrument used to write ideas and emotions which can never be expressed orally. It is the dialect of one’s thoughts and imagination. It is a tool in expressing oneself through writing. Ball pen is the most common device which everyone is likely to have. It is cheap and convenient. It is handy and can be found anywhere as long as it is needed. It comes in different colors: black, blue, red, green, pink, violet and any other else. It also comes in different sizes and different brands. It passed through different developmental stages. It serves a significant role in the society and it has been helpful to each individual, but ball pen as it is, it is not made with an eraser. Its blot can never be removed and will always be remembered. As a ballpoint pen, it will always leave a mark.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Ballpoint Pen. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Fashion Brand ASOS

INTRODUCTION ASOS. com is the UK’s leading online fashion retailer established in 2000. It targeted 16-32 years old fashion conscious customers. It offers own-label, branded and designer fashion goods. Its up-to-date fashions are available to buy through the internet. ASOS. com uses the product life cycle to make sure products always meet customer needs. asos. c Q3: what is meant by horizontal integration and vertical integration? HORIZONTAL INTEGRATION * The acquisition of additional business activities at the same level of the value chain. This occurs when a company takes over, or merges with a direct competitor. * This can be achieved by internal expansion or external expansion. ADVANTAGES * Economies of scale- achieved by selling more of the same product, for example, by geographic expansion. * Economies of scope- achieved by sharing common to different products. * Increased market power. * Reduction in the costs of international trade by operating factories in foreign markets. * Reduction in competition. * Fulfilling customer expectations’ EXAMPLES * A media company’s ownership of Radio, Television, Newspapers, Magazines, Books. Pharmaceutical companies frequently combine forces to share research and development expenses to bring new products to market. According to research by Henderson and Cockburn in 1996, firms involved in drug discovery realize economies of scope by sustaining diverse portfolios of research projects that capture both internal and external knowledge spillovers * The formation of Brook Bond Lipton India ltd. Through the merger of Lipton India and Brook Bond. * The merger of Bank of Mathura with ICICI (Industrial Credit and Investment Corporation of India) Bank. VERTICAL INTEGRATION it acquires a business at a different stage in the chain of production. * It may acquire businesses that were previously its suppliers or its customers. * Backward vertical integration means, merger with the input supplier. * Forward vertical integration means, merger with the output distribution chain. ADVANTAGES * A secure source of raw material or distribution channel * Protection and control over assets and services required to produce and deliver valuable products and services. * Access to n ew business opportunities and new forms of technologies DISADVATAGES Higher monetory and organizational costs EXAMPLES * Shell and BP in oil industry often adopt a vertically integrated structure. This means they use the supply chain from crude oil exploration to the refined product sale at their own gas stations. Q1:In what ways a company benefits from growth? Key points Product Lifecycle The product life cycle shows the stages a product goes through over time with regard to its sales. In the fashion industry, product life cycles can be short because trends and tastes change quickly. An ASOS. com own-brand dress may follow this cycle: Introduction. The dress is put on the website and advertised. For instance, links to new products are put on the home page. * Rapid growth. The product tends to promote itself as people see the item in magazines and newspapers. ASOS. com must ensure it has enough stock to meet demand. * Maturity. ASOS. com reminds people of the product through features on its website or in its magazine. * Saturation. ASOS. com may cut prices to clear stock and allow new products to take over. * Decline. People become tired of the item. Trends move on. Product lifecycle can helps ASOS. com to: * predict revenue and work out the profitability of products * plan when products are to be added to the website or withdrawn * support products through the whole life cycle. It can plan pricing strategies to earn the most revenue at every stage. Extention strategies * ASOS com can seeks to beet rivals and increase its market share. * By using Boston Matrix ASOS. com can assess the value of the individual products and manage them. * ASOS. om should manage the Dogs by getting rid of them or cutting costs. * It must convert Question Marks and Stars into Cash Cows. * It can do this through promotion. Promotions * Promotion helps ASOS. com to inform potential customers of its products with the view to making a sale. * It can use a Customer Relationship Management system to help work out the buying patterns of its customers. * By working out what customers buy and when, it can target promotions at key sectors of the market. * ASOS. com can measures how well promotion works through Key Performance Indicators.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Fashion brand ASOS. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

The Role of Nigerian National Assembly

THE ROLE OF NIGERIAN NATIONAL ASSEMBLY IN THE BUDGET PROCESS A PAPER WRITTEN BY DANIEL OMOLEWA OGUNSOLA APRIL, 2009 Table of Contents 1. Executive Summary3 2. Introduction4 3. Balance of Budgetary Powers5 4. The National Assembly in Nigeria’s Budget Process7 4. 1. Legal Framework8 4. 2. Institutional capacity10 4. 2. 1 Effective Appropriation Committee Capacity10 4. 2. 1 Establishment of a Budget Office10 a. Journey So Far11 b. Challenges11 c. Prospects11 4. 3 Political Will of Individual Legislators11 5. Budget Implementation12 6. Conclusion14 1. Executive Summary The paper seeks to analyse the three identified variables as determining the actual role of the Nigerian legislature in the budget process. The Nigerian budget process under the military has a history of executive dominance, very poor public expenditure management and lack of accountability and transparency. This provides the background to the emerged democratic budgeting process and ultimately explains the various challenges being faced by the legislature and the public in the process of scrutinising the budgets of the country. Under military rule, the budget process was mostly characterised by executive dominance, poor financial management, poor implementation, and generally a lack of transparency and accountability.

Since the advent of our recently evolving democratic experience, the expectations are that a new culture of democracy will be institutionalised to ensure that the allocation of public resources is in line with the needs of the population. Amongst the new actors that are now jostling for a voice in budget policy are the country’s National Assembly and civil society organisations (CSOs). Budget implementation plays a very crucial role in the realization of the primary purpose of government, which is the guarantee of the security and welfare of the people. There is need for a clear departure from the regime of corruption and waste that have been entrenched in the Nigerian public finance system in order for this lofty dream to be attained. This therefore mandates the legislature to push the frontiers of citizens, pro-poor budgeting a step further, by not only reducing some estimates of the executive, but also inserting provisions for developmental projects to be cited in each federal constituency being represented by the legislators. Sustainability of this new legislative development biased initiative will depend largely on new capacities including innovative legislations to be put in place to ensure proper scrutiny of budget implementation, through its effective monitoring and continuous critical evaluation. . Introduction According to Chief Ken Nnamani, the immediate past President of the Nigerian Senate, the Legislature is a co-manager of the Natural Economy “I have emphasised the importance of a credible legislative framework to complement executive actions for economic development. Economic development is an interaction between culture, insititutions and economic behaviours. This interaction needs to be structured and coordinated in order to achieve the desired result.

Law performs this work of coordination. As lawmakers our responsibility is to help provide frameworks that enable high quality coordination of economic activities” Budget implementation plays a very crucial role in the realization of the primary purpose of government, which is the guarantee of the security and welfare of the people. Capital projects provide government with an opportunity to impact on the lives of the people in a positive way.

However, recent experience on the implementation of capital budgets in Nigeria leaves much to be desired with increasing returns of unspent funds to the Treasury year after year. As such, the infrastructure, capital components of education, health, etc of the Federal budget are left unspent while the indicators in the sectors continue their negative dive. Thus, the link between policy, planning and budgets in the current approach to budgeting through the Medium Term Expenditure Framework continues to weaken through the inability to implement capital budgets. Also, Nigeria’s quest to meet the Millenium Development Goals (MDGs) is frustrated by this development. 3. Balance of Budgetary Powers When presenting the 2006 budget to the National Assembly, the then Senate President, in his speech stated that “ The National Budget is an important policy tool, hence the constitution requires Mr. President to present, and the National Assembly to approve, estimates of the revenues and expenditures of the Federation for the next financial year, which in Nigeria follows the lunar year. The power to approve includes the power to analyse, debate, amend and enact into law the estimates presented by Mr. President.

The principle of separated institutions sharing power” is clearly illustrated in budgeting”. During the 2009 budget cycle, the legislature not only reduced some important expenditure items as proposed by the executive, the National Assembly also took liberty to increase allocation for several items and introduce several new items into the budget. The National Assembly, as stated by the Chairman of the Committee on Appropriation, however made effort to comply with overriding macro-economic projections of the executive and endeavoured to stay within the general principle of the budget. In my own opinion, the egislature pushed the frontiers of citizens, pro-poor budgeting a step further, by inserting development projects to be cited in each federal constituency being represented by the legislators. There are however, some of the insertions of the legislature that are subject to public protestations. It was widely reported in the Nigerian press, that the President Umar Musa Yar’adua may have stated that the courts would have to decide the expediency of the legislature outrightly removing some items and not stopping at that, still inserting additional expenditure items. The Guardian learnt yesterday that the presidency has obtained advice of the office of the Attorney-General of the Federation and may head to court “soon” to seek judicial interpretation of the powers of the NASS to reduce budgets as proposed and increase theirs so arbitrarily. The NASS members allegedly increased their votes from N64. 517 billion to N111. 38 billion but cut drastically votes for many of the projects the presidency is to implement” 4. The National Assembly in Nigeria’s Budget Process Budget Preparation As I observed during the Budget and Parliament Course, on the discussion forum, in South Africa, the Committee on Finance and its Joint Budget Committee is involved in the budget process before being tabled in Parliament. I understand that portfolio committees also report on departmental annual reports in time for these reports to be taken into account in making the next budget allocations. In Malawi, it was stated by one of the participants that the parliamentary Budget and Finance Committee meets the Minister of Finance to discuss the Draft Budget Estimates before its presentation in the House, the Committee giving its advice on what should be modified or amended after consultations with other stakeholders. In Canada, the Finance Committee take hearings on an economic and fiscal update that is presented ahead of the budget.

Recommendations are then passed to the executive. A participant described in another discussion how the Rwanda Parliament passed a budget law which describes all processes which must be followed by all institutions during the budget process. It should be stated that in Nigeria, a standard budget practice is evolving, at the moment, the legislature is not involved in anyway in the preparation of the budget document, it is done between the Ministry of Finance, the Federal Budget Office, Ministry of National Planning and the respective MDAs. A budget process bill has once been introduced in the Senate to stipulate the procedure and processes, including time frames to be adhered to by each stakeholder in the budget process, it has yet to see the light of the day. However, there has evolved a regular time-table, which is being followed by the National Assembly in the appropriation process, there is still need for legislation to specify the role of each party in the budget process from evaluation of previous budget cycle, rolling over into the present budget cycle. Clearly from the provisions of Sections 80 and 81 of the 1999 constitution, appropriation powers are vested on the National Assembly to approve federal budget. The Constitution, in Section 80 (3) states: “No money shall be withdrawn from any public fund of the federation, other than the Consolidated Revenue Fund of the Federation, unless the issue of those moneys has been authorised by an Act of the National Assembly. ” Section 80 (4) further states: “No money shall be withdrawn from the Consolidated Revenue fund or any other public fund of the Federation, except in the manner prescribed by the National Assembly. In Sections 83 (1) and (2) it further vests the power to provide for Contingencies Fund and Supplementary Estimates where the need arises. It is therefore clear that the Constitution has given the Legislature enormous powers in the budget process. The House of Representatives (and its appropriation Committee) has a crucial role to play in ensuring that appropriated funds are used to improve the living conditions of the people rather than being returned to the Treasury. 4. 1. Legal Framework A comprehensive legal framework is generally believed to be an essential component of an effective and enduring budget system.

This framework can exist as part of a country’s constitution, or can be adopted through other legislation. A key goal of a well articulated legal framework is to help ensure that adequate checks and balances have been established for the budget system. Thus, the legal framework can ensure that there is a role for the legislature and for independent auditing institutions, guarding against the total dominance and potential abuse of the budget system by the executive. A legal framework that clarifies the roles and responsibilities of the executive and legislative branches in the budget system, and of independent institutions such as the Auditor General, is essential to establishing accountability. The clarification of roles and responsibilities can also extend to the different levels of government, providing an indication of which tier is responsible for delivering which public services or which revenues can be raised by the different tiers. A legal framework should also establish the rules and regulations that guide the budget decision-making process and the management of government revenue and public expenditure. Even simple rules can be important, such as setting the key dates in the budget process and defining the reporting obligations for the executive. These rules also can dictate the scope of the budget or spell out the often complex procedures surrounding the procurement of goods and services by the public sector.

Approaches vary, however, with some egal frameworks including a significant number of procedural details and others giving more flexibility to government managers. Even in the latter case, the legal framework will include a minimum set of requirements to ensure that managers can be assessed and the public interest protected.

Ideally, the budget should capture all of the financial transactions of government — the total revenues to be collected, funds to be expended, debts to be repaid, and new and old liabilities to be incurred. The full picture of the government’s financial status cannot be captured if some programs, agencies or commitments are not captured in or outside the budget simply referred to as “extra-budgetary commitments” in the Nigerian Public Expenditure Management mantra. 4. 2. Institutional capacity 4. 2. 1 Effective Appropriation Committee Capacity An effective Appropriation Committee should be well equipped and staffed. As presently constituted, the House of Representatives, with about 20 permanent staff, is one of the best staffed Committees of the House of Representatives. However, this is far to few considering the huge responsibility upon the committee by the Constitution. 4. 2. 1 Establishment of a Budget Office Strategic legislative monitoring and evaluation of capital budget implementation has become an imperative if the living conditions of Nigerians will be improved. The Appropriation Act being a law is not to be breached through non implementation of its estimates. And this calls for new legislative capacity to ensure that the provisions of the Appropriation Act are implemented at least to the extent of available resources. The legislature require improved capacity to ensure the fulfilment of the citizens aspirations. The Appropriation Committee is tasked with ensuring that the people get value for money and public funds are managed, administered and disbursed according to authorisation. So far in the Nigerian legislature, issues regarding Public Expenditure Management, is presently saddled with the Appropriation Committees of both houses (being a bi-cameral legislature), and the Public Accounts Committees (PAC). However, this capacity is inadequate.

There is therefore an urgent need to establish the National Assembly Budget and Research Office. Barry Anderson, in his paper ”The Value of a Non-partisan, Independent, Objective Analytic Unit to the Legislative Role in Budget Preparation” he says that a legislative budget unit, “In its most basic terms, an independent analytic budget unit can provide information to put the legislature on a more equal footing with the executive” And also, it simplifies complexity, promotes transparency, enhances credibility, promotes accountability, improves the budget process, Serves both the majority and minority, and provides rapid responses. a. Journey So Far The NABRO Bill, has been in the legislative works since the advent of democracy in Nigeria in 1999. However due to several possible factors, it has suffered defeat in each of the Assemblies up until now. At present, the National Assembly Budget and Research Office Bill was passed by the House of Representatives and is therefore awaiting passage by the Senate, once this stage is over, the bill goes for harmonization in case there are differences between the two houses’versions, for onward transmission to the President of the Federal Republic of Nigeria, for assent. The Bill then becomes a law and the National Assembly Budget and Research Office would then be established. There appears to be high political willingness on the part of the individual legislators to ensure that NABRO takes off. This is evident in the budgetary provision that was included in the 2009 budget for the take off of the office. b. Challenges The general lack of understanding of bureaucrats and some legislators in the operations of NABRO has been the major setback. c. Prospects When NABRO is finally established, it will provide the National Assembly with objective, timely and non-partisan analysis needed for economic and budget decisions and with the information and estimates required for use in the budget process. 4. 3 Political Will of Individual Legislators More than ever, there is a high level of determination and awareness among legislators in the Nigerian National Assembly to ensure an effective budgeting system that is strong enough to deliver the “dividends of democracy” which is effective service delivery to the citizens of Nigeria. In various fora, the Speaker of the House of Representatives has clearly stated the position of the House of Representatives to reposition the PEM along the path of input, output and outcome. This shift in paradigm has given the House of Representatives a clear direction in the past two years and they have exhibited a high spirit in the various leakages in the public financial system that have been discovered by them and efforts made to block them. For example, before the present budget season, the House of Representatives leadership had made several public statements revealing the existence of several accounts of the Federation, that have never been included in the revenue framework of previous budgets, yet being expended by the executive in contravention of the provisions of section 80 of the constitution. 5. Budget Implementation There has been growing dissatisfaction amongst the parliamentarians over the performance of the executive in the implementation of the budget. For example, during the 2007 budget cycle, the National Assembly rated the budget implementation at 60%, the 2008 budget cycle didn’t attain as much performance rating, with a 30% mark given by the legislature. This however became a subject of conflict between the executive and the legislature, passing the buck at the table of each other.

Part of the reasons adduced by the executive for this low budget implementation performance is that Ministries, Departments and Agencies of government didn’t fully understand the provisions of the Public Procurement Bill usually called “Due Process”. These issues are being fine-tuned to avoid the pitfalls of last year. In order to forestall this occurrence in the 2009 Appropriation cycle, the legislature, while passing the appropriation bill inserted some legal provisions in the Appropriation Act, to ensure that periodical reports are submitted to the National Assembly by Ministries and Departments who are charged with the responsibilities of executing the budget. Some of the sections are; Section 6 (2) The Accountant General of the Federation shall forward to the National Assembly full details of the funds released to the government agencies immediately such funds are released” Section 7 The Minister of Finance shall ensure that funds appropriated under this Act are release to the appropriate agencies, and organs of government as and when due, provided that no funds from any quarter of the fiscal year shall be deferred without prior waiver from the National Assembly. In the foregoing provisions, beyond the duties placed on the Accountant General and the Minister of Finance, reports from MDA’s on received disbursements will further verify whether the two officials have complied with their duties. Section 25: (1) The Federal Government shall cause to be drawn up in each financial year, an Annual cash plan which shall be prepared by the office of the accountant general of the federation. Section 26: The Minister shall within 30 days of the enactment of the Appropriation Act, prepare and publish a disbursement schedule derived from the annual cash plan for the purposes of implementing the Appropriation Act. 6. Conclusion Improved budget implementation will lead to improved policy implementation and better planning. There is an inextricable linkage between planning, policy and budgeting in the Medium Term Expenditure Framework, which is being practiced in Nigeria at the moment. An improved budget implementation will also lead to enhanced service delivery by government to the people, it would also produce reduction of waste and inefficiency in public service delivery. To ensure improved budget participation and a harmonious flow of budgetary information and performance in Nigeria, the legislature need improved capacity. The role of the legislature in the process of budgeting, macro-economic planning and policy implementation cannot be over-emphasised in the emerging global economic realities. References •The Third Way: Leading Democratic Change through Institutional Interdependence – A selection of speeches of Senator Ken Nnamani.

Edited by: Dr. Sam Amadi, KNCLD, (2006) •National Treasury, South Africa 2005, McGee (2007), p. 21 •“Due Process and Procurement in the Nigerian Public Sector” Dr Chika N. Oguonu, https://www. hollerafrica. com/showArticle. php? catId=1&artId=248 The Role of Parliaments in the Budget Process, Edited by Riccardo Pelizzo, Rick Stapenhurst and David Olson, World Bank Institute, (2005) •The Value of a Nonpartisan, Independent, Objective Analytic Unit to the Legislative Role in Budget Preparation, Barry Anderson, World Bank Institute, (2005)

• “Due Process Mechanism and Digital Opportunities” Paper Presented to the University Community at Princess Alexandria Auditorium, University of Nigeria, Nsukka, Ezekwesili O (2005) •Parliament and the Budget Course– http//apps. parliamentarystrengthening. org/Forum

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

The Role of Nigerian National Assembly. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Library System with Barcode Reader

Introduction Now, in our society all over the world technology is the most important advancement, a necessity in bringing about progress as we move along in this computerized world. These changes in effect make man’s life easier and more convenient. The relationship between the library and computer is constantly changing that the use of computer contributes to the way man learns and communicates. It easy in this world to strive for changes and since library is no different from any firm and institution, considering the use of computer to perform a given task will be efficient. Librarians have the responsibility not only to know about the ways in which libraries will be managed using techniques of automation, but also to be aware of the changes that automation can bring to the library services in the near future.

Thus, computer works in ways radically different from human beings and the flow of works in an automated system can differ quite considerably from that in the manual system. At the present time, IT in business was really rising, making extremely demand in our society. It is a very useful material to help us in our job like minimizing our time in doing our works. It brings us a quick result in a short period of time. These computer technologies usually use nowadays in different aspects because it helps them a lot in terms of their services. It usually helped them in monitoring. The proponents aim is to offer solution to the problems regarding library procedures and management, and to provide a user-friendly system for their ease and comfort. The system basically responds to the needs of the librarian and student body. Abstract The general objective of this study is proposed a systematized way of keeping and filling of all the books information in the library of University of Makati. We the researchers proposed a system entitled “A Proposed Library System with Barcode Reader for University of Makati” that will computerize the library activity of the said University.

The study will serve a better assistance to the students, teachers, and the staff through the effective use of library resources. The systematized library activities such as borrowing of books, computation of penalty for overdue books fine, and keeping track of lost.

This proposed system involves the usage of computers as additional help for doing their task. The proposed system will easily monitor the availability of books so the librarian will know what the status is and what books are available. The involvement of computer also aims to minimize the time to search a specific book by inputting its information. This proposed system also provides security for the log in. The researchers hope that their study would really help the university’s library. Background of the Study UMak is an LGU fully-funded public university originally established in 1972 as the Makati Polytechnic Community College. In response to the growing demands for more curricular program offerings, the Polytechnic Community College was elevated to the status of a full-blown college and renamed Makati College in 1987. A merger with the former Fort Andres Bonifacio College on January 10, 1990 paved the way for the transformation of the college into a University. By virtue of Municipal Ordinance No. 433, Pamantasan ng Makati became a chartered university of Makati City on December 19, 1991 under the administration of Mayor Jejomar C. Binay. On August 27, 2002, City Ordinance 2002-111 has been approved amending City Ordinance No. 9-443 revising the Pamantasan ng Makati Charter so as to change the official name of Pamantasan ng Makati to University of Makati subject to all laws and existing legal regulations.

Since UMak is in Makati, we all know that the University serves a better assistance in the student. Umak have a large number of students, and it is still using a manual library system. The University encountered problems because their populations become bigger. The Computerized Library System develops to find a helpful solution in this kind of problem. Scope and Limitation This study is based on the manual library system of University of Makati. The focus of the study is to create a library system that is needed very much on filling, and arranging of library’s books information and borrower’s records.

This system also focuses on the borrower’s so that the librarian will easily know who the borrower of the book is. Every book records will be stored and the file retrieval will be faster and comprehensive. The books are easy to find in the system by the use of search engine. The system can easily monitor the list of all books, the status and the availability that are presently stored in the system. By the use of bar code reader, the books are easily recognized by the system so that less consuming of time to add books and to borrow books. In terms of returning of books, the system will compute the penalty for overdue books fine. The system will generate inventory reports.

For the limitations, the proposed system will not include . It is not connected on the other department. Other matters that were not mentioned in this study are to beyond the control of the researchers and would definitely not be included. Importance of the Study In the fast development of Library System, computers almost conquer all aspect of the business. The proposed system “Library System with Barcode Reader” has a high standard, because it will help the librarian to manage all the records. The proposed system is significant for it can answer the problem of the client regarding on the activities inside the library. Through this study, it will serve as a fulfillment among the researchers by gaining more experience and expertise in the fields of computer.

The proposed system would benefit the University of Makati especially to the librarians who are responsible in arranging and organizing the books information in the library. This study would be a great relevance since it would organize the arrangement of the books and to give fast and accurate information to the user. In addition the proposed system will make the work of the user easy and comfortable. The importance of the system to the University’s librarian is that it will help the librarian for precise and quality assistance and give advantage for the use of computerized library system.

The system will provide the necessary records of their books by the use of modern equipments. This proposed system can serve as a tool for future researchers who want to venture on a similar study. Conceptual Framework * Easier to monitor the availability books. * Books and users information will be secured * Convenient and organized to perform the process of borrowing. . “A Proposed Library System with Barcode Reader for University Of Makati” * Users * Chief librarian * Librarian staff * Data * Books Information * Students Information * Hardware * Computers * Bar code reader * Printer * Books list with information * Books list with the status and availability * Borrower’s Information List * Reports * Overdue Slip * Overdue books report Returned books report * Borrowed books report Input Process Output Benefits Benefits Statement of the Problem The aim of this study is to analyze the problem encountered in the manual system of University of Makati. The researchers interviewed the chief librarian regarding the problems and difficulty in their manual system. General Problem: How does the research project can make library activities more systematized? Specific Problems: * Does the research project can lessen the time in process in searching of books? Does the research project can easily monitor the status and availability books? * Does the research project can organize the list of the books? * Does the research project can minimize the time in the process of borrowing and returning of books? * Does the research project can secure all the records of the said system? Objectives of the study The main goal of this study aside from fulfilling the requirement in I. T. Research Project was to give University of Makati a more systematic way of arranging and organize their library records. The university also wanted to find ways on minimize time in searching books, recording transactions, monitoring books list and generating reports.

The researcher also aimed to develop a functional system that would hopefully help Umak. The proposed system would be secured with the help of security level using login. The proposed system was suitable for librarian staff to be use because it is easy to identify the interface and functions of the computerized system. General Objective: To be able to make a more systematic way of keeping and filling the records of all the books. Specific Objectives: * Create a system that lessens the time in searching books. * Create a system that can easily monitor the list of all books, the status and the availability that are presently stored in the system. * Create a system that is more organized than the manual system * Create a system that minimize the time in process of borrowing of books. * Create a system that will secure all the records. CHAPTER I “A Proposed Library System with Barcode Reader For University of Makati” Dador, Huber John A. Esguerra, Christian U. Mata, Ralph Aries A. Tallada, Raymond C.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Library System with Barcode Reader. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Suspension Bridge

Lumacad, Eugine A. English 3 (Technical Communication) Mendez, Charles Wayne M. I. Introduction Suspension bridges in their simplest form were originally made from rope and wood. Modern suspension bridges use a box section roadway supported by high tensile strength cables. In the early nineteenth century, suspension bridges used iron chains for cables. The high tensile cables used in most modern suspension bridges were introduced in the late nineteenth century. Today, the cables are made of thousands of individual steel wires bound tightly together. Steel, which is very strong under tension, is an ideal material for cables; a single steel wire, only 0. 1 inch thick, can support over half a ton without breaking. Light, and strong, suspension bridges can span distances from 2,000 to 7,000 feet far longer than any other kind of bridge. They are ideal for covering busy waterways. With any bridge project the choice of materials and form usually comes down to cost. Suspension bridges tend to be the most expensive to build. A suspension bridge suspends the roadway from huge main cables, which extend from one end of the bridge to the other. These cables rest on top of high towers and have to be securely anchored into the bank at either end of the bridge. The towers enable the main cables to be draped over long distances. Most of the weight or load of the bridge is transferred by the cables to the anchorage systems. These are imbedded in either solid rock or huge concrete blocks. Inside the anchorages, the cables are spread over a large area to evenly distribute the load and to prevent the cables from breaking free. II. Body A. Advantages and Disadvantages of a Suspension Bridge A. a Advantages of a Suspension Bridge The center span may be made very long in proportion to the amount of materials required, allowing the bridge to economically span a very wide canyon or waterway. It can be built high over water to allow the passage of very tall ships. Neither temporary central supports nor access from beneath is required for construction, allowing it to span a deep rift or busy or turbulent waterway. Being relatively flexible it can flex under severe wind and seismic conditions, where a more rigid bridge would have to be made much stronger and so also heavier. A. b Disadvantages of a Suspension Bridge Lacking stiffness the may become unusable in turbulent and strong wind conditions and so require temporary closure to traffic. Being flexible in response to concentrated loads the structure is generally not used for regional rail crossings, which concentrate the maximums “live” loading at the location of the locomotives. Under sever wind loading, the towers exert a large torque force in the ground, and thus require very expensive foundation work when building on soft ground. B. Structural Analysis of a Suspension Bridge The main forces in a suspension bridge are tension in the main cables and compression in the pillars. Since almost all the force on the pillars is vertically downwards and they are also stabilized by the main cables, they can be made quite slender. Assuming a fairly negligible cable weight compared to the deck and vehicles being supported, a suspension bridge’s main cables will form a parabola (very similar to a catenary, the form the unloaded cables take before the deck is added). This can be seen from the constant gradient increase with linear (deck) distance, this increase in gradient at each connection with the deck providing a net upward support force. Combined with the relatively simple constraints placed upon the actual deck, this makes the suspension bridge much simpler to design and analyze than cable-stayed bridge design, where the deck is in compression. C. Suspension types The suspension in older bridges may be made from chain or linked bars, but modern bridge cables are made from multiple strands of wire. This is for greater redundancy; a few flawed strands in the hundreds used pose very little threat, whereas a single bad link or eyebar (metal bar) can eliminate the safety margin or bring down the structure outright. III. Conclusion
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Suspension Bridge. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Request for Proposal

Student Name Student Address Student email address August 9, 2010 Instructor Name Name of School Address of School Dear Instructor: Submitted for review is the proposal regarding the request to bring in outside trainers to train staff on the use of the Microsoft® Office Programs. In this report is the following information: * Business requirement * Schedule * Due Date for proposal * Instruction on how to submit proposal and method of submission * Instruction on who to contact with question * The selection process. Thank you and we look forward to hearing from you regarding this request. Sincerely, Enclosure: Proposal A. INTRODUCTION 1. 1 Purpose The purpose of this proposal is to request that outside trainers come in to train the staff on the use of Microsoft® Office programs. 1. 2 Requirements The staff will require training on latest Microsoft® Office Professional programs. The budget of required training will be $50,000 and will need training on the following programs: a. Word b. Excel c. PowerPoint d. OneNote . Outlook f. Publisher g. Access B. Schedules for Training Training will be September 1-3, 2010. This mandatory 24 hours training will take place from the hours of 8 a. m. to 4 p. m. 1. 1 Proposal Deadline and Method Submission All proposals are due no later than Monday, August 23, 2010 by 5 p. m. Submission for this proposal is by certified mail to the following personnel and address: Student Name, student address. We are requesting that four copies be included in your submission. 1. 2 Contact Information Question regarding this proposal is via email: Student email address Or phone at student telephone number. 1. 3 Criteria for Selection The following is a list of requirement that we will be looking at during the selection process: a. Company has to be in existence for five or more years. b. Company must use the product that is being train on. c. Company is required to show educational background information on staff member conducting the training. d. Company is required to show a list of contracts completed. As well any outside recommendation. C. Terms And Conditions The terms and condition are clear for this proposal. Selection for this proposal is based on the number of years the company has been in business, also whether the companies use Microsoft® Office. The company employees are required to have the educational background on the programs. The companies are required to show a list of their contracts completed along with any outside recommendation received from those contracts. Failure to submit those items will result in a none selection of your company.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Request for Proposal. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Fuman Agric Agricultural Products Fruit Juice Manufacturer

Fuman Agric Agricultural Products Fruit Juice Manufacturer Fuman Agricultural Products is a medium-scale fruit juice manufacturer who started in 1995 by taking over the old Lafia Canning Factory established in 1954. The major raw materials of the company are fresh fruits such as orange, guava, pineapple, mango, and passion fruit. Main production lines are natural fruit juices i. e. , orange, pineapple, guava, in 1l and 250ml tetrapak packages; others are canned fruits. Installed capacity is 5t/h but the company presently produces at 10 percent of its installed capacity. Fruits are procured locally by the company's purchasing manager and from independent traders with informal links to the company. Fruits are purchased from Oyo, Osun, Ekiti, Ondo and Edo States in western Nigeria; Cross River in eastern Nigeria, and Nasarawa, Kaduna and Benue States in the Middle Belt. No formal contracts are made with suppliers. The company determines the price and usually offers the average between the seasonal and off-seasonal price. The company prefers to buy in the glut season when prices are low since fresh fruit market demand is saturated. In May 2002 pineapples were purchased at about US$ 800/tonne. The processor may provide transport and in some cases provides some pre-finance to traders. Direct links to the farming community are limited to former cooperative groups that had worked with the former Lafia Canning Factory in the western States mentioned above. In so doing, they provide soft loans, planting materials; equipment and other agricultural inputs while the farmer cooperative groups supply their produce to the company. The company reserves the right to discard poor quality products and the average annual prices are paid to farmers for their produce. At times when open market prices are better than company prices, farmers sell their produce in the open market. The company also goes farther field to purchase supplies directly from producers and agents at prevailing market prices from eastern and central Nigeria. The main constraint faced by the company is the availability of raw material. The farming sector is not geared for a continuous and stable supply to the factory. Competition from alternative markets especially from northern Nigeria (where these fruits are not usually grown) reduces the company's source of raw material supply. The company is presently making efforts to obtain concentrated juice supplies from Ghana and South America. Other constraints mentioned are high interest rates charged by commercial banks (32-35 percent pa) and notorious problems with electricity supplies. Several factors require strengthening. Appropriate staffing and a degree of decentralization in management structure are essential. Communication between the company and cooperative farmer groups and consultation especially with those inherited from the former Lafia Canning Company is vital to maintain a reliable supply of raw materials, particularly oranges. It is important that farmers work in partnership with the company and have a better understanding of their production system. This cannot be achieved without the appointment of a well-trained liaison and extension officer who speaks the local language, possesses appropriate interpersonal skills, and is preferably an indigene of the area. References Glover D. 1987. Increasing the benefits to smallholders from contract farming, problems for farmers' organizations and policy makers. World Development 15 (4):441 - 448. Goldsmith A. 1985. The private sector and rural development: can agribusiness help the small farmer. World Development 13 (10/11): 1125 - 1130. Idachaba F. S. 2000. Agricultural policy process in Africa: role of policy analysts, ECAPAPA Monograph Series 2, Eastern and Central Africa Programme for Agricultural Policy Analysis, A program of the Association for Strengthening Agricultural Research in Eastern and Central Africa (ASARECA), Entebbe Uganda. Kormawa P. M, Ezedinma C. I, Makinde K, and Adekunle A. 2002. Market-led Agricultural Technology Transfer and Commercialization in Nigeria, Proceedings of a National Stakeholders Workshop held at the International Institute of Tropical Agriculture, Ibadan 13 to 15th March 2002, Rural Sector Enhancement Program, International Institute of Tropical Agriculture, Ibadan, Nigeria. Manufacturers Association of Nigeria 1994. Nigeria Industrial Directory: Buyers' Guide to Made-in-Nigeria Products Manufacturers Association of Nigeria, Ikeja, Lagos. Manufacturers Association of Nigeria 2000. Half-Yearly Economic Review (July -. December, 1999), Manufacturers Association of Nigeria, Ikeja, Lagos. Manufacturers Association of Nigeria 2000. Half-Yearly Economic Review (January - June, 1999), Manufacturers Association of Nigeria, Ikeja, Lagos. Manufacturers Association of Nigeria 1999. Half-Yearly Economic Review (July - December, 1998), Manufacturers Association of Nigeria, Ikeja, Lagos. Manufacturers Association of Nigeria 1999b. MAN Half-Yearly Economic Review January - June, 1998), Manufacturers Association of Nigeria, Ikeja, Lagos. Marchet. J. M. Nasir, J, Ramachandran V, Shah M. K. , Tyler G. , Zhao L 2001. Results of the Nigeria Firm Survey, Regional Program on Enterprise Development, Africa Region, The World Bank, Draft for Review. Nigerian Institute of Social and Economic Research (NISER) 1999. A Characterization of industrial demand for major agricultural commodities in Nigeria, Ajakaiye D. O. and Akande S. O. (eds) Nigerian Institute of Social and Economic Research, Ibadan, Nigeria. Porter G. and Phillip-Horward K. 997. Comparing Contracts: An Evaluation of Contract Farming Schemes in Africa. World Development 25 (2) 227 - 238. Raw Materials Research and Development Council, 2000. Multi-Disciplinary Task Force Report of the Techno- Economic Survey on Food, Beverage and Tobacco Sector, RMRDC, Federal Ministry of Science and Technology, Abuja. Shaib B, A Aliyu, and J. S. Bakshi 1997. Nigeria: National Agricultural Research Strategy Plan: 1996 - 2010 Dept of Agricultural Sciences, Federal Ministry of Agriculture and Natural Resources, Abuja. ________________________________________
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Fuman Agric Agricultural Products Fruit Juice Manufacturer. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Coca Cola Analysis

A mission is the general expression of the overall purpose of the organisation which is in line with the values and expectations of major stakeholders and concerned with the scope and boundaries of the organisation. It is sometimes referred to in terms of what business are we in? E. g. be healthy and fit. The Coca-Cola Company Mission Our Mission is: •To refresh the world - in mind, body and spirit •To inspire moments of optimism - through our brands and actions, and •To create value and make a difference - everywhere we engage Is the desired future state of an organisation. It is an aspiration around which a strategist might seek to focus the attention of members of an organisation. E. g. To run the Dubai marathon. The Coca-Cola Company Vision To achieve our Mission, we have developed a set of goals, which we will work with our bottlers to deliver: Profit: Maximising return to shareowners while being mindful of our overall responsibilities. People: Being a great place to work where people are inspired to be the best they can be. Portfolio: Bringing to the world a portfolio of beverage brands that anticipate and satisfy people's desires and needs. Partners: Nurturing a winning network of partners and building mutual loyalty. Planet: Being a responsible global citizen that makes a difference. Values represent an individual’s core beliefs and tend to be deep-seated and relatively enduring. They tend to be learnt at an early age and passed on through generations. They form an underlying framework which guides an individuals contraction of the world, and their response to events in it. Typical underlying value systems may include the belief that it is wrong to get into debt; a belief that family is more important than work; and that it is important to be the winner of any competitive event. The term values should be distinguished from value. Economists describe value as the ratio of the benefit arising from product relative to its cost. The distinction between values and value is that an individuals value system influences the value they place on any particular object. A person with a alue system that rates security and reliability highly may place a high value on a car that is solidly built but not particularly attractive. Another person whose value system ranks recognition by others as being more important may place a higher value on a car which is not necessarily reliable, but has street credibility’. Although value systems tend to be deeply ingrained, they have a tendency to change through an individual’s life cycle. So it follows that the value system of a teenager is likely to be different to that of a young adult parent, and different again to an elderly retired person. The Coca-Cola Company Values Our shared values that we are guided by are: •Leadership •Passion •Integrity •Accountability •Collaboration •Innovation •Quality Goal The term goal means general aim in line with mission. It is quantitative in measure. E. g. losing weight and strengthen muscles. Summarized in the phrase "dream with a deadline,” a goal is an observable and measurable end result having one or more objectives to be achieved within a more or less fixed timeframe. In comparison, a 'purpose' is an intention (internal motivational state) or mission. Such goals for Coca Cola are, To Reduce child mortality in developing countries (UN Millennium Development Goal ). Coca-Cola water conservation goal In October 2008 Coca-Cola Company pledged to a 20 percent improvement in water efficiency over 2004 levels in its worldwide operations by 2012, saving some 50 billion liters of fresh water over projected use that year, reports WWF, which negotiated the agreement. Coca-Cola also announced a goal to reduce greenhouse gas emissions by 5 percent over 2004 levels for its operations in developed countries. While the target would amount to savings of 2 million tons of CO2 in 2015, it ignores emissions in developing countries where emissions are growing the fastest. Coca-Cola also reiterated its commitment to WWF's water conservation initiative that aims to protect important freshwater resources including the Yangtze, Mekong, Danube, Rio Grande/Rio Bravo, Lakes Niassa and Chiuta, the Mesoamerican Reef catchments, and rivers and streams in the southeastern United States. Coca-Cola has lately led a push to "green" operations, including reducing emissions, pollution, and water consumption. The company stepped up its efforts following a campaign by environmentalists in India who accused bottlers of depleting ground water supplies. Coca-Cola Recycling While PET has a high value as a recyclable in the marketplace, not enough material is recovered to meet the increasing demand for recycled content. To help bridge this gap and ensure ready access to recycled material, Coca-Cola Enterprises, Inc. , the largest Coca-Cola bottler in North America, and The Coca-Cola Company formed Coca-Cola Recycling LLC (CCR) in November 2006. CCR is dedicated to recovering and recycling Coca-Cola packaging materials used within the Coca-Cola system in the U. S. – including PET, aluminum, cardboard and plastic film. CCR will be developing cost-efficient solutions for reclaiming used beverage containers and will establish centralized recycling centers throughout the U. S. Expanded Partnership with Recycle Bank Coca-Cola also continues to expand its relationship with curbside collection organizations. Today, the Company announced an expanded partnership and investment in RecycleBank. RecycleBank currently operates in southern New Jersey, Delaware and Pennsylvania and will be launching service in upstate New York, Vermont and Massachusetts in the fall of 2007. RecycleBank plans to be in 100,000 homes by the end of 2007. The additional investment will support a national rollout of the RecycleBank program by 2009. RecycleBank leverages new technology and innovative consumer incentives to substantially increase household recycling participation and rates. Since its launch in 2003, RecycleBank has driven recycling rates in Philadelphia from 15 percent to more than 50 percent, and household participation from 30 percent to 90 percent. “RecycleBank makes recycling easier and more convenient for consumers,” said Scott Vitters, director of sustainable packaging, The Coca-Cola Company. While consumers reap the rewards of recycling through RecycleBank incentives, businesses also benefit through the increased collection of valuable, reusable materials like PET. ” Recycled PET Merchandise Program Coca-Cola also has introduced a line of merchandise made out of recycled PET bottles. The products feature playful, pithy slogans such as “I’m wearing post-consumer waste,” and “My white t-shirt is green”, and is designed to inspire action by making every bottle count. Coca-Cola apparel and consumer products made with recycled PET are available online at www. cokestore. com and at the New World of Coca-Cola in Atlanta. The line will be available in retail locations across the United States later this year. Sustainable Package Design Coca-Cola has a long history of designing packages with the environment in mind. It commissioned the first study to examine whole environmental impact of a package in 1969 and introduced the first food grade plastic bottle made with recycled material in 1991. Since then, Coca-Cola has continued to improve the resource efficiency of its packages. For example: •Aluminum cans, glass and plastic bottles have been reduced by 33 percent, 57 percent and 32 percent respectively since their introductions.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Coca Cola Analysis. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

The Three Theoretical Approaches

Theoretical Essay The Three Theoretical Approaches 22. 04. 08 Introduction In this essay I have looked at the three theoretical approaches, The Person Centred, The Psychodynamic and The Cognitive Behaviourist approaches. I have done this through the theoretical knowledge gained in class and through my own personal research, triad/diad practice and my personal life and experiences and how they relate to the theory. I have taken each theory, and the knowledge I have gained, and how this relates to me in my own life. I have looked at the triad/diad practice I have undertaken for each and given examples of how I have demonstrated theory through the use of skill, also how this contributed to the process of the counsellor/client relationship. The Person-centred Approach The Person-Centred Approach was developed by the psychologist Dr Carl Rogers. It’s a humanistic, non-directive model of therapy, in which the therapist facilitates the client in the here and now working through their issues by walking with them. In Roger’s theory he believed that there were six conditions that are necessary for therapeutic change to take place. This includes The Three Core Conditions: • Congruence is being a genuine whole person who is comfortable with their own personal experiences, positive and negative. • Empathy, to sense the client’s private world and walk along side them through their issues, without over identifying and making the session about the counsellor. • Unconditional Positive Regard, no conditions of acceptance, being as open to the negative aspect of the client as the positive. There is also the contract, developed between the client and the counsellor. The client should be incongruent and the counsellor should be congruent. The core conditions are said to be a way of being and can be demonstrated by the counsellor through the use of skills such as: • Paraphrasing is when the counsellor relays spoken content back to the client in their own words, or the counsellors to give a different or better perspective. • Reflecting is when the counsellor senses the emotions behind spoken content and relays them back to the client. • Summarising is when the counsellor takes all the threads of the session at any point and puts them all together; it is used to assist the client in making connections. Silence is used to assist reflection on content and that may have been experienced during the session. Giving the client time to think, process feelings and compose themselves and find the words to go on. It can be uncomfortable, but being able to sit with it will benefit the process. • Minimal encouragers are used when the client is identifying their concerns, they can be as simple as a nod of the head to show that the counsellor is following what has been said, or simple yes, and, then, or even repeating a simple phrase. • Open questions are used to help the client open up and explore there issues. These are question that can not be answered with a simple yes or no. by the way that the question is worded the counsellor can facilitate the client in exploring aspects of there issues from a deeper or new prospective, in the hope of bringing clarity. • Focusing is a very important part of the counselling process. Where in most settings there are limitations on time and duration the counsellor need to structure the sessions into a beginning where the introductions/greeting are done and when the contract can be set and can be amended, also the client will be able to identify their concerns. The middle of the session is where the issues are explored with demonstration of theory by the use of skills. The ending is when the counsellor will whine down the session by informing the client that time is coming to an end and give them enough time to prepare for this and if there is anything that they need to say they will have the time to do so, therefore the client is not left hanging or in a bad place. With the limitations the counsellor need to be able to identify and focus on specific concerns and facilitate the client in working on this before moving on, but also giving the client the control of the session. There are also the five theoretical strands that go with the person centred approach. The Self concept, how we feel about ourselves. Conditions of Worth, the external influences/forces that strengthen our own self concepts. If you have low self esteem and you do things to place and get the approval of others. The Organismic Self, the true you, to reach your potential and be all you can be. The Locus of Evaluation, there is external, incongruent and doing to please others rather than to please themselves, and internal, pleasing yourself, Self-actualization: reaching your full potential. When you do what pleases you it brings you closer to your Organismic self, the true and congruent you. You extend and demonstrate the core conditions when it comes to the consequences brought on by pleasing yourself; you need to extend the 3 core conditions to the consequences and to yourself according to Carl Rogers. The Conditions of Growth, which are the 3 Core Conditions, Congruence, Empathy and Unconditional Positive Regard. During triad/diad sessions I was given the opportunity to demonstrate theory with the use of skills, here is an example: I gave a short contract covering time, confidentiality and its limits, qualifications, complaints and supervision. Claire was happy to continue and began to talk about bereavement. She told me that an old friend that she had not seen for some time had passed away and she had attended her funeral last Tuesday. I got the feeling that this is what I had sensed earlier when she had said it was fine about me not being there last week and I felt that I had really let her down. I tried to block out these feelings so that could try and facilitate her for this session. She talked of her feelings at the funeral and not understanding why she had been so upset. I tried to follow her and see where it was going and we managed to go a bit deeper into her own feelings about her own life and where it was going. With the short amount of time we had I could not help my feeling of guilt coming back and as my client was talking about it also it was hard for me to get away from it. I felt that we made a little progress, the client came to a realisation in regards to some of the emotions that she was feeling and I think that is why she told me after that things had gone better than she thought would. I was happy to hear this, but still carried the feeling I had earlier. The Psychodynamic Approach We looked at Psychodynamics briefly during the course. The first week we watched a person centred video and had to identify the psychodynamic aspect in it. In this model of counselling the counsellor works with the clients past and relates it to the present issues or behaviour. We looked at Sigmund Freud’s free association the tutors gave us a demonstration. The client was stood with their back to the counsellor and was able to talk about anything that came into their head. It happened to be a cold dark night and it brought them back to their childhood and walking home from school on their own and the emotions that brought up for them and now how protective they are of their own children. The theory looked at in the Psychodynamic Approach and some of its theory: • Transference, where the client sees behaviour of another in someone and then begins to treat them as they would the other person e. g. the counsellor talks to the client as their mother had, so they then begin to treat and talk to the counsellor as they would their mother. • Counter-Transference, this is when the counsellor or person takes on the role that has been transferred to them. • Defense Mechanism, the ways in which we protect ourselves. The mind will find a way of protecting us from thoughts and feeling that we can’t deal with. The conscious mind, includes everything that we are awareness of and comfortable processing and we are able to think and talk about in a rationally. • The Unconscious, this is where all the negative thoughts and feelings are stored. It is said that even though they are repressed they can still have an influence on behaviour. During the weeks we looked at psychodynamics we were then asked to think of a time age and use that for our dyads. My client was age 14, thinking of family Christmases with her father, who had recently past away for a heart attack. She was the youngest child and had been really close to her father and missed him so much. I did not feel the need to ask questions, but I used lots of minimal encouragers and summarized that at this time of the year she was feeling quite overwhelmed by sadness. Personally I found this way of practicing psychodynamics very uncomfortable. I had always thought that this model of therapy would work best for me as I am a believer that my past has shaped me into the woman that I am today. When I was put into the client’s chair I felt really uncomfortable. I have never been the type of person that was comfortable with anyone being behind me and even though I have known my peer counselor for some time now I really felt like I was not safe. The Cognitive Behaviourist Approach We looked at CBT for three weeks and focused on Ellis and Beck. Albert Ellis first introduced behavioural therapy in the 1950’s, his theory Rational Emotive Behavioral Therapy, known as REBT. Later in the 1960’s Aaron T. Beck introduced Cognitive Therapy. In our first session we observed a video of Ellis in a CBT counselling session. This new approach was very different to The Person Centred Approach, directive and in the clients face. The focus in the session was on behaviour rather that emotion, and challenging these behaviours. The concepts behind the theory are: • Negative Automatic Thoughts (NATS), developed by Beck, this is the thought just pop into our heads when we are in certain situations and have a big influence our behaviour. These it is believed can be challenged. • Core Beliefs, the beliefs that we have about ourselves that come to us in early life from the information that we get from others. If your told to shut up all the time as a child you may grow up to believe that you are not important and become shy and not want to talk to other, because you believe that they will not want to hear what you have to say. • Underlying Assumptions, lie between the NATS and the core beliefs and are deeply related to acceptance, competence and control. The way that we feel about ourselves, and needing to be loved, to accomplish, and cannot ask for help. In a counselling session these are challenged with the use of lots of Socratic questions, these challenge the client, who said that? Where is the proof? Why can’t you? There is also the setting of goals and homework so the client can feel they are actively doing something and place less focus on their negative behaviour. We did a case study and we had to chose for 8 cases an then use the ABC technique developed by Albert Ellis to identify which processes developed the irrational beliefs, by putting the information into three column table. • A - Activating Event or objective situation. The first column records the objective situation, that is, an event that ultimately leads to some type of high emotional response or negative dysfunctional thinking. B - Beliefs. In the second column, the client writes down the negative thoughts that occurred to him or her. • C - Consequence. The third column is for the negative disturbed feelings and dysfunctional behaviors that ensued. The negative thoughts of the second column are seen as a connecting bridge between the situation and the distressing feelings. The third column C is next explained by describing emotions or negative thoughts that the client believes are caused by A. These could be anger, anxiety or sorrow etc. A |B |C | |The activating event |The beliefs about the event |The consequences of the event | |As a child Jesse would have closed question|Jesse felt that he was not trying hard |Jesse was left with low self esteem and | |sessions over the dinner table from his |enough and that he deserved the questioning|lack of ambition, in his mind it was clear | |father about what he had learned that day |and remarks that followed. He felt that he |to him that he was not good enough and | |at school and he would freeze and forget |was letting his father down (fear factor). |would never make it. | |everything and not be able to answer. His | | | |father would tell him over and over that if| | | |he could not do better he will never amount| | | |to anything or get anywhere in life. This | | | |lead to him dreading seeing his father’s | | | |car in the drive. | | | |The event, this can not be changed. NATs, core beliefs, assumptions |Consequences | | |Ellis believes that by challenging the core|Show they can change their behaviour | | |beliefs and Negative Automatic Thought the | | | |attitude of the client can be changed | | Dyads were practiced here is an example: My client was a female how was experiencing some problems within her relationship. She had noticed that her partner of late had been talking about his brother’s girlfriend a lot of the time. This had had a serious effect on her confidence and lead to her feeling a little jealousy. She acknowledged that she had an ongoing issue with her weight. Q & A Are you jealous? No I really like her, but envious of her style Is it just her style or is it her personality etc? She is very happy with her life; she just thinks that it is the way she looks. Do you think that your partner likes her? She was positive that he does not like her in that way. Are you comfortable with the way you look? No. Well you look very comfortable to me. Would you like to change your style, maybe dressing a little more glamorous? Yes Ok we will try that for homework and tell me how it works out next week. Supervision Supervision is a British Association of Counselling & Psychotherapy ethical requirement, at all levels of counselling and psychotherapy. The BACP is the overseeing body for the practice in this country and are there to assist in many areas, not only for counsellors, but for the client also. As well as supervision for counsellors they also deal with personal development, complaints etc. Supervision is time to sit and talk over any concerns that you may have from sessions, with consideration for confidentiality. There is also the case of referrals and harm to self or others, in this case supervisors are needed to advise the counsellor the next step, but all this should be explained to the client during the contract. Supervisors can also help the counsellor with issues that may arise during sessions, not dissimilar to a counselling session the supervisor is there to assist the counsellor work through their process, positive and negative. Summary I feel that all three of the approaches are very different, but work well with various clients. I think it is a matter of finding the theory that is right for the client. Just being introduced to CBT and Psychodynamics, there is defiantly something there and I believe that a combination of the three could go far, using what is appropriate for the client. References Books: Milne. Aileen. , (2003), Teach Yourself Counselling, London, Hodder Education Websites: https://www. bapca. org. uk/ 19. 04. 08 https://www. personcentered. com/pcch1. html 19. 04. 08 https://psychology. about. com/od/historyofpsychology/a/psychodynamic. htm 19/04/08 https://en. wikipedia. org/wiki/Cognitive_behavioral_therapy 19/04/08
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

The Three Theoretical Approaches. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Export of Wine to Malaysia

|Contents |Page | |Executive summary of main findings of report ……………………………… |3 | |Introduction to the report ……………………………………………………….. |4 | | |5 – 11 | |Product/service and brief company background including why it might consider overseas expansion | | |……………………………………………………. | |What are Rose s | | |Examples of some Australian Rose s | | |The Yarra Valley and Yarrawood Estate Pty Ltd | | |Malaysia and Wines; The Export Market Target | | |Malaysia and Wines; Market Trends | | |Malaysia and Wines; Market Opportunities | | |Malaysia and Wines; A Competitive Environment | | |Malaysian Importing, Distribution, Wholesaler Companies | | | |12 | |Brief introduction to chosen country ………………………………………….. | | |Malaysia in Brief | | | |13 – 15 | |Economic Analysis ………………………………………………………………… | | |5. 1 Malaysia’s Economy Overview | | |Wine in Malaysia; a brief economic outlook | | | |16 – 17 | |Political & Legal Analysis …………………………………………………………. | |Malaysian Market Requirements | | |Tariffs, regulations and customs | | | |18 -19 | |Cultural Analysis …………………………………………………………………… | | |7. 1 Wine Drinkers in Malaysia | | |7. 2 The Economy, GDP and Wine | | |Discussion of contemporary or other environmental issues ……………… |20 | |Conclusions ………………………………………………………………………….. 21 | |Reference list ……………………………………………………………………….. |22 – 25 | 1. Executive Summary This report was written to examine the export of Yarrawood Tall Tales Rose wines into Malaysia. The research draws attention to the fact that Malaysia’s wine consumption is growing due to the following; 1. As at 2009, the total retail sales of food and beverages were estimated at US$11 billion (USDA Foreign Agricultural Service 2009) 2. Despite it being a Muslim country, the Malaysian wine market value is estimated at A$119 million where in 2008 a total 6. 7 million litres of wine was exported with Australia supplying 3. 1 million litres of the total import (AUSTRADE). 3. Malaysia is one of the more affluent nations with a GDP per-capita of about US$6,807 in 2007. 4. Malaysia’s economy is presently growing between 3. 4% – 6. 3%. 5. Approximately 97% of the working population continues to be gainfully employed. Most importantly, over 60% of the population are in the middle to high income group with a growing purchasing power. (USDA Foreign Agricultural Service 2009) It is recommended that in order to ensure success in the Malaysian market we proceed with the following; 1. Partner with a local established distributor as they already have market presence, experience with the customs department and related legalities 2. Enter the market offering Yarrawood Tall Tales Rose wines due to Rose wines being limited in availability, variety and supply. 3. To engage services of local sales and public relations company to promote out variety of wine to the general public via press releases, wine tasting sessions, give away and corporate gifts 2. Introduction A growth in wine consumption has increased significantly in the last five years in Malaysia (Australian Wine and Brandy Corporation). Despite it being a Muslim country the minority Chinese and Indian races have opened up this market for the importing of wine.

This has sparked an interest with the large wine exporters from France, Italy, Chile, South Africa, Spain, Portugal and Australia. According to the Australian Wine and Brandy Corporation, economic prosperity, more relaxed government policies, modern trends, increasing overseas travel and education, and the desire of internationally-educated graduates to retain lifestyles adopted while living abroad have all contributed towards an increasing westernisation of lifestyles. This report will focus solely on the export of the Yarrawood Tall Tales 2008 Rose wine from one of Victoria’s wines region, the Yarra Valley to Malaysia. (Yarrawood, 1996). The reasons for the specific export of the Rose wines are due mainly to its lack of variety and availability in the local market in Malaysia. Current dominating suppliers are from France and Italy which creates the possibility for Australian Roses to not only be exported but liked and gain market share. It is also best to collaborate with a local established distributor to gain market presence and penetration. 3. Product/service and brief company background including why it might consider overseas expansion 1. What are Rose s Rose s wines are described as gloriously alluring pinkish-reddish colour accompanied by fragrantly fresh and uplifting aromas. Their tastes are usually a blend of or inspired by fruits such as strawberries, watermelons, cherries, raspberries, lemons and so on (Ippolito. P, 2010). They are the perfect antidote to a summer’s beverage which makes it perfect for the export to Malaysia due to its all year round tropical climate. 2. Examples of some Australian Rose s Some of Australia’s Rose s wines as compiled by Paul Ippolito are

• Annies Lane Clare Valley Rose

• Bremerton Racy Rose

• Charles Melton Rose Of Virginia

• Devils Lair Fifth Leg Rose

• Dominique Portet Fontaine Rose

• Dowie Doole Rose

• Gibbston Valley Blanc de Pinot Noir

• Jacob’s Creek Reserve Shiraz Rose

• Juniper Crossing Rose

• Mount Majura Rose

• Palandri Baldavis Estate Rose

• Parri Estate Rose

• Penley Estate Over the Moon Rose

• Pepperjack Grenache Rose

• Preece Rose

• Shottesbrooke McLaren Vale Merlotte Rose

• Wyndham Estate Bin 505 Shiraz Rose Yering Station Pinot Noir Rose 3. The Yarra Valley and Yarrawood Estate Pty Ltd There are currently 55 wineries in the Yarra Valley region (Melbourne Wine Region 2007), where some of Australia’s Rose wines are produced. They include boutique and commercial wineries alike; depending on their production volume, market concentration and size of vineyards. The decision to export the Rose wines specifically from this area was mainly due to logistics, costs and accessibility as La Chic Pty Ltd is based out of Melbourne, Victoria.

Our company have recently collaborated with Yarrawood Estate Pty Ltd to export their range of Yarrawood Tall Tales Rose wine to Malaysia. This strategic partnership was brought together by our respectively specialities; La Chic Pty Ltd with its market insights and knowledge of Malaysia that would mesh perfectly with Yarrawood’s production of their award winning Rose wines and also their exposure and experience in exporting wine overseas via Alibaba. com (AliBaba, 1999-2010) The Yarrawood Tall Tales Rose wines are harvested from Cabernet Sauvignon and Merlot grapes on the Yarrawood estate. With the right climate, temperature and soil in the Yarra Valley have resulted in fully ripe and extremely flavoursome fruit.

The Yarrawood Tall Tales Rose wines are distinctive as it incorporates flavours of Rose water and aromas of mulberry, strawberry and citrus fruits that provide a luscious lead into a balanced palate finished by guava and tropical fruit. This wine is best enjoyed young when the fruit flavours are freshest. The production time of this wine is most economical due to the fact that it does not need to be aged for a long time hence the quick turnaround of production that would ensure constant supply. This wine has won the Bronze Award in the Victoria wine Show 2009. It contains 13. 50% Alcohol and was bottled in September 2009 (Yarrawood, 1996). 4. Malaysia and Wines; The Export Market Target As mentioned earlier, the lack of supply and variety of the Rose wines had led to our desire to export them to Malaysia. Currently, red wine dominates the Malaysian market with almost 80% of volume sales. They include Cabernet at 28% which is the most popular red variety followed by Shiraz at 18%, which is largely attributed to the popularity of Australian wines.

Based on the Australian Wine and Brandy Corporation, the female drinking population in Malaysia prefer white wines which include Chardonnay at 36% and Sauvignon Blanc 21% as the most popular white varietals. Australia, possibly due to its geographical location has been the number one wine exporter to Malaysia since overtaking France in 2001 with an estimated market share of 45-50% (Australian Wine and Brandy Corporation). Currently, sales of wines are limited and availability are via a selected few retail outlets such as supermarkets, hypermarkets and several specialist wine stores which are both on and off line. Direct wine sales have also been increasing in volume especially with these specialist wine stores operating online businesses. Besides these channels, many restaurants and hotels are host wine tasting sessions, which are leading to increased awareness and appreciation of wines. (Australian Wine and Brandy Corporation) 5. Malaysia and Wines; Market Trends Before the emergence of wine as a lifestyle choice drink, brandy and whisky were the most popular alcoholic beverage in Malaysia. Despite it being a Muslim country, the Malaysian wine market value is estimated at A$119 million where in 2008 a total 6. 7 million litres of wine was exported with Australia supplying 3. million litres of the total import (AUSTRADE). This goes to show that Malaysia is and would be a profitably market to penetrate especially if we are able to gain and sustain our market share with our Yarrawood Tall Tales Rose wines. There are several factors that contribute to this growing market;

• A majority of Malaysians due to overseas education and exposure are now more affluent, sophisticated and well-travelled consumers.

• As the British colonial days, once again wine is and has become a symbol of cultural refinement in Malaysia

• Malaysia has attracted a sizeable expatriate community

• There is a steady flow of tourists Once again due to overseas education and exposure, there are now a large number of younger wine drinkers who regard the consumption of wine as being modern and upmarket

• Wine has become the “healthier” choice compared to hard liquor like brandy and whisky (AUSTRADE) 6. Malaysia and Wines; Market Opportunities As discussed, Malaysia is a growing market for the exporting of wines and especially Rose wines due to its lack and limited array of variety and availability.

The numbers of wine drinkers will increase with the aid of direct and indirect exposures via;

• Regular showcasing and promotions of food-producing countries by five-star hotels in which wines are often one of the main items featured.

• Wine tasting events that incorporate lessons or with cooking classes.

• Feature articles in the local media. (AUSTRADE) Social media sites such as Facebook, Twitter and YouTube that offer streamed online wine tutorials such as the excellent case of Wine Actually. 7. Malaysia and Wines; A Competitive Environment Despite the imposed taxes and tariffs there are affordable wine ranges especially from the “New World” countries such as Australia, Argentina, Chile and South Africa. These wines are in the range of RM35. 00 – RM50. 00 approximately A$12. 50 – A$17. 85 (using the exchange rate of RM2. 80 to A$1. 00) per bottle which is cheap considering as mentioned tariffs and taxes (AUSTRADE). The target markets for this price range are the fresh graduates and new entrants into the workforce mainly due to income levels. Moving on to the next level which is the mid-price wines which would range between RM60. 00–RM110. 00 approximately A$21. 40 – A$39. 00 per bottle. These ranges of wines are mainly dominated by the Australian and Chilean wines. However, the South African wines are now offered in more variety and good value which is becoming a growing segment and a competitor to be reckoned with (AUSTRADE). The target markets for this price range are the young professionals also sometimes dubbed as the “yuppies”, returning home Malaysians from overseas and some expatriates.

The premium priced wines range anywhere from RM110. 00 and above which are mainly dominated by Old World producers and few selected wines from Australia and Chile. These are the French, Italian, Spanish and American producers which have made a presence in the local market. Unfortunately, Australian exporters have been facing difficulty penetrating this segment as it is a segment mainly dominated by mature drinkers. Mature drinkers tend to shift towards Old World wines once they have acquired the taste of New World wines (AUSTRADE). These mature drinkers comprise of the more affluent, high income, possibly middle to old aged, and the expatriates. 8. Malaysian Importing, Distribution, Wholesaler Companies Our major competition, possible business partners and distributors in Malaysia; Luen Heng;

• Do not distribute Rose wines. Australia Wine Brands; Yering Station, Miranda, Tim Gramp, Goundrey, Lazy Lizard, Brokenwood, Parker Coonawarra.

• New Zealand Brands – Kim Crawford (only Sav Blanc) Asiaeuro

• Carry red and white wines.

• Also have 2 Sparkling wines; 1 of which is a Brut Rose .

• 1 dessert wine. Casa Vino

• Sells 5 types of Rose s from Italy, France and South Africa

• Large selection of red and white wines

• Own retail outlets along with franchising opportunities Wine Malaysia

• Very limited number of wines

• Unattractive web design

• Low costs set up Wine Actually

• Very interesting set up.

• Owned and run by 2 overseas educated wine enthusiasts

• Excellent use of social media such as Facebook by incorporated wine tutorials on their Wine TV. They sell online without a retail store with pick-ups are welcomed

• They run wine appreciation classes.

• Sell affordable wines with ratings.

• Offer 4 types of Rose s from Italy and France.

Denise Wines

• Reds, whites & sparkling – no Rose

• One of the better established & modern wine distributors

• Operating since 2001

• Many retail outlets and possibly the biggest wine retailer in Malaysia. The Wine Club

• Rose s from France & Italy only

• Provides membership similar to Wine Selectors in Australia. E Guide

• A similar website like Yellow Pages providing a list of businesses and shops selling alcohol which would have procured their supply from the companies listed here. | | |Nam Lee | |Only 1 Australian wine brand | 4. Brief Introduction to Chosen country 4. 1 Malaysia in Brief Malaysia gained its independence from Britain on 31 August 1957 and was formed in 1963 when the former British colonies of Singapore and the East Malaysian states of Sabah and Sarawak. However in 1965 it was Singapore’s secession from the Federation.

During the 22-year term of Prime Minister Mahatir Mohamad (1981-2003), Malaysia experienced growth and was successful in diversifying its economy from dependence on exports of raw materials to expansion in manufacturing, services, and tourism. The population of Malaysia as at July 2010 was at 25,715,819 with an urban rate of 70% of the total population. You can say that it’s an urbanised nation due to this percentage. The major races in Malaysia are the Malays at 50. 4% followed by the Chinese at 23. 7%. The indigenous population are at 11% mainly in and from East Malaysia.

Finally we have the Indian at 7. 1%, and other races at 7. 8%. Malaysia is a Muslim country as the Malay race prescribes to Islam at 60. 4%. The other religions are Buddhism at 19. 2% and with a Christians at 9. 1% and lastly Hinduism at 6. 3% (CIA World Fact Book, 2010). 5. Economic Analysis 5. 1 Malaysia’s Economy Overview Malaysia transformed from a producer of raw materials into an emerging multi-sector economy (CIA World Fact Book, 2010). The government have successfully attracted foreign investment into the country mainly due to its stable political climate and reasonable costs of labour and materials. Its geographic location is also strategic business as its neighbours Singapore and Thailand are stable, its on the shipping route and has good climate all year round. According to the CIA World Fact Book (2010), the Gross Domestic Product (GDP) in relation to the Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) was at $383. 6 billion in 2009 and ranked 30th in the world. Despite the government’s efforts to wean off exports, the wine market would still have it place as Malaysia is not a wine producer nor are its neighbours. Because of this the market will only continue to grow. As at 2009, the total retail sales of food and beverages were estimated at US$11 billion. According to the USDA Foreign Agricultural Service (2009), the forecast for this sector is likely to grow by around 10 percent per annum over the next three to five years. In 2007, Malaysia imported a total of US$ 5. 1 billion of food and beverage products. Food imports have been positively growing on an average of over 20 percent per annum over the past few years and are expected likely to grow at similar rates over the next five years (USDA Foreign Agricultural Service 2009). 5. 2 Wine in Malaysia; a brief economic outlook Competition in the sector (USDA Foreign Agricultural Service 2009 page 20) |Product |Major Supply Sources |Strengths of key |Strengths of key | | | |supply countries |supply countries | |Wine Import: |1. Australia – 46% |Australia has developed |Malaysia does not | |7 million liters |2. France – 13% |a higher presence in the |produce any grape | |US$ 42. 5 million |3. USA – 11% |market because of its |wine. | |(CIF value) | |price competitive New | | | | |World grape wines and | | | | |strong brand presence. | | | | | | | | |France dominates the | | | | |food service market and | | | | |competes on quality and | | | | |price. | | | | | | | | |USA supplies well known | | | | |brands of New | | | | |World wines to both the | | | | |retail and food | | Category A: Products Present in the Market That Have Good Sales Potential (USDA Foreign Agricultural Service 2009 page 26) Product |2003 |2007 |5 year |Import |Import |Market | |category |Imports |Imports |Average |Tariff Rate |Tariff Rate |attractiveness | | | | |Annual | | |for USA | | | | |Import | | | | | | | |Growth | | | | | | | |Rate | | | | |Wine |4 million |7 million |15 % |Import duty |Wine is |Category A. | | |litres |litres |growth per |of RM23 |increasingly |Opportunities | | |US$ 20 |US$ |annum. |per liter for |being |continue to | | |million |42. 5 |Fast |sparkling |consumed by |exist for US | | |(CIF |million |growing |wine. the younger |exporters to | | |value) |(CIF |market, |Import duty |generation of |expand this | | | |value) |particularly |of RM7 per |adult urban |market for | | | | |demanded |liter for |Malaysian |their new | | | | |at weddings |other |Chinese and |world wines as | | | | |and other |wines. |Indians, |increasing | | | | |major |Excise Duty |particularly |number of | | | | |celebration |of 15% and |those educated |young | | | | |as more |RM34/Ltr |abroad and/or |Malaysians | | | | |purchasers |for |are well travelled. acquire a taste | | | | |switch to |sparkling | |for wines as | | | | |wine |wine or | |opposed to | | | | |(sparkling |15% and | |whiskey and | | | | |and non-sparkling) |RM 12/Ltr | |brandy. | | | | |from |for other | | | | | | |spirits. |grape | | | | | | | |wines. | | | 6. Political & Legal Analysis 6. 1 Malaysian Market Requirements First, the trading environment for wine is not difficult to negotiate in Malaysia. The main thing to ensure is that a company strictly follows the labelling regulations.

One of the main things with labelling is that it clearly states that it is an alcoholic beverage for the protection of Malaysia’s Muslim consumers. The Government also imposes three taxes on wine imports. (Australian Wine and Brandy Corporation 2008) 6. 2 Tariffs, regulations and customs Should we engage in a local distributor they would need to obtain an import licence from the Royal Customs and Excise Department of Malaysia. All relevant shipping and negotiable documents, including the pro-forma invoice, bills of lading and packing lists should be forwarded to the importer immediately after shipment (AUSTRADE). According to AUSTRADE, there are no import quotas or restrictions imposed by the Malaysian Government on wine and brandy presently. However, all liquor shipments entering the country are subject to customs clearance and duties.

Its is customary for the Customs and Excise Department of Malaysia to remove one bottle from each case to assess the alcohol content, invariably affecting landed prices. Current import duty for still wines in containers holding two litres or less is RM7. 00 per litre and a 15 per cent Valorem Tax on the CIF + import duty value. Additionally, there is an excise duty of RM12. 00 per litre. At the end there is an additional five per cent sales tax on the total value. AUSTRADE) As mentioned earlier, labelling is a important element to the alcohol beverages industry in Malaysia. The detailed guidelines are obtainable from the Department of Public Health Malaysia where it legislates that the label must include the following information:

• The specific description of the product

• The alcohol content stating the words ‘ARAK MENGANDUNGI – % ALKOHOL’

• The primary ingredients used in production

• A font size of 12 points must be used to inform Muslims, as non-alcoholic sparkling grape juice and other fruit juices are packaged in similar bottles. (AUSTRADE) 7. Cultural Analysis 7. 1 Wine Drinkers in Malaysia Historically, Malaysians have not been great wine drinkers but consumption has increased significantly in the past five years as hard liquor was more popular. However, economic prosperity, more relaxed government policies, modern trends, increasing overseas travel and education, and the desire of internationally-educated graduates to retain lifestyles adopted while living abroad have all contributed towards an increasing westernisation of lifestyles.

Muslim Malaysians do not drink alcohol, leaving the market for wine principally made up of Chinese, Indians, foreign expatriates and tourists (Australian Wine and Brandy Corporation) 7. 2 The Economy, GDP and Wine In Asia, Malaysia is one of the more affluent nations with a GDP per-capita of about US$6,807 in 2007. It is regarded as an upper middle income country with its rank of being the 8th wealthiest nation in East Asia. Due to its mixed economy strongly comprising mainly of agricultural, services and manufacturing industries it has now a firm foundation.

Its economy is presently growing between 3. 4% – 6. 3%. With its multi-racial population, it is a nation of multilinguals speaking at least two languages fluently including English which is widely used in the business environment. Malaysia has a young population comprising of 32% aged 15 years and below and 63. 5% in the 15 year to 64 year age range. Approximately 97% of the working population continues to be gainfully employed. Most importantly, over 60% of the population are in the middle to high income group with a growing purchasing power. (USDA Foreign Agricultural Service 2009) Its neighbour Singapore is by far more modernised mainly due to its high expatriate population. However, Malaysia is improving in becoming more sophisticated and modern by western standards.

Today, Malaysia provides a significant pool of active consumers who will continue to modernise their eating habits, leading to increasing consumption of imported food and beverages including the consumption of wine (USDA Foreign Agricultural Service 2009). 8. Discussion of contemporary or other environmental issues As mentioned above, the main consumers of wine would include the Chinese, Indian, Expatriate population including the constant inflow of tourists. Due to its strong economic growth, working and overseas educated population; Malaysia is the ideal hub for wine export. Contributing factors include both a stable economic and political climate conducive to the wine consumption an industry. 9. Conclusion The main conclusion that can be drawn is that with the correct business plan considering the legalities, the export of the Yarrawood Tall Tales Rose wines from Australia would be a successful venture. It should also be noted that its best to collaborate with a local established distributor as they have already established their presence and market penetration would be far easier and stronger. The higher the number of overseas educated, frequent travellers and expatriates, the higher the wine consumption in Malaysia will grow. With that the demand for our Yarrawood Tall Tales Rose wines would increase if and when positioned strategically. 10. Reference List AUSTRADE. (2010, May 6). Export Markets, Wines to Malaysia.

Retrieved August 7, 2010 from https://www. austrade. gov. au/Wine-to-Malaysia/default. aspx Australian Wine and Brandy Corporation. (2008). Malaysia. Retrieved August 7, 2010, from https://www. wineaustralia. com/australia/Default. aspx? tabid=1739 Australian Wine Sector Organisations. (2008). Retrieved August 10, 2010, from https://www. wineaustralia. com/australia/portals/2/pdf/wineorgflowchartNov2006. pdf Australian Wine and Brandy Corporation. (2008). Global Wine – Australia In Perspective. Retrieved August 7, 2010, from https://www. wineaustralia. com/australia/Portals/2/pdf/GlobalWineAustraliaInPer spective_CY_2008_updated. pdf CIA World Fact Book. (2010, August 19). Malaysia. Retrieved August 23, 2010 from https://www. cia. gov/library/publications/the-world-factbook/geos/my. html Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade.

Australia/NZ – ASEAN Free Trade Agreement Negotiations. Retrieved August 21, 2010 from https://www. dfat. gov. au/trade/fta/asean/index. html Royal Malaysian Customs Department. Retrieved August 21, 2010 from https://www. customs. gov. my/index. php/en USDA Foreign Agricultural Service. (2009, May 1). Global Agriculture Information Network – Malaysia Retail Sector Report. Retrieved August 8, 2010 from https://www. calwinexport. com/files/Malaysia%20Retail%20Food%20Sector%202009. pdf Yarra Valley Wine Growers Association. (2010). Retrieved August 9, 2010 from https://www. wineyarravalley. com/wineries-main/w2/i1001873/ Wikipedia. 2010, July 17). Rose. Retrieved August 21, 2010 from https://en. wikipedia. org/wiki/Ros%C3%A9 Aussie Wines Online Wines and Liquors.

Retrieved August 20, 2010 from https://www. aussiewines. com. au/AustralianWines_OnLine. php? wines=Rose Ippolito,P. (2010, February). Wine Talk, February 2007 – A Celebration of Rose Wines. Retrieved August 21, 2010 from https://www. femail. com. au/wine-talk-february07. htm Wine Industry Statistics. (2009) Wine Production.

Retrieved August 22, 2010 from https://www. winebiz. com. au/statistics/wine_production. asp Silkwood Wines. (2010). Australian Wines. Retrieved August 22, 2010 from https://www. silkwoodwines. com. u/web/Australian-Wines/White-Wine/Rose-Wines/Sweet-Rose-Wine/ Melbourne Wine Region. (2007). Melbourne Yarra Valley. Retrieved August 22, 2010 from https://www. melbourne-wine-regions. com. au/melbourne-yarra-valley-wine-region. html AliBaba. (1999-2010) Rose wine Suppliers. Retrieved August 22, 2010 from https://www. alibaba. com/trade/search? SearchText=rose+wine=AU=2=product_en=y Yarrawood Estate Vineyard. (1996). Retrieved August 22, 2010 from https://www. yarrawood. com. au/rose. html Malaysian Exporting Companies Luen Heng F Sdn. Bhd. Wine Importing and Distribution Company Malaysia.

Retrieved August 8, 2010 from https://www. luenheng. com/home. php Asia Euro Wines and Spirits Sdn. Bhd. Wine Importing and Distribution Company Malaysia. Retrieved August 8, 2010 from https://www. asiaeurowines. com. my/ourbrand. asp Casa Vino Sdn Bhd. Wine Distribution Company. Retrieved August 8, 2010 from https://www. casavino. com. my/wineries. asp Milawa Sdn Bhd. Wine Importing and Distribution Company Malaysia. Retrieved August 8, 2010 from https://www. milawa. com/f-main. html Nam Lee Cheong Sdn. Bhd. Wine Importing and Distribution Company Malaysia. Retrieved August 8, 2010 from https://www. namleecheong. com. my/company. php Wine Malaysia.

Online Wine Wholesaler. Retrieved August 8, 2010 from https://www. winemalaysia. com/

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Export of Wine to Malaysia. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Microsoft Financial Statement Analysis

PACE UNIVERSITY- ACC-615 DR. FINN Financial Statement Analysis IBM and Microsoft Bill Jacoby 4/20/2010 Financial Statement analysis for two comparable companies; IBM and Microsoft ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby Microsoft Corporation is the world’s largest software company. Microsoft has five operating segments; client, server and tools, online business services, Microsoft business division and entertainment and devices division. They develop personal computing software including the Windows operating system which runs 90% of all PC’s currently in use and the Office application suite and the XBOX video game system. International Business Machines Corporation was founded in 1911 and has grown and adopted over nearly a century. IBM is nick-named “big blue” by Wall Street in reference to it being a quintessential blue chip stock. IBM currently is an information technology company that has four business segments; hardware, financing (to facilitate clients acquisition of IBM systems, software and services), services, software. I thought these two dominant, global, large-cap technology companies would be interesting to compare. First let us review IBM. IBM has continued to deliver steady revenue over a long period of time. They offer a wide array of technology products. Since 2000 IBM has added $12 billion to pre-tax profit base, increased pre-tax margin 2. 5 times and quadrupled earnings per share and more than doubled free cash flow. They have achieved this by transforming over the last decade to emphasize software and services and reducing the hardware segment. IBM pursued this strategy a decade ago because they felt the global IT industry and broader world economies were changing to demand integration, computing architecture, data intelligence and innovation. IBM has successfully capitalized on recognizing the demand for products and services they had an advantage in. They exited some of their hardware business, selling the PC hardware business to Lenovo in 2005 for $1. 75 Billion. It is safe to say IBM has successfully evolved from a computer hardware vendor to a systems, services and software company. 1 ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby The pre-tax income produced in each segment of business was; hardware accounted for 7% or $1. 4 billion in pre-tax revenue, financing 9% ($1. billion), services 42% (8. 1 billion), software 42% (8. 1 billion). IBM is the second largest vendor in software sales behind Microsoft. IBM’s hardware products are now only mainframe computers, data storage systems and microprocessors. Hewlett Packard and Dell are the main competition in this segment. The software business focuses on operating systems, infrastructure management for data centers, application middleware for software development and deployment. They compete with Oracle and Microsoft in this segment. The services organization offers contracts to maintain and manage operations of large data centers, business process outsourcing, and developing custom systems. These contracts are typically five to seven years for the engagement and are a good source of predictable recurring revenues. They compete with Hewlett Packard, Accenture, Computer Sciences and Infosys in this business. IBM is the most trusted brand and it has a strong product portfolio which results in an edge winning new service business contracts. The management of IBM describes the business strategy for the next decade as “the decade of smart”. Here they outline the four major growth opportunities they are focusing on. The first of these is growth markets. For IBM this is clients across 170 countries where infrastructure is being invested in or upgraded. IBM estimates that $2 trillion has been earmarked for infrastructure improvements by governments across the world and they have a great opportunity to capture a large portion of this spending. The second is “analytics”. IBM has seven analytics solution centers around the world that employ 4,000 consultants, 200 mathematicians and analytics experts that will work on ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby service contracts. This seems to me as if it is not so much of a new idea but rather continuing to expand on their success in the services segment. Third is “cloud and nextgeneration data center”. The advent of cloud computing could throttle demand for IBM’s high end powerful hardware and software. Oracle and Sun are attempting to compete with IBM on this new frontier. Naturally the management discussion in the annual report and financial statements indicates that IBM believes this will be a great growth area for IBM. However, it is not going to be without competition but IBM should be one of the beneficiaries if cloud computing grows. The fourth and final growth opportunity IBM management outlines is called, “smarter planet”. In this growth opportunity they describe and map out 300 clients across the globe IBM categorizes in this smarter planet description. They are things such as; integrated baggage control and check-in system at Amsterdam airport, gas and oil seismic imaging efficiency improvements in Venezuela, an intelligent medical records system at Guan Dong Hospital in China. Again this does not sound like a new idea to me but rather a catchy marketing name for increasing and capitalizing on their success in the services segment. Clearly IBM likes these five to seven year highly profitable contracts. This is understandable and a good strategy that should be in the sweet spot for IBM. Turning now to Microsoft I was surprised to learn that total revenue for Microsoft was 58. 4 billion compared to 95. 8 billion for IBM in 2009. This surprised me probably because Microsoft is more visible to the consumer such as me. Microsoft is the largest vendor of software in the world. Microsoft was founded in 1975 and they currently generate revenue from a wide range of software products, services, consulting and hardware. Microsoft divides their business into five segments; client, server and tools, 3 ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby online services, business division, and entertainment and devices division. Microsoft recognizes there is a great deal of overlap and related business resulting from these segments and therefore they state that they should not be viewed of as easily separable businesses. The client segment is the segment that has the responsibility for Windows operating systems. Microsoft dominates the PC market in this regard, while Apple receives a good deal of press and is well known for its ipod and iphone, Microsoft is by far the dominant operating system used by computers. Other competitors are Red Hat and Sun Microsystems. The Windows operating system also faces competition from alternative platforms and new devices that may reduce consumer demand for traditional PC’s such as Google’s Android. The server and tools segment offers middleware software designed to support software applications built on the Windows Server operating system. The Windows Server based products include server platform, security software, development tools, database storage and also standalone software development lifecycle tools for software architects. Some of the products in this segment are; Microsoft SQL Server, Visual Studio, Silverlight and Microsoft Consulting Services. The competition for server products is Hewlett Packard, IBM and Sun Microsystems. In the enterprise computing solutions space IBM, Oracle and Sun are the main competitors. Numerous software vendors compete with the software in this segment for security, e-business servers, server management and server virtualization. Again, IBM and Hewlett Packard are the major competitors. The online services business consists of an online advertising platform with offerings for publishers and advertisers as well as online information offerings such as 4 ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby Bing, MSN portals and channels, email and instant messaging. Microsoft earns revenue primarily from online advertising in this segment but also through subscriptions and transactions from online generated services. The competition in this segment is AOL, Google, and Yahoo. Google dominates this business but Microsoft has made big gains with the Bing search engine and has a new business venture with Yahoo as Yahoo seems to be shrinking fast. Microsoft Business Division consists of the Microsoft Office system and Microsoft Dynamics business solution. The Office products account for 90% of this segment’s revenue of which 80% are business customers. Microsoft continues to dominate this space and has a large number of business people that are loyal and dedicated users of these software products. There are many software competitors such as Apple, Google, IBM, Oracle, Red Hat. There are quite a few other smaller ones Microsoft mentions in the management discussion of the annual report. Microsoft has a very strong and stable business in this space but it is a fiercely competitive arena. The Entertainment and Devices Division is responsible for developing, producing and marketing the XBOX video game system, accessories and games. This division also offers the Zune digital music and entertainment device. This business is highly competitive, those of us that are old enough remember that Atari was the first dominant video game maker, and they no longer exist. Nintendo and Sony are the competition in the game business with Apple being the dominant player in the music device space. Microsoft and makers of cell phones have been hard at work trying to make a dent in Apples strangle hold on the music device business but the ipod and iphone continue to dominate. 5 ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby Microsoft has been shifting its strategy from a PC centric computing environment to a computing platform in which diverse devices will access information on the web. Similar to IBM, Microsoft predicts that cloud computing grow and transform the computer and software business. Microsoft plans to capitalize on this by creating a seamless user experience across multiple devices from PC’s to cell phones to home entertainment devices. Microsoft has a strategy that plans on delivering services, devices, advertising and of course, software to run it all. Microsoft would like to get its software running a network for the user, that way they have an advantage to getting into some of the segments they have struggled to gain business. Let us now compare the financial statements for both companies (see Appendix 1 and Appendix 2 for the table of supporting calculations discussed). These are two of the best companies in the world not just as technology companies but overall success. Both companies have navigated through the economic down turn admirably. Revenue for Microsoft declined by approximately $2 Billion from 2008 to 2009 from 60. 4B to 58. 4B. However, both figures are significantly higher from the 51. 1B in revenue they generated in 2007. Operating income, net income, operating margin, follow a similar pattern. Similarly, IBM saw a decline in revenue in 2009. Revenue for IBM tracked from 2007 shows; 98. 8B (2007), 103. 6B (2008), 95. 8B (2009). IBM however was able to increase operating income over this period from 13. 5B (2007), 15. 9B (2008) and up to 18. 2B (2009). They achieved this through improving their product mix as discussed previously. As a result of increasing higher margin business IBM achieved lower expenses and significantly improved profit margin. Microsoft did not show this change and this is 6 ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby because they already have a very high profit margin business and did not change their product mix significantly (illustration 1). 7 illustration 1: Microsoft IBM Revenue and Income in Billions on left scale Revenue and Income in Billions on left scale While IBM has significantly higher revenue, Microsoft achieved better net income (14. 6B vs. 13. 4B). This comparison does substantiate the strategy articulated by IBM’s management where they have been on a 10 year mission to transform their business away from a PC, laptop builder to more of a service and software provider. In order to achieve this transformation IBM made a breathtaking 108 strategic acquisitions of smaller firms since the year 2000. This is evident in the gigantic amount of goodwill they carry on the balance sheet ($20. Billion). IBM did also sell, divest or discontinue a significant number of business operations as well. IBM has been able to purchase all these businesses with cash thanks to a long history of generating good amounts of free cash. IBM also received 4,900 patents in 2009 which is the 17th straight year they had received the most patents in the U. S. IBM carries $2. 5 billion intangible assets from all the patents they hold. ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby Microsoft and IBM today are much more similar than they were a decade ago because of this transformation IBM has undergone. However, there are still significant differences. Microsoft also is quite active in acquisitions and research and development which results in many patents. Microsoft is a very cash rich company as well and has paid cash for many strategic acquisitions as well. Microsoft carries $12. 5 billion in goodwill on their balance sheet. I feel sorry for the accountants at both Microsoft and IBM at the end of each year. I can only imagine the nightmare it must be to go through all the various testing of acquired businesses to see if any of the goodwill is impaired. For IBM this is a big number because it represents nearly 1/5th of the total assets so it is not unreasonable to see that over time a significant hit to the goodwill could unexpectedly damage profits in a given year. Microsoft also has this but to a lesser extent with goodwill representing 15% of total assets. Microsoft spent more on R&D but has a lower number of patents and carries $1. 8 Billion in intangible assets for these. Overall Microsoft has a staggering amount of cash and short term investments ($31. 3 Billion) with an additional $6. 5 Billion in other long term investments (various bonds and equity). IBM has $13. 9 Billion in cash and short term investments with $5. 3 Billion in long term investments. One can see that Microsoft is in a powerful position to put money to work if they see the need to transform their business like IBM has done over the past decade. IBM has a decent balance sheet from a debt standpoint and the three year change shows it remains stable in spite of the recent credit difficulties with a current ratio of 1. 36 and a debt to asset ratio of 79. 1%. Microsoft is stronger in this regard with a current ratio of 1. 82 and a debt to asset ratio of 49. %. It is clear from looking at the balance sheets of these companies that they have staying power (illustration 2). Both the current ratios and 8 ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby debt to asset ratios show that assets exceed liabilities. IBM is not as strong as Microsoft although. I compared them to Oracle (cr= 2. 06, d/a% =46. 8%), Hewlett Packard (cr=1. 22, d/a% = 64. 7%), Apple (cr=2. 74, d/a% = 33. 3%), Dell (cr=1. 28, d/a% = 83. 3%), Novell (cr=1. 75, d. a% = 50. 9%). This shows IBM has a lower current ratio than most and the average of these was 1. 66. So while IBM is in line with Dell and HP the rest are stronger. As for total liabilities, IBM is second worst to Dell only and that average of the sample was 55. 8%. This industry is strong and recovered well from the current recession and it does not appear that IBM is in a very risky position as a result of debt. Illustration 2 IBM Balance Sheet 1. 6 1. 4 1. 2 1 0. 8 0. 6 0. 4 0. 2 0 2007 IBM-Current Ratio 2008 2009 2 1. 8 1. 6 1. 4 1. 2 1 0. 8 0. 6 0. 4 0. 2 0 2007 2008 2009 9 Microsoft Balance Sheet IBM-Debt to Asset Ratio MSFT-Current Ratio MSFT-Debt to Asset Ratio The return on assets for Microsoft is quite high and consistent for the past three years 21. 2% in 2007, 26% in 2008 and then a dip to 19. 3% in 2009. I am sure Microsoft felt the 2009 dip was terrible but when you look at it in this perspective, it is really very impressive. IBM has an interesting difference from Microsoft in this regard. The return on assets for IBM in 2007 was 9. 3%, 10. 7% (2008) and then up again in 2009 to 12. 3%. IBM’s average total assets are very high but trended slightly lower while income has increased resulting in this upward return on assets trend. While the return on assets is ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby lower than Microsoft, this is a good sign for IBM particularly through the stock market crash and economic recession. Return on equity for the past three years for Microsoft was 39. 5%, 52. 5% and 38. 4% in 2009. For IBM it was 36. 6%, 58. 8% and 74. 4%. Both companies have been buying back stock significantly. In 2009 IBM repurchased 69 million shares of its common stock. Microsoft repurchased 318 million common shares in 2009. This amounts to approximately $9 billion in shares repurchased respectively for each company. Looking at the dividends there does show a very significant difference. Illustration 3 IBM-Dividends per share IBM-Dividends IBM-Net Income IBM-Payout Ratio (Div/NI) MSFT-Dividends per share MSFT-Dividends MSFT-Net Income MSFT-Payout Ratio (Div/NI) 2. 15 2,860 13,425 21. 3% 0. 50 4,516 14,569 31. 0% 1. 90 2,585 12,334 21. 0% 0. 43 4,067 17,681 23. 0% 1. 50 2,188 10,418 21. 0% 0. 39 3,798 14,065 27. 0% 10 As this table shows, Microsoft has a higher payout ratio. However, with Microsoft trading at a stock price of about 30 and IBM at a price of 129 the yield on both stocks is coincidentally 1. 1% even though Microsoft has a higher payout ratio. Microsoft spends slightly more on research and development than IBM. The past three years Microsoft spent (in billions); 7. 1, 8. 2, 9. 0 compared to IBM; 6. 1, 6. 3, 5. 8 as a percentage of sales this is a much higher number for Microsoft (13. 9%, 13. 5%, 15. 4%) compared to IBM (6. 2%, 6. 1%, 6. 1%). I don’t think this is a negative for IBM because their high number patents show they are producing great results and high sales figures. A significant difference is revealed on the balance sheet comparison. IBM has a liability of $15. billion for retirement and non-pension postretirement benefit obligations in 2009 ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby which is a decrease from a $19. 5 billion figure the previous year. This explains why IBM’s debt to asset ratio is higher than most of the competitors in the industry. IBM discusses this in the annual report briefly but only to point out that they continue to work this liability down and in fact it decreased by $3. 5 billion from 2008 to 2009. It seems IBM has recognized they need to address this retirement liability before it becomes a bigger problem. Union benefits and obligations were a significant factor that killed GM. Microsoft has nothing like this, only 6 billion in “other long term liabilities”. Microsoft carries $13 billion in short-term unearned revenue from software subscriptions. They discuss this in the management discussion of annual report and it is a result of multi-year licensing arrangements paid upfront or annually at the beginning of a coverage period. The turnover statistics for IBM has been consistent over the past 3 years. Inventory turnover for the past three years has been 20. 83 (’07), 21. 9 (’08), 20. 01 (’09). Receivable turnover has been 2. 78, 3. 21, 3. 52 and asset turnover has been 0. 88, 0. 90, and 0. 88. The turnover statistics for Microsoft are slightly different. Inventory turnover for 2007 through 2009 was; 8. 21, 10. 98, 14. 28, receivable turnover was 4. 95, 4. 85, 4. 72 and asset turnover was 0. 77, 0. 89, 0. 78. This is a reflection of the difference is product mix. While both have gigantic software components to their business, IBM has a much larger component of big ticket products and services that carry multi-million dollar price tags. Microsoft has a lower price product mix and higher volume business overall. Free cash flow is good for both of these companies (illustration 4). Once again we see that Microsoft experienced a slight decline in the most recent year while IBM increased all of the past three years. 11 ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby illustration 4 (in billions) IBM-Free Cash flow (adj) IBM-Free Cash flow (unadj) MSFT-Free Cash flow 2007 12. 4 17. 4 15. 5 2008 14. 3 18. 8 19. 6 2009 15. 1 18. 8 17. 1 12 Free Cash Flow 25. 0 20. 0 15. 0 10. 0 5. 0 0. 2007 IBM-Free Cash flow (adj) IBM-Free Cash flow (unadj) 2008 2009 MSFT-Free Cash flow There is an important discussion and footnote in the IBM annual report and financial statements. IBM management explains that they prefer to remove the Global Financing business from the free cash flow analysis. This is due to the nature of the business of Global Financing where receivables are a profit generating investment, not capital that should be minimized for efficiency. By removing the Global Financing receivables IBM shows a more conservative free cash flow number than if we did it strictly as GAAP defined. Therefore, I have shown the unadjusted number using the cash from continuing operations and then also the adjusted number provided by IBM in the footnotes and management discussion. Interestingly the unadjusted free cash flow actually exceeded Microsoft in the current year. IBM has a good trend going. Microsoft has one additional point worth discussing and that is in Note 24 of the financial statements. Here Microsoft tells us of a subsequent event where Yahoo and ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby Microsoft have entered into a 10-year agreement together. Under this agreement Microsoft will provide Yahoo with an algorithmic paid search platform for Yahoo web sites. They will have a revenue sharing agreement on traffic generated on the Yahoo network and Yahoo will become the exclusive worldwide relationship sales force for both companies’ premium search advertisers. Microsoft also acquires a 10-year license to Yahoo’s core search technology and will integrate Yahoo with Bing. Finally we should look at stocks from an investment standpoint. IBM has 9. 4 earnings per share with a price to earnings ratio of 13. 1. Microsoft has 1. earnings per share with a price to earnings ratio of 18. 8. Looking at the stock price charts in illustration 5 it shows that IBM had a more severe sell off when the stock market crashed due to the banking credit crisis. This seems logical given we can see that Microsoft was in a stronger position of overall balance sheet strength to weather any prolonged credit contraction. However, it would appear that sell off to IBM was more severe than warranted. Also when we see that the P/E ratio for IBM is still quite low, at 13 it appears that the stock price is not overvalued. However, the P/E of Microsoft is not historically high at 18. 8 so that statistic does not represent a red flag for an investment in Microsoft. 13 ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby Illustration 5 14 Overall it appears to me that IBM has a bit more upside potential in the stock over the next few years. The strong cash position for Microsoft along with the new partnership with Yahoo provides good potential for growth. Microsoft could use their cash in many strategic ways, like IBM did the past decade. One risk I see in Microsoft is the XBOX game system. That business is very exposed to trends and fads, not to mention fickleness of little boys’ preferences (my son prefers Playstation). Also, with 90% of all PC’s currently running on Microsoft software that fact does not leave them ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby room to expand market share. If forced to pick one of the two, I would choose IBM to invest in after reviewing both companies. I think both are good companies so there is not a bad choice here. However, I like the way IBM has transformed into a more profitable business mix and has increased profits through the recession. I also like the potential they have to capitalize on global governments investing in infrastructure. Although IBM has a large liability for retirement benefits, it appears the management is successfully reducing it and they have a strong level of free cash flow. My choice of IBM as the better investment is the opposite of what I expected to find prior to beginning this research and analysis. It definitely shows me that one should never invest in a company without reading the annual report and financial statements. 15 ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby Appendix 1 Stat Company Stat 2009 Current Assets IBM-Current Assets 48,935 Current Liabilities IBM-Current Liabilities 36,002 Current Ratio IBM-Current Ratio 1. 36 Cost of Goods Sold IBM-Cost of Goods Sold 51,973 Ave Inventory IBM-Ave Inventory 2,598 Inventory Turnover IBM-Inventory Turnover 20. 01 Net Sales IBM-Net Sales 95,758 Ave Net Recievable IBM-Ave Net Recievable 27,174 Recievable Turnover IBM-Recievable Turnover 3. 52 Net Sales IBM-Net Sales 95,758 Ave Tot Assets IBM-Ave Tot Assets 109,273 Asset Turnover IBM-Asset Turnover 0. 8 Revenue IBM-Revenue 95,758 Cost of Sales IBM-Cost of Sales 51,973 Gross Margin (rev-cost sales)/rev IBM-Gross Margin (rev-cost sales)/rev 45. 7% Revenue IBM-Revenue 95,758 Operating Income IBM-Operating Income 18,190 Operating Margin IBM-Operating Margin 19. 0% Net Income IBM-Net Income 13,425 Revenue IBM-Revenue 95,758 Net Profit Margin (net prof/rev) IBM-Net Profit Margin (net prof/rev) 14. 0% Net Inc IBM-Net Inc 13,425 Ave Tot Assets IBM-Ave Tot Assets 109,273 Return on assets IBM-Return on assets 12. 3% Net Inc IBM-Net Inc 13,425 Ave Shareholder Equity IBM-Ave Shareholder Equity 18,051 Return on Equity IBM-Return on Equity 74. % Dividends per share IBM-Dividends per share 2. 15 Dividends IBM-Dividends 2,860 Net Income IBM-Net Income 13,425 Payout Ratio (Div/NI) IBM-Payout Ratio (Div/NI) 21. 3% Total Liabilities IBM-Total Liabilities 86,267 Total Assets IBM-Total Assets 109,022 Debt to Asset Ratio (Lia/Assets) IBM-Debt to Asset Ratio (Lia/Assets) 79. 1% Net Inc IBM-Net Inc 13,425 Int exp IBM-Int exp 402 Taxes IBM-Taxes 4,713 Times int earned IBM-Times int earned 13,839 R&D IBM-R&D 5,820 Sales IBM-Sales 95,758 R&D / Sales % IBM-R&D / Sales % 6. 1% Cash from cont' ops IBM-Cash from cont' ops 20. Cash from cont' ops (excl IBM-Cash from cont' ops (excl fin rec) fin rec) 18. 9 Cap Expenditures IBM-Cap Expenditures (3. 7) Free Cash flow IBM-Free Cash flow 15. 1 Earnings per share IBM-Earnings per share 9. 4 Price/Earnings Ratio IBM-Price/Earnings Ratio 13. 1 2008 49,004 42,435 1. 15 57,969 2,685 21. 59 103,630 32,293 3. 21 103,630 114,978 0. 90 103,630 57,929 44. 1% 103,630 15,938 15. 4% 12,334 103,630 11. 9% 12,334 115,271 10. 7% 12,334 20,968 58. 8% 1. 90 2,585 12,334 21. 0% 95,939 109,524 87. 6% 12,334 673 4,381 13,014 6,337 103,630 6. 1% 18. 18. 8 (4. 5) 14. 3 6. 0 9. 4 2007 53,177 44,310 1. 20 57,057 2,739 20. 83 98,786 35,517 2. 78 98,786 111,833 0. 88 98,786 57,098 42. 2% 98,786 13,516 13. 7% 10,418 98,786 10. 5% 10,418 112,022 9. 3% 10,418 28,488 36. 6% 1. 50 2,188 10,418 21. 0% 91,962 120,431 76. 4% 10,418 611 4,071 11,036 6,153 98,786 6. 2% 16. 1 17. 4 (5. 0) 12. 4 6. 9 15. 1 billions mgmt adj ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby Appendix 2 Stat Company Stat 2009 Current Assets MSFT-Current Assets 49,280 Current Liabilities MSFT-Current Liabilities 27,034 Current Ratio MSFT-Current Ratio 1. 2 Cost of Goods Sold MSFT-Cost of Goods Sold 12,155 Ave Inventory MSFT-Ave Inventory 851 Inventory Turnover MSFT-Inventory Turnover 14. 28 Net Sales MSFT-Net Sales 58,437 Ave Net Recievable MSFT-Ave Net Recievable 12,391 Recievable Turnover MSFT-Recievable Turnover 4. 72 Net Sales MSFT-Net Sales 58,437 Ave Tot Assets MSFT-Ave Tot Assets 75,341 Asset Turnover MSFT-Asset Turnover 0. 78 Revenue MSFT-Revenue 58,437 Cost of Sales MSFT-Cost of Sales 12,155 Gross Margin (rev-cost MSFT-Gross Margin (rev-cost sales)/rev sales)/rev 79. % Revenue MSFT-Revenue 58,437 Operating Income MSFT-Operating Income 20,363 Operating Margin MSFT-Operating Margin 34. 8% Net Income MSFT-Net Income 14,569 Revenue MSFT-Revenue 58,437 Net Profit Margin (net prof/rev) MSFT-Net Profit Margin (net prof/rev) 24. 9% Net Inc MSFT-Net Inc 14,569 Ave Tot Assets MSFT-Ave Tot Assets 75,341 Return on assets MSFT-Return on assets 19. 3% Net Inc MSFT-Net Inc 14,569 Ave Shareholder EquityMSFT-Ave Shareholder Equity 37,922 Return on Equity MSFT-Return on Equity 38. 4% Dividends per share MSFT-Dividends per share 0. 0 Dividends MSFT-Dividends 4,516 Net Income MSFT-Net Income 14,569 Payout Ratio (Div/NI) MSFT-Payout Ratio (Div/NI) 31. 0% Total Liabilities MSFT-Total Liabilities 38,330 Total Assets MSFT-Total Assets 77,888 Debt to Asset Ratio (Lia/Assets) MSFT-Debt to Asset Ratio (Lia/Assets) 49. 2% Net Inc MSFT-Net Inc 14,569 Int exp MSFT-Int exp 542 Taxes MSFT-Taxes 4,713 Times int earned MSFT-Times int earned 15,120 R&D MSFT-R&D 9,010 Sales MSFT-Sales 58,437 R&D / Sales % MSFT-R&D / Sales % 15. 4% Cash from cont' ops MSFT-Cash from cont' ops 20. 3 Cap Expenditures MSFT-Cap Expenditures (3. ) Free Cash flow MSFT-Free Cash flow 17. 1 Earnings per share MSFT-Earnings per share 1. 6 Price/Earnings Ratio MSFT-Price/Earnings Ratio 18. 8 2008 43,242 29,886 1. 45 11,598 1,056 10. 98 60,420 12,464 4. 85 60,420 67,982 0. 89 60,420 11,598 44. 1% 60,420 22,271 36. 9% 17,681 60,420 29. 3% 17,681 67,982 26. 0% 17,681 33,692 52. 5% 0. 43 4,067 17,681 23. 0% 36,507 72,793 50. 2% 17,681 (1,543) 4,381 16,135 8,164 60,420 13. 5% 22. 7 (3. 2) 19. 6 2. 0 10. 4 2007 40,168 23,754 1. 69 10,693 1,303 8. 21 51,122 10,327 4. 95 51,122 66,384 0. 77 51,122 10,693 42. 2% 51,122 18,438 36. 1% 14,065 51,122 27. % 14,065 66,384 21. 2% 14,065 35,601 39. 5% 0. 39 3,798 14,065 27. 0% 32,074 63,171 50. 8% 14,065 (1,663) 4,071 12,400 7,121 51,122 13. 9% 17. 8 (2. 3) 15. 5 1. 4 25. 0 billions ACC-615 Dr. Finn; William Jacoby Bibliography Gogia, Sunit. IBM Corp; a Trusted Brand and an Unrivaled Product and Services Portfolio. Tech. Morningstar, 17 Mar. 2010. Web. 15 Apr. 2010. Holt, Adam. Microsoft PC's, Servers & Execution Point to Solid Results. Tech. Mogan Stanley Research North America, 15 Apr. 2010. Web. 15 Apr. 2010. Huberty, Katy. IBM; A Solid Quarter with More Improvements to Come. Tech. Morgan Stanley Research North America, 20 Jan. 2010. Web. 15 Apr. 2010. IBM Annual Report. Rep. Armonk: RR Donnelley, 2009. Print. Microsoft Corporation Annual Report 2009. Rep. Redmond: Microsoft, 2009. Print. Smith, Thomas. Stock Report; IBM Corporation. Tech. Vol. April 10. New York: McGraw Hill, 2010. Print. Standard & Poors. Spiceland, J. David, James F. Sepe, and Lawrence A. Tomassini. Intermediate Accounting. Boston: McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2007. Print. Yin, Jim. Stock Report; Microsoft Corporation. Tech. Vol. April 10. New York: McGraw Hill Company, 2010. Print. Standard & Poors.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Microsoft Financial Statement Analysis. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Hospitality Industry

1. ICT APPLICATION TOOLS - INTRODUCTION ICT has beyond doubts made huge contribution to the development of hospitality and tourism services. Due to the advancement in technology, the fierce competition and also due to the complexity of the hospitality and tourism markets, organizations from all over the world now depend almost on the use of ICT to plan, manage and market their services. There was a time when organizations would depend on using effective BPOs also known as call-centres to reach out to the consumers, but now the use of the internet has changed the whole scenario. Organizations have now integrated their system with ICT tools such as GDS, CRS, PMS, DMS etc to facilitate in the overall management and marketing of services especially in the hospitality and tourism industry. For a country like Singapore, where hospitality and tourism is one of the major industries, the use of ICT tools to support and facilitate the industry can be explained and justified with many examples but before that we need to understand the function of these ICT tools. Let us first explain in brief some of these tools and their functions. 1. 1GDS/CRS: For a technical definition, Global Distribution System (GDS) also known as Computer Reservation System (CRS) is an electronic distribution infrastructure; worldwide computerized reservation network used as a single point of access for reserving airline seats, hotel rooms, rental cars and other travel related items by travel agents, online reservation sites, hotel & travel organizations, car companies, rail companies etc (Business Dictionary, 2009). It is a system for logistical functions (information transfer). It stores current information about all available service providers and have the necessary infrastructure to transfer such data. The Global Distribution system (GDS) was first introduced by the airline industry during 1960’s in order to keep track of flight schedules, price and availability, and then later they began installing their propriety internal reservation systems in travel agencies. Before this, travel agents spent huge amount of time manually entering reservations. The airlines realized that by automating the reservation process for travel agents, they could make the travel agents more productive and also use them in the airline’s sales force. Now GDSs have become the backbone of internet travel distribution system. Das, 2002) Some of the major GDS systems are Amadeus, Galileo International, SABRE, Worldspan, Abacus and Fantasia etc. 1. 2Functionality of CRSs Using these global CRSs, travel agencies make reservations directly from their terminal with service providers (airlines & hotels) without having to go through contract negotiations. The basic functions of CRSs include product presentations, reservation, fair quote & ticketing and additional services. These functions can be explained using the diagram below. (Source: www. electronicmarkets. org/issues/volume-6/... /v6n2_schulz0. pdf) Product presentation: The most important part of information for a CRS is the presentation of products and services offered by providers. Each service providers will have their own specific features and contents depending on the nature of their service. It may be flight reservations as well as hotel bookings and other travel related services. (Schulz, 1996) Reservation: The main function of reservation systems and for developing them is the reservation of offered services in the travel industry. A Passenger Name Record (PNR) or a Guest Name Record (GNR) is created for each passenger, which contains all the information required of the passenger/guest. This information is then transferred to the internal inventory system of the service providers who thus have the latest information about availability at any point of time. This system is also used to store customer related information such as services provided to certain customer, type of payment, service information etc. (Schulz, 1996) Fare Quote & Ticketing: Fare Quote and Ticketing is basically the different kinds/types of fares or rentals offered to the passenger/guest depending on the nature of the service. For example, flight fares may vary according to reservation category, date of journey, length of stay etc and for the ticketing, travel agencies receive a fixed number of ticket forms which may only be used after confirmation has been received from the service provider. (Schulz, 1996) Additional Services: Due to the fierce competition and complexity in the market, system operators are forced to offer not only information and booking system but also additional features and services that enables passengers/guests to access to more direct information and customize their service requirements. Schulz, 1996) Apart from the above four main functions, a high speed network is the second basis for a CRS. 1. 3PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (PMS) It is also a computerized system that deals with guest bookings, online reservations, point of sales etc in other words it is a computerized system used mostly by hotels to integrate all the elements of hospitality information and management. (Hotel Management-Network, 2009) PMS such as Micros Fidelio Opera are in-house applications that support the central electronic structure of the hotel. It is used to manage customer reservations and billing processes and it contains all information about the units of the hotel such as room status, types of rooms, price, housekeeping status etc. PMS is used for both front office and back-office functions. The front office application helps in simplifying and enhancing customer contact through customer relationship management which contributes to the overall service quality. It includes reservations, check-in, room management, housekeeping, guest relation etc. The back-office applications are used as an aid to decision-making in management functions by providing comprehensive reports. It includes stock management and controlling, financial planning, book keeping and wage payment. Apart from these, PMS can also be used as a central point between the different systems of the hotel, bringing all functions under one system. (Egger & Buhalis, 2008) 1. 4DESTINATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (DMS) DMS is also another computer system used by Destination Management Organizations (DMOs) in order to manage and coordinate all tourist information, events, suppliers and products. It is also referred to as destination database which gives comprehensive information about a destination. Hotel Management-Network, 2009) Destinations are important in the tourist industry. DMOs play both the role of the producer as well as the intermediary- they assume the functions of building the tourism product and presenting the offer. They interact with wide variety of stakeholders such as the local government, the host community, the local tourism board etc in order to develop and market the destination as a tourism product. However due to socio-democratic changes in lifestyles, changes in travel behaviour and the complexity of the nature of tourists, the need for quick destination and travel information arose. Then there was the internet, which became an important source of information for travel preparations. Tourist contacts the destination directly for information through the internet and expects up-to-date, correct and relevant information about accommodation and other travel related activities and services. Therefore the need for DMOs to integrate with ICT arose, and DMS, which included a destination-wide and integrated search, advice, reservation and handling system, became a vital tool for DMOs and their stakeholders for the promotion of tourism networks and most importantly the satisfaction of tourists’ needs. Egger & Buhalis, 2008) DMSs are used with an aim to provide the customer with access to the different types of services in a simple and transparent manner and to ensure a comprehensive destination management, which includes information about attractions, accessibility, accommodations and other travel related packages. (Buhalis, 2003 cited in Egger & Buhalis, 2008) 2. ICT TOOLS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS IN THE HOSPITALITY & TOURISM INDUSTRY The advancement in the internet technology, the increase in the number of travellers, the growing demands of travellers and the complexity in the buying behaviour of tourists have led to the intense competitions among service providers and destination management organizations in the hospitality and tourism industry. Nowadays, thanks to the internet, travellers can quickly search for up-to-date and relevant information through the web instead of going through the hassle of contacting the service providers through call centres or through travel agents. It is because of this reason that the service providers realized the importance of integrating their service offerings with ICT tools such as GDS, PMS and DMS in order to give more options to their customers as well as the stakeholders. Each ICT tools have their own functions and it is up to the creativity of the service providers on how these tools are effectively used. Hospitality & tourism industry is the major contributor of Singapore’s national economy. It is a well known global tourist destination which hosts some of the biggest festivals and events in Asia Pacific. Some of the upcoming events include the Singapore Grand Prix F1 2009 and the Youth Olympics 2010. Let us have a look on how the above mentioned ICT tools can be effectively used to support and facilitate these upcoming events. 2. 1Global Distribution System Travelport Singapore (https://www. travelport. com/sg/) is under Travelport GDS which is one of the world’s largest GDS providers operating both the Galileo and Worlspan, providing real-time travel information and booking to online and offline travel agencies in over 145 countries. Travelport, 2009) When we look at the website Travelport Singapore (https://www. travelport. com/sg), we can see the different types of travel technologies, solutions and services offered to airlines (Galileo Airline Private Fares TM), car companies (Galileo CarMaster TM), Cruise providers (Travelport Cruise & Tour TM), Hotel organizations (Galileo RoomMaster TM), Rail Companies (Galileo RailMaster TM), Airports (SkyHigh TM) etc. They also offer productivity solutions to travel agencies such as Galileo Agency Private Fares TM, Travelport ViewTrip TM, Travelport e-Pricing TM, Travelport Rapid Reprice TM etc. Apart from all these, they also provide customer solutions on all products and services, training and help-desk services. (Travelport, 2009) These products and services comes with the latest technologies and are specifically made available for travel providers, travel agencies, hotel organizations, rail companies, car rental companies and airlines. By using these latest technologies/applications, service providers are able to reach out to more tourists/travellers in a more simplified and refined way. As such, there is no doubt that these ICT tool could be used to support and facilitate H&T industry in Singapore especially for the upcoming major events. GDS integrated with PMS and DMS would help the local government, local tourism board, the sponsors and the stakeholders to reach out to the people. 2. 2PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Micros Fidelio Opera is one of the most popular PMS applications used by organizations. Micros-Fidelio (https://www. micros-fidelio. net/) offers a complete range of software and hardware solutions for business- hotels & resorts, restaurants, stadiums and arenas, retail, cruise etc. For example Opera Property Management is used by hotel & resort chains as well as independent hotels for property management system, finance, sales force and reservation system for operations of all sizes. For restaurants there are software tools such as RES 4. 0, MICROS 9700 etc, MICROS POS system for stadiums and arenas and Fidelio Cruise for cruise providers. (Micros-Fidelio, 2009) (Screenshot of Micros Fidelio Opera PMS Application) For example, Fidelio Opera is used to manage customer reservations and billing processes and it contains all information about the units of the hotel such as room status, types of rooms, price, housekeeping status etc. This ICT tools or applications enhance guest experience with streamlined services and provides the H&T industry with the most advanced and integrated hotel automated solutions, stadiums & arenas, cruises etc. For example, the upcoming Singapore Grand Prix F1 2009 would result in more inbound tourists which would increase the hotel occupancy rate, more consumption of hospitality services (such as restaurants, bars, cruises etc) and also the management of race tracks, stadiums and related infrastructures. This is when ICT tools and application supports and facilitates the in development and success of the event. 2. 3DESTINATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DMS is another ICT tool/application used by Destination Management Organizations to manage and coordinate all tourist information, events, tourism products and services. It acts as a destination database which gives comprehensive information about a destination. Destination website Visit Singapore (www. visitsingapore. com) is a DMS used by Singapore Tourism Board in order to support and facilitate the inflow of international tourists. It provides comprehensive information about Singapore. If we look at the website we can see that it provides complete range of services and information in a simple and transparent manner. It provides information about the latest upcoming events such as the Singapore Grand Prix 2009, Singapore Sun Festival 2009, Jazz by the Beach (Sentosa) etc. The system is also integrated with hotel and flight reservations option, itinerary planner, currency converter, newsletters etc. (Visit Singapore, 2009) Some of the important features and services include: Detailed information about Singapore, its tourist attractions * Online booking for travel, promotion offers, accessibility to Singapore (Airlines, Trains etc), Visa Free Transit Facilities, Information for transit passengers * Online booking for accommodation, accommodation facilities, Singapore hotels directory, promotion offers * F&B experiences, Food events, food tours, dining precincts * Other options include ‘what to do in Singapore’, ‘what to see in Singapore’, ‘getting around in Singapore’ and also MICE related services. Source: (Visit Singapore, 2009) Therefore we can see that it is important for DMOs to reach out to the public/customers/tourists by providing all these information about a destination and service offerings of the service provider through the use of DMSs. Providing a detailed, up-to-date information of a destination and its attractions, followed by other travel related services is another way of marketing the destination as a global tourist destination, which at the end explains the role of ICT tools in supporting and facilitating the H&T industry. Word Count: 2189 Words) 3. 1INTRODUCTION The case study is about VisitScotland. com a DMS website of VisitScotland, owned by the National Tourism Board of Scotland and its relationship with small tourism businesses in Scotland. VisitScotland is the Scottish tour operating name of e Tourism ltd which was originally set up as a private limited company in 2002 before being wholly owned by Scotland national tourism board in 2008 i. e. , 36 % share owned by VisitScotland. E Tourism ltd is owned by VisitScotland (36%), Atos Origin Ltd- a global technology company (7%), Tiscover, the world’s leading provider of tourism website and destination management technology (35%) and Partnerships UK (22%). (Visit Scotland, 2007) In the past, VisitScotland have had many criticisms for their incompetency to accommodate changes in their service offerings, resulting in less number of inbound tourists. In other words the system in which they operated were not good enough to compete with other destination providers. In order to address the criticisms, visitscotland. com signed a deal with Tiscover, the world’s leading provider of tourism and destination management technology, with the objective to deliver a multi-channelled booking and information service for tourists. In order to understand how this new deal would help VisitScotland, we should first understand how Tiscover functions- their business model and the service and technology they come up with, about visitscotland. com and other related technologies (ATOS). 3. ABOUT TISCOVER Tiscover is the leading provider of e-tourism solutions to destination management organizations (DMOs) and tourism businesses throughout Europe and Southern Africa. The company also powers the individual websites of DMOs, such as Visiteurope. com, Austriainfo. com etc. Apart from that Tiscover also supports all types of organizations at a destination, including small independent hotels, B&Bs, restaurants and attractions. (Egger & Buhalis, 2008) 3. 2. 1Tiscover Service Offerings: 1. Destination Management System (DMS) Solutions: It provides DMS solutions at national, regional and local levels, which includes wide range of modules to support a DMO’s internal, partner and consumer communication, accommodation booking and reservations, customer relation management etc. (Egger & Buhalis, 2008) 2. Web Solutions: Tiscover uses a Content Management System (CMS) which allows DMOs and tourism suppliers to build websites where they can feature destination content and search facilities for the DMOs. (Egger & Buhalis, 2008) 3. E-marketing: Apart from the main Tiscover. om portal, it has many different websites such as Tiscover. uk, Tiscover. de etc where users can register and the company uses its online newsletter to do extensive consumer marketing. (Egger & Buhalis, 2008) Another value added services include multi-channelled distributions which enables DMOs to reach out to different market segments and visitors of different consumer buying experience. Once the DMOs and tourism providers enters the data, the information is made available through different range of channels such as websites, mobile devices, kiosks, BPOs etc. . 2. 1Tiscover Business Model Tiscover develops and sells technology solutions to DMOs and tourism suppliers, solutions that provide an e-business platform on which tourism business can attain competitive advantage via the internet and also enables a DMO to present its wide range of tourism businesses and control on an e-business platform. On the demand side, the CRM tool enables the DMO to gather information about the market. Again, Tiscover’s revenue model is based on application service provider (ASP) solution aimed at two customer group i. . , DMOs and tourism suppliers. For DMO, revenue comes in the form of annual licences which are priced according to the different DMO levels. For tourism suppliers (mostly accommodation) revenue is earned in the form of licences and commissions (commission depends on whether accommodations are booked directly from the website or through Tiscover) If we visit the website www. tiscover. com, we can see that most of the services are tailored specially for the four countries namely Switzerland, Germany, Austria and Italy. All tourism and travel related products and services from different tourism providers and DMOs like accommodation, destination information and tour packages etc are gathered and made available to the customers through this main portal. (Tiscover, 2009) 3. 3About visitscotland. com Visitscotland. com is the DMS website owned by the Scottish tourism board. This destination website provides all information about Scotland to the tourists, with the main objective of delivering a multi-channelled bookings and information services for tourists and to create global awareness of Scotland to the world. Some of the features of this website include: * Information search bar (Detailed information about Scotland) * Accommodations search bar (All kinds of accommodation providers like hotels, B&Bs, guest house etc) * Multimedia interactive showing famous attraction places of Scotland in pictures and videos, flash etc * News portal (showing updates on travel promotion, important info for tourists such as H1N1 news etc) * Event guide (upcoming events in Scotland) * Customer relation services (contacts details, press releases) (Source: Visit Scotland, 2009) Visitscotland. om is one of the best examples of a destination management system (DMS) website. If we look at the website, we see that the whole concept is about creating global awareness of Scotland to tourists. The main objective for the Scottish tourism board is to promote tourism by using this website. Unlike other tour operator websites like orbitz. com etc which offers all kinds of tourism services to generate revenues, visitscotland. com is purely focussed on promoting the particular destination as a global tourist attraction. Again if we compare this website with another DMS website, say www. australia. om is also a DMS website owned by DMO Tourism Australia purely focussed on creating awareness of Australia to the world. We can see that all these DMS websites are used by their respective DMOs with the same objective i. e. , to create awareness of the particular destination and therefore we may not find and major differences except for a few differences in the features of their websites. Both the website are user friendly, contains lots of information about their respective destination, other similar features include newsletters, event guide, search bar etc, but when compared it closely, I find visitscotland. om more user friendly due to its rich media interactive, the content of information, the search options and the customer feedback. 3. 4About ATOS Origin Ltd Atos Origin Ltd is a global technology company that provides IT services, i. e. , they provide integrated design, build and operate solutions for business industries. It owns 7% share of eTourism Ltd (visitscotland. com), and it provides for the IT platform and services for the website visitscotland. com along with Tiscover. It may be mentioned that Atos Origin Ltd owned the maximum share of eTourism Ltd before being taken over by visitscotland in 2002. (Visit Scotland, 2007) Atos Origin Ltd provides business solution in three major service lines. They are: 1. Atos Consulting: Atos offers advice and a realistic, practical approach to addressing client needs. It provides end-to-end services and solutions such as strategy development, enterprise solutions and technology decisions. It provides for innovative approach to business process, integrated supporting technologies and strategic investments. Atos Origin, 2009) 2. Systems Integration: By successfully combining new technology solution with the established ones, it helps transform the complete enterprise architecture into a single, seamless system, and also by integrating people, processes and technologies, they design, build and operate practical solutions. (Atos Origin, 2009) 3. Managed Operations: They also provide high outsourcing operations to manage core IT infrastructures for clients, including datacenters, desktop support, server farms and network communication system. It also provides guides through the process of assessment, planning, implementation, transition and ensures consistent, high quality service delivery to its clients. (Atos Origin, 2009) 3. 5Reaction to the case study (Visitscotland) Now that we have discussed in brief about visitscotland and its destination website, Tiscover and its function and services, other related technologies like Atos and their services, we should be able to understand the success of visitscotland. com after its integration with Tiscover. There is no doubt that the internet technology has changed the way business organizations communicate with its stakeholders, partners and most importantly its customers. Over the years we have experienced rapid changes in technology, which also led to increase in competition among business organizations especially service providers like the tourism and hospitality industry. Nowadays consumers are well aware of the wide range of service providers competing among themselves in order to sustain or achieve competitive advantage over the other, which results in changes in the buying behaviour of the consumers. Consumers/travellers are now looking for service providers who can provide relevant, up-to-date information quickly, for example a traveller looking for information for a particular destination would prefer to use the internet for quick information, and for this purpose DMS websites like visitscotland. com, Australia. com are some of the user-friendly websites that provide comprehensive information about a destination. Therefore it is important for any kind of service business like H&T industry to acknowledge and embrace the rapid changes in technology in order to gain competitive advantage in this world of complex market. Now when we talk about visitscotland. com, it is just after signing a deal with Tiscover that led to the growing popularity as one of UK and Ireland’s most successful tourism website attracting more tourists than the national websites for England, Wales and Ireland combined (Visit Scotland, 2007). In fact researchers forecasted that Tiscover would create a faster and more powerful visitscotland. com and that Scotland’s internet booking agency’s target to increase its online visitor by 50 percent to almost 16 million in 2008 (Fields, 2006). Since the launching in November 2002, visitscotland has sold over ? 60 million of bookings in total. It is consistently ranked in the top 25 of all travel and destination sites and user sessions have more than doubled in the last few years (Visit Scotland, 2007). All these developments and success of the website comes from the use of business solution and technology solution from Tiscover as well as Atos. Tiscover provided DMS solutions, web solutions and emarketing for visitscotland. Similarly Atos provided IT platform and services for the website. Overall it was a good move by visitscotland for integrating its service with latest technology solutions and services from Tiscover. In the past visitscotland. om had problems of discontent from smaller tourism businesses about the way the website operated due to which smaller tourism businesses ended up allocating a percentage of rooms to the site and commissions paid for every bookings made through the site. For this, Tiscover came up with a solution which allowed other service providers to take booking through their own website without having to pay any commission. This new Tiscover technology provides tools which allow other tourism businesses to take their own bookings but at the same time maintain collaboration and flexible relationship with other tourism businesses. In conclusion, while we appreciate the positive outcomes of the collaboration of visitscotland with Tiscover, we should also understand that business organizations, especially for service-oriented businesses like tourism and hospitality, should have the flexibility to adapt to changes in technology and changes in the complexity of consumer behaviour in order to maintain the competitive edge. 3. 6Summary Looking back at the history of visitscotland and how it revamped its service offering over the years has been a popular topic of discussion for many tourism market researchers. Although it is quite apparent that after the collaboration with Tiscover, it made huge success by increasing the number of visitors year after year and maintaining its position among top 25 travel and destination sites, it is also important to further develop and maintain the quality of services being offered. For any tourism business organization, communicating and providing access to such diverse and rich content is a challenge. Perhaps the success of visitscotland. com is mainly due to its quality of the homepage, the ability to access information, calls to action and on search engine performance. This should serve as a challenge as well as an example to many destination management organizations, especially for developing and under-developed countries. Finally, this case study should also serve as one of the explanation for the role of ICT in the Hospitality and Tourism Industry. (Word Count: 1941 Words) 4REFERENCE LIST BOOK REFERENCE 1. Egger, R & Buhalis, D (2008). etourism case studies. UK: Butterworth Heinemann. P5-12, p175-178, p234-240. ELECTRONIC REFERENCE 1. Atos Origin, 2009, (Online), (Retrieved on 6th September 2009). Available: https://www. atosorigin. com/en-us/about_us/Company_Profile/default. htm 2. Business Dictionary, 2009, (Online), (Retrieved on 1st September 2009). Available: https://www. businessdictionary. com/definition/Global-Distribution-System-GDS. html 3. Das, S, 2002, Global Distribution System in Present Times, (Online), (Retrieved on 1st September 2009). Available: https://www. hotel-online. com/News/PR2002_4th/Oct02_GDS. html 4. Fields, J, 2006, VisitScotland to revamp web portal TOURISM INTERNET, (Online), (Retrieved on 7th September 2009). Available: https://findarticles. com/p/articles/mi_qn4156/is_20060723/ai_n16638865/ 5. Hotel management-Network, 2009, (Online), (Retrieved on 3rd September 2009). Available:
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Hospitality Industry. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Surname Centre Number

Surname Centre Number Candidate Signature Other Names Candidate Number Leave blank General Certificate of Education June 2004 Advanced Level Examination BIOLOGY/HUMAN BIOLOGY (SPECIFICATION A) Unit 5 Inheritance, Evolution and Ecosystems Tuesday 22 June 2004 Morning Session No additional materials are required. You may use a calculator. BYA5 For Examiner’s Use Number 1 2 Mark Number Mark Time allowed: 1 hour 30 minutes Instructions • Use blue or black ink or ball-point pen. • Fill in the boxes at the top of this page. • Answer all questions in the spaces provided. All working must be shown. Do all rough work in this book. Cross through any work you do not want marked. Information • The maximum mark for this paper is 75. • Mark allocations are shown in brackets. • You will be assessed on your ability to use an appropriate form and style of writing, to organise relevant information clearly and coherently, and to use specialist vocabulary, where appropriate. • The degree of legibility of your handwriting and the level of accuracy of your spelling, punctuation and grammar will also be taken into account. 3 4 5 6 7 8 Total (Column 1) Total (Column 2) TOTAL > Examiner’s Initials APW/0204/BYA5 BYA5 2 Answer all questions in the spaces provided. LEAVE MARGIN BLANK 1 The drawings show three cells. Two of the cells are from multicellular organisms and one is a single-celled organism. The three organisms belong to different kingdoms. 30 µm 60 µm 1 µm Cell A Cell B Cell C Name the kingdom to which each organism belongs. In each case, give one feature of the cell, visible in the drawing, which is characteristic of the kingdom and which helps to distinguish it from cells of organisms belonging to the other two kingdoms. Cell A Kingdom ................................................................................................................................ Feature ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................. Cell B Kingdom ................................................................................................................................ Feature ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................. Cell C Kingdom ................................................................................................................................ Feature ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................ (6 marks) 6 APW/0204/BYA5 3 LEAVE MARGIN BLANK 2 Division of the nucleus by meiosis produces haploid cells from a diploid cell. Nuclei produced by mitosis have the same number of chromosomes as the parent nucleus. (a) What is the biological importance of reducing the chromosome number when the cell divides by meiosis? ....................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... (2 marks) (b) The table gives one difference between meiosis and mitosis. Complete the table by giving three further differences. Meiosis Mitosis 1 Reduces the chromosome number Maintains the same chromosome number as in the parent nucleus 2 3 4 (3 marks) 5 Turn over APW/0204/BYA5 4 LEAVE MARGIN BLANK 3 Phytoplankton are microscopic photosynthesising organisms which live in water. In favourable environmental conditions they have a very high rate of reproduction. They are eaten by microscopic animals called zooplankton. In an investigation, samples of water were removed from a lake at intervals over a twelve-month period and the biomasses of these organisms were determined. The results are shown in the graph. Phytoplankton Biomass Zooplankton Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Month The diagram shows the relationship between the biomass of the phytoplankton and the biomass of the zooplankton for one of the months during this investigation. Zooplankton Phytoplankton (a) Use the graph to give one month in which this relationship would have been found. ....................................................................................................................................................... (1 mark) APW/0204/BYA5 5 LEAVE MARGIN BLANK (b) Explain why the biomass of the primary consumers is less than the biomass of the producers in most communities. ....................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................ .......................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... (3 marks) (c) Explain why the biomass of the phytoplankton in the lake could be less than that of the zooplankton, as shown in the diagram. ...................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... (1 mark) 5 TURN OVER FOR THE NEXT QUESTION Turn over APW/0204/BYA5 6 LEAVE MARGIN BLANK 4 The two sets of apparatus shown in the diagram were used to find the volume of oxygen used and the volume of carbon dioxide produced by germinating castor oil seeds. Both A and B contained the same mass of seeds. Apparatus A also contained a small test tube of potassium hydroxide pellets which absorbed carbon dioxide from the air in the apparatus. Over a 24-hour period, the water rose up the glass tube in each apparatus. The water rose further in apparatus A than in apparatus B. A Test tube containing potassium hydroxide pellets (absorb carbon dioxide) 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 B Germinating castor oil seeds Water APW/0204/BYA5 7 LEAVE MARGIN BLANK (a) The changes in volume of gas in apparatus A and in apparatus B were calculated. Explain how the changes in volume in apparatus A and apparatus B could be used to find (i) the volume of oxygen used by the seeds; ...................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. (1 mark) (ii) the volume of carbon dioxide produced by the seeds. ................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. (2 marks) (b) (i) The main food reserve of castor oil seeds is a substance called triricinolein. The equation shows oxidation of this substance. 2 C57H104O9 + 157 O2 14 CO2 + 104 H2O Use the equation to calculate the respiratory quotient (RQ) when triricinolein is used as the respiratory substrate. Show your working. RQ = ............................................... (2 marks) (ii) The RQ for the germinating castor oil seeds, determined using the apparatus in the diagram, was 0. 85. Apart from experimental error, suggest one reason for the difference between this value and the answer to part (b)(i). ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................ (1 mark) 6 Turn over APW/0204/BYA5 8 LEAVE MARGIN BLANK 5 Mayflies are insects which lay their eggs in streams and rivers. The nymphs which hatch from the eggs live in the water for several years. Mayfly nymphs were collected by disturbing the gravel of a stream bed. A net placed immediately downstream caught any animals which were washed out of the gravel. Eight samples were collected from shallow, fast-flowing parts of the stream and eight from deeper, slow-flowing parts. Nymphs from two different families of mayfly were found. The results are given in the table. Family Caenidae Shallow water Mean number of nymphs Standard deviation 2. 38 1. 51 Deep water 12. 88 7. 92 Family Baetidae Shallow water 24. 50 6. 72 Deep water 6. 00 1. 51 (a) Describe how you would have collected the samples in order to ensure they were representative of the habitats being investigated and could be compared with each other. ...................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... (3 marks) (b) Which one of the four samples showed the greatest variation within the sample? Give evidence from the table for your answer. ....................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... (1 mark) (c) The two families of mayfly nymph occupy different ecological niches. (i) What is meant by the term ecological niche? ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. 1 mark) APW/0204/BYA5 9 LEAVE MARGIN BLANK (ii) Describe the evidence in the table which suggests that the two families of mayflies occupy different ecological niches. ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. (1 mark) (iii) Explain the advantage to these two families of mayflies of occupying different ecological niches. ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................. ................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................. 2 marks) 8 TURN OVER FOR THE NEXT QUESTION Turn over APW/0204/BYA5 10 LEAVE MARGIN BLANK 6 The diagram shows the light-dependent reactions of photosynthesis. Electron acceptor B Electron acceptor NADP C electrons electrons ATP electrons Chlorophyll Chlorophyll electrons 4H2O 4OH– + 4H+ LIGHT LIGHT 2H2O + A (a) In which part of a chloroplast do the light-dependent reactions occur? ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 mark) (b) Name the substances in boxes A, B and C. A ................................................................ B ............................ + ............................. C ................................................................. (3 marks) APW/0204/BYA5 11 LEAVE MARGIN BLANK (c) Use information in the diagram to explain (i) the role of chlorophyll in photolysis; ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................ (3 marks) (ii) how the energy of light is converted into chemical energy in the light-dependent reactions. ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. 3 marks) QUESTION 6 CONTINUES ON THE NEXT PAGE Turn over APW/0204/BYA5 12 LEAVE MARGIN BLANK (d) In an investigation, single-celled algae were kept in bright light and were supplied with carbon dioxide containing radioactive carbon atoms. After 300 seconds, the carbon dioxide supply was turned off. The graph shows how the concentrations of carbon dioxide, glycerate 3-phosphate (GP) and ribulose bisphosphate (RuBP) changed. 3 Carbon dioxide 2 Concentration / arbitrary units GP RuBP 1 0 100 200 Time / s (i) Explain why, between 0 seconds and 300 seconds, the concentration of radioactive GP remained constant. ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. (3 marks) 300 400 (ii) Explain why, between 300 seconds and 380 seconds, the concentration of radioactive RuBP increased. ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. (2 marks) 15 APW/0204/BYA5
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Surname Centre Number. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Cash Basis Vs Accrual Basis Accounting

Compare and Contrast Cash Basis Accounting and Accrual Basis Accounting The major objectives for business entity are to earn profit. Every company keeps their financial records and prepares their financial reports. There are two main accounting methods which are used to keep recording of the business. They are cash basis accounting (cash method) and accrual basis (accrual method). Either of any method can use in businesses. Company can choose the method which is benefit for them. The cash basis is the most simple in that the accounting records are kept on the actual flow of cash in and out of the business. Revenues are recorded when cash (or cheque) is received and expenses are recorded when they are actually paid. The cash basis is approach is used by small business entities and sole proprietors who are conduct most of their activities in cash. In this way income and expense is more accurate. Moreover the cash basis justified for a business because they have few receivables and payables. Accrual basis is a accounting method which transactions are counted when the item is delivered or the service occurs. Accrual basis of accounting, revenue is recognized in the period in which a business sells goods or performs services. This means revenues are recorded when they are earned, even though the cash transactions to support them occur later. And expenses are recorded when they are incurred, this may be before or after they are paid. For example, if your company sold $1000 furniture in January 1 2009 but was paid in January 15, 2009, after the furniture was shipped. In the accrual basis, the credit of the $1000 would be counted on January 1st, even though it had not yet been realized. Under the cash basis accounting system would record that $1000 on January 5th, the day the cash is realized. Cash basis accounting recognizes income when money is received. Accrual basis accounting recognizes income when goods are shipped. Therefore, income is entered into their accounting ledger even though payment has not yet been received. For instance your income ledger may show thousands of dollars in sales, while in reality your bank account is empty because your customers haven’t paid you yet. This method has the advantage of tracking upcoming expenses and income for better future planning. In some cases, if in a given period business collect little or no receivables and business pay lot of bills. Under the accrual basis of accounting, it doesn’t care whether you have collected or paid your bills. Income (received or not) is matched to an expense (paid or not) resulting in a proper match of revenue, with the expense generated to produce the revenue. This provides a true picture of operations. Under the cash basis accounting, if business recorded expenses without income. Thus the business lost their money. On other hand, business collects a lot of money and don’t pay their bills, business become a big income. As a result of this method it gives inaccurate revenue so that cash basis leads to misleading financial statements. The cash basis does not provide a true and their view of the financial performance and it is not good fir manufacturing operations. When goods and services are performed on credit, this method does not recognize revenues. For example, Construction Company takes a machine (such as truck) on credit. But under the accrual basis of accounting recognize the revenue and keep track of account receivable. Therefore using accrual basis in business tracking financial reports are more meanful because accrual basis matches the revenue to the time period in which it is earned or accrued. Accrual basis is generally required to be used in order to confirm to generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) in preparing financial statements for external users. The cash basis accounting is not in accordance with the generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). It is used only in selected situations such as very small businesses (when permitted) for income tax reporting. In addition, Accrual basis accounting matches revenues to the time period in which they are earned and matches expenses to the time period in which they are incurred. While it gives much more detail information on your business than cash basis. In modern world accrual basis of accounting is used in businesses for its extra benefits than cash basis. As far as I am concerting for accounting purposes, the best method, regardless of the type of business is the accrual basis accounting method. Since cash basis accounting can distort the true operations of your business, and incorrectly reflect income. Reference =>Cash basis, investorglossary, retrived may 13,2008 from https://investorglossary. com,html =>Accounting methods, answers, retrived may 8,2009,from https://www. answers. com =>Accrual Accounting, www. entrepreneur. com,encyclopedia,term,html
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Cash Basis vs Accrual Basis Accounting. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Do you Think Firms have any Responsibility to Society?

MBC 703 –CORPORATE FINANCE & ACCOUNTS ASSIGNMENT: The Primary goal of a firm has been held out to be shareholder wealth maximization which translates to maximizing stock prices. In light of this statement, do you think firms have any responsibility to society? BY Akanji Emmanuel olusegun BSU/MS/MBA/08/3104 FACULTY OF MANAGEMENT SCIENCE MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (MBA) BENUE STATE UNIVERSITY MAKURDI. AUGUST,2010 1. 0 Introduction:

The fundamental economic role of business is to make profit and to maximize shareholders wealth. Therefore, this primary objective is carried out in the society. Firms Operations are not performed in a vacuum but in an environment. Business Organizations are open system that must interact and respond to the environment. The performance of the Firm therefore is influence by the environment. The environment of business is made up of all the elements that are relevant to an organization’s operation though outside its control.

This means that to survive in business environment, firm must anticipate, interact, act and react to environments to utilize the opportunities (maximizing Shareholder wealth) and avert the threats of not getting involve in(corporate social responsibilities) protect the interest of the societies. 1. 1 What is Corporate social responsibility? : Corporate social responsibility (CSR), also known as corporate responsibility, corporate citizenship, responsible business, sustainable responsible business (SRB), or corporate social performance, CSR is a form of corporate self-regulation integrated into a business model.

Ideally, CSR policy would function as a built-in, self-regulating mechanism whereby business would monitor and ensure its support to law, ethical standards, and international norms. The definition of CSR used within an organization can vary from the strict "stakeholder impacts" definition used by many CSR advocates and will often include charitable efforts and volunteering. CSR may be based within the human resources, business development or public relations departments of an organisation, or may be given a separate unit reporting to the CEO or in some cases directly to the board.

Some companies may implement CSR-type values without a clearly defined team or programme. Consequently, business would embrace responsibility for the impact of its activities on the environment, consumers, employees, communities, stakeholders and all other members of the public sphere. Furthermore, CSR-focused businesses would proactively promote the public interest by encouraging community growth and development, and voluntarily eliminating practices that harm the public sphere, regardless of legality.

Essentially, CSR is the deliberate inclusion of public interest into corporate decision-making, and the honouring of a triple bottom line: People, Planet, Profit. Free market theory founded on liberal business ethos, presumably from Adam Smith: In the free marketplace, the essential (and ethical) aim for business leaders is to relentlessly pursue capital for their shareholders. The sole responsibility of business becomes simple: to facilitate the efficient allocation of economic resources and maximize shareholder wealth (i. e. become and remain as profitable as possible). Thus wealth creation transformed from selfish pursuit to “moral act. ” Organized corporate responsibility programs not core function of business but seen ancillary to essential goal of profit-making This includes not only activities such a philanthropy, civic volunteerisms, and the like, but also “people centered” strategic public relations, such as Identifying and building mutually beneficial relationships with publics, or Establishing and maintaining a favorable public reputation Sacconi(2004). 2. 0 CSR and Value Assertion

Bansal(2000) stated that Corporate social responsibility are more than philanthropy, not just extraneous activity but should be core moral part of spectrum of obligations businesses address as part of society: in his word, he thought specifically about those decisions which managers face in the daily course of carrying out the firm's normal business activities, but which carry inherent ethical connotations. Examples of these types of decisions would include those decisions regarding layoffs, plant closings, workplace safety, product safety, worker compensation, executive salaries, information disclosure, or the level of pollution emissions . 1 Business Decisions and Corporate social responsibility Because every business decision ultimately affects someone, the decision should be made responsibly. Public relations should play a vital role in decision making by pointing out the potential implications and consequences of all of the firm's behaviors not only for the various stakeholders of the business but, in the long run, for the organization itself. Elements of Liberal Business Ethos • Society is based on atomistic individual freedom, • Individuals are exclusively self-interested; • All relationships in economic society are by nature instrumental; Free markets are inherently stable and self-regulating; • There is a natural division of labor between business and government; and • The sole "ethical" responsibility of business is to maximize shareholder wealth (profits). Adam Smith credited with articulating basis for liberal business ethos in the Wealth of Nations: 2. 2 APPROACHES TO CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITIES An approach for CSR that is becoming more widely accepted is community-based development approach. In this approach, corporations work with local communities to better themselves.

Often activities companies participate in are establishing education facilities for adults and Children, given scholarship and HIV/AIDS education programmes. The majority of these CSR projects are established in Nigeria by blue cheap companies such as Shell Nigeria in the Niger delta, Daimond bank Nigeria Plc –Building School Hostels Accommodation, AP oil, First bank Nigeria Plc to mention but a few. A more common approach of CSR is philanthropy. This includes monetary donations and aid given to local organizations and impoverished communities in developing countries.

Some organization do not like this approach as it does not help build on the skills of the local people, whereas community-based development generally leads to more sustainable development. Another approach to CSR is to incorporate the CSR strategy directly into the business strategy of an organization. For instance, Diamond Bank Nigeria PLC in one of her product sponsor children to South Africa for maintaining some balances in their account. Another approach is garnering increasing corporate responsibility interest. This is called Creating Shared Value, or CSV.

The shared value model is based on the idea that corporate success and social welfare are interdependent. A business needs a healthy, educated workforce, sustainable resources and adept government to compete effectively. For society to thrive, profitable and competitive businesses must be developed and supported to create income, wealth, tax revenues, and opportunities for philanthropy. CSV received global attention in the Harvard Business Review article Strategy & Society: The Link between Competitive Advantage and Corporate Social Responsibility Michael(2000).

Mark(1998) In his article provides insights and relevant examples of companies that have developed deep linkages between their business strategies and corporate social responsibility. Many approaches to CSR pit businesses against society, emphasizing the costs and limitations of compliance with externally imposed social and environmental standards. CSV acknowledges trade-offs between short-term profitability and social or environmental goals, but focuses more on the opportunities for competitive advantage from building a social value proposition 2. 3 Criticisms and concerns

The practice of CSR is subject to much debate and criticism. Proponents argue that there is a strong business case for CSR, in that corporations benefit in multiple ways by operating with a perspective broader and longer than their own immediate, short-term profits. Critics argue that CSR distracts from the fundamental economic role of businesses; others argue that it is nothing more than superficial window-dressing; others yet argue that it is an attempt to pre-empt the role of governments as a watchdog over powerful multinational corporations. Corporate Social Responsibility has been redefined throughout the years.

However, it essentially is titled to aid to an organization's mission as well as a guide to what the company stands for and will uphold to its consumers. Development Business ethics is one of the forms of applied ethics that examines ethical principles and moral or ethical problems that can arise in a business environment. CSR and the nature of business :Milton Friedman and others have argued that a corporation's purpose is to maximize returns to its shareholders, and that since (in their view), only people can have social responsibilities, corporations are only responsible to their shareholders and not to society as a whole.

Although they accept that corporations should obey the laws of the countries within which they work, they assert that corporations have no other obligation to society. Some people perceive CSR as incongruent with the very nature and purpose of business, and indeed a hindrance to free trade. Those who assert that CSR is contrasting with capitalism and are in favor of neoliberalism argue that improvements in health, longevity and/or infant mortality have been created by economic growth attributed to free enterprise.

Critics of this argument perceive neoliberalism as opposed to the well-being of society and a hindrance to human freedom. They claim that the type of capitalism practiced in many developing countries is a form of economic and cultural imperialism, noting that these countries usually have fewer labor protections, and thus their citizens are at a higher risk of exploitation by multinational corporations. A wide variety of individuals and organizations operate in between these poles. For example, the REALeadership Alliance asserts that the business of leadership (be it corporate or otherwise) is to change the world for the better.

Many religious and cultural traditions hold that the economy exists to serve human beings, so all economic entities have an obligation to society (e. g. Economic Justice for All). Moreover, as discussed above, many CSR proponents point out that CSR can significantly improve long-term corporate profitability because it reduces risks and inefficiencies while offering a host of potential benefits such as enhanced brand reputation and employee engagement. 2. 4 CSR and questionable motives

Some critics believe that CSR programs are undertaken by companies such as British American Tobacco (BAT), the petroleum giant BP (well-known for its high-profile advertising campaigns on environmental aspects of its operations), and to distract the public from ethical questions posed by their core operations. They argue that some corporations start CSR programs for the commercial benefit they enjoy through raising their reputation with the public or with government. They suggest that corporations which exist solely to maximize profits are unable to advance the interests of society as a whole.

Another concern is when companies claim to promote CSR and be committed to Sustainable Development whilst simultaneously engaging in harmful business practices. For example, since the 1970s, the McDonald's Corporation's association with Ronald McDonald House has been viewed as CSR and relationship marketing. More recently, as CSR has become mainstream, the company has beefed up its CSR programs related to its labor, environmental and other practices All the same, in McDonald's Restaurants v Morris & Steel, Lord Justices Pill, May and Keane ruled that it was fair comment to say that McDonald's employees worldwide 'do badly in terms of pay and onditions' and true that 'if one eats enough McDonald's food, one's diet may well become high in fat etc. , with the very real risk of heart disease. ' Shell has a much-publicized CSR policy and was a pioneer in triple bottom line reporting, but this did not prevent the 2004 scandal concerning its misreporting of oil reserves, which seriously damaged its reputation and led to charges of hypocrisy.

Since then, the Shell Foundation has become involved in many projects across the world, including a partnership with Marks and Spencer (UK) in three flower and fruit growing communities across Africa Gary (2004) Critics concerned with corporate hypocrisy and insincerity generally suggest that better governmental and international regulation and enforcement, rather than voluntary measures, are necessary to ensure that companies behave in a socially responsible manner.

Others, such as Patricia Werhane argue that CSR should be looked more upon as a Corporate Moral Responsibility, and limit the reach of CSR by focusing more on direct impacts of the organization as viewed through a systems perspective to identify stakeholders Fields(2002). In the increasingly conscience-focused marketplaces of the 21st century, the demand for more ethical business processes and actions (known as ethicism) is increasing.

Simultaneously, pressure is applied on industry to improve business ethics through new public initiatives and laws (e. g. higher UK road tax for higher-emission vehicles). The term CSR came in to common use in the early 1970s, after many multinational corporations formed, although it was seldom abbreviated. The term stakeholder, meaning those on whom an organization's activities have an impact, was used to describe corporate owners beyond shareholders as a result of an influential Freeman(1984). . 5 Potential business Impacts of CSR The scale and nature of the Impacts of CSR for an organization can vary depending on the nature of the enterprise, and are difficult to quantify, though there is a large body of literature exhorting business to adopt measures beyond financial ones found a correlation between social/environmental performance and financial performance. However, businesses may not be looking at short-run financial returns when developing their CSR strategy.

A recent survey of 20,000 people in 20 countries offers some fascinating insights into the way consumers, and societies at large, perceive the social and environmental responsibilities of business. Corporate Social Responsibility Monitor 2001: Global Public Opinion on the Changing Role of Companies identifies those aspects of corporate practice that matter most to the general public. It also reveals some intriguing differences in priorities between different regions of the world.

The survey was undertaken by Environics International, and involved interviews with around 1,000 people in each of 20 countries including the USA, Canada, Mexico, Britain, France, Germany, Japan, India, Russia and Nigeria. The key findings are as follows. 1. Significant numbers of investors take a company's social performance into consideration when making investment decisions 2. In wealthy countries, social responsibility makes a greater contribution to corporate reputation than brand image 3. Companies that ignore social responsibility place market share at risk 4.

Views and behaviours of opinion leaders indicate that consumers' social expectations of companies will continue to grow 5. North American consumers represent the most socially demanding market for companies 6. Two distinct groups of citizens, making up a third of the world, are engaged in pressurizing companies to assume greater social responsibility Human resources A CSR programme can be an aid to recruitment and retention, particularly within the competitive graduate student market. Potential recruits often ask about a firm's CSR policy during an interview, and having a comprehensive policy can give an advantage.

CSR can also help improve the perception of a company among its staff, particularly when staff can become involved through payroll giving, fundraising activities or community volunteering. See also Corporate Social Entrepreneurship, whereby CSR can also be driven by employees' personal values, in addition to the more obvious economic and governmental drivers. What to Do? Articulate an alternative corporate ethical framework that places public relations into the core goals of socially responsible corporations.

Public relations often perceived as attempt by cynical corporations to manipulate public opinion. Sadly true in some cases, but PR much more than this. 3. 0 Conclusion If Corporate Social Responsibilities(CSR) could become truly valued and supported by all Firm, it could become the foundation for a revised ethos between businesses and their societies all over the world. Such a revision should turn the invisible hand of business profitability into a visible and active hand of social prosperity. And businesses would be the better for it. . 0 Recommendations If corporate morality is to change into something less selfish and more humane, it should be guided by someone who values human relationships and be socially responsible too. Corporations must acknowledge that they are part of broader society and that publics in the society can have an impact on their achievements. Corporate Social Responsibilities(CSR) is based on publics, and publics are cultural constructs. Corporate Social Responsibilities , therefore, must take into account culture. REFERENCES: Baker, M. Companies in Crisis- What to do when it all goes wrong. " Bansal, P. , R. Roth (2000). "Why Companies Go Green: A model of Ecological Responsiveness". The Academy of Management Journal, Vol. 43, No. 4. Bulkeley, H. (2001). "Governing Climate Change: The Politics and Risk Society". Transactions of the Institute of British Geographers, New Series, Vol. 26, No. 4. Davis Lewiz (2001) “Corporate Social Responsibility Monitor” Global Public Opinion on the Changing Role of Companies https://www. environicsinternational. com/ Fields, S. 2002). "Sustainable Business Makes Dollars and Cents". Environmental Health Perspectives, Vol. 110, No. 3. Freeman K(1984). “Business and Corporate Social Responsibility” New York. Fry, L. W. , G. D. Keim, R. E. Meiners (1982). "Corporate Contributions: Altruistic or for Profit? " The Academy of Management Journal, Vol. 25, No. 1. Gary Woller, (2004) “Business Responsibility and Society- A Public Relation Perspective” Mark R. Kramer(1998), “V FSG Social Impact Advisors. ” Kennedy School Harvard University. Michael E.

Porter(2001) a leading authority on competitive strategy and head of the Institute for Strategy and Competitiveness at Harvard Business School Sacconi, L. (2004). A Social Contract Account for CSR as Extended Model of Corporate Governance (Part II): Compliance, Reputation and Reciprocity. Journal of Business Ethics, No. 11. Sullivan, N. ; R. Schiafo (2005). Talking Green, Acting Dirty (Op-Ed). New York Times, June 12, 2005. Sun, William (2010), How to Govern Corporations So They Serve the Public Good: A Theory of Corporate Governance Emergence, New York: Edwin Mellen, ISBN 9780773438637

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Do You Think Firms Have Any Responsibility to Society?. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Classification and Division of Beam and Arch Bridge

There are three basic types of bridges, two of them are the arch and beam bridge. Of the first type the form of the load-bearing structure or its actual shape is convex. The load of an arch bridge is carried outward along the curve of the arch to the abutments at each ends. These abutments or supports carry the load and keeps the ends of the bridge from spreading out. Arch bridges can be divided into two major types, the old and the modern arch bridges. Under the first types are the Corbel arch bridges and the Aqueducts, both are designed that each succeeding layer over the other. The materials used for the first type are simple masses of stone bricks which made it last until the present times. Of the second type more complex procedures, calculations, and equipments are used to build these steel bridges. Under the second type are the Deck arch bridges, through arch bridges and Tied arch bridges. All of these are used to bridge large gap with their strong and beautiful structures which makes it not only a way of transportation but also a piece of attraction among large cities. On the other hand, Beam bridges have the form of the load-bearing structure or its actual shape is simply flat. The load of a beam bridge is basically supported by its piers or foundations. The beam bridge is horizontally self supporting. It exerts mainly vertical downward force on its foundations. There are two main types of beam bridges namely the simple span beam bridge and the cantilevers. The simple span beam bridge is found in practice to provide the most economical form of bridge, it is simply defined as a bridge supported at its ends. The cantilever provides a means to make beam bridges of considerably greater spans; it is also called the girder bridge. These beam bridges are basically made up of steels and concretes.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Classification and Division of Beam and Arch Bridge. (2017, Sep 23). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/09/page/8/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay
Stop wasting your time searching for samples!
You can find a skilled professional who can write any paper for you.
Get unique paper